4. 大双品义注巴利 4. Mahāyamakavaggo
276 段
《小牛角经》的注释巴利
1. Cūḷagosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
325 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《小牛角经》。其中“住在那提迦”:那提迦是依着一座湖的两个村子,属于小父和大父两人的儿子们,他就住在其中一个村子里。“在砖堂”:就是砖砌的住处。据说有一次,世尊为了摄受大众,在跋耆国游行,到了那提迦。那提迦的居民向世尊做了大布施,听完说法后心生净信,就商量说:“我们给导师建个住处吧。”于是他们用砖建了一座殿堂,装饰墙壁、台阶、柱子,画上猛兽等图案,涂上灰泥,做好花鬘、藤蔓等装饰,铺好地面、敷具、床座等,奉献给导师。后来人们又陆续为比丘僧团建了夜间住处、日间住处、会堂、经行道等。这样,这处住处就变得很大,因此说“在砖堂”。巴利
325.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷagosiṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha nātike viharatīti nātikā nāma ekaṃ taḷākaṃ nissāya dvinnaṃ cūḷapitimahāpitiputtānaṃ dve gāmā, tesu ekasmiṃ gāme. Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāmaye āvasathe. Ekasmiṃ kira samaye bhagavā mahājanasaṅgahaṃ karonto vajjiraṭṭhe cārikaṃ caramāno nātikaṃ anuppatto. Nātikavāsino manussā bhagavato mahādānaṃ datvā dhammakathaṃ sutvā pasannahadayā, ‘‘satthu vasanaṭṭhānaṃ karissāmā’’ti mantetvā iṭṭhakāheva bhittisopānatthambhe vāḷarūpādīni dassento pāsādaṃ katvā sudhāya limpitvā mālākammalatākammādīni niṭṭhāpetvā bhummattharaṇamañcapīṭhādīni paññapetvā satthu niyyātesuṃ. Aparāparaṃ panettha manussā bhikkhusaṅghassa rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānamaṇḍapacaṅkamādīni kārayiṃsu. Iti so vihāro mahā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘giñjakāvasathe’’ti.
在牛角娑罗林园:那里有一棵最大的树,从树干上长出了形状像牛角一样的枝干,因此整片树林就依这棵树而被称为牛角娑罗林。“园”是森林的通称。所以“牛角娑罗林园”就是牛角娑罗林那片森林的意思。“住”:是指他们享受着和合之乐而住。因为对这些善男子来说,在《上五十经》里讲的是他们还是凡夫的时期,而这里讲的是他们成为诸漏尽者的时期。那时,他们已经获得了法味,获得了立足处,证得了无碍解,成为诸漏尽者,享受着和合之乐住在那里。这段话就是针对这个情况说的。巴利
Gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti tattha ekassa jeṭṭhakarukkhassa khandhato gosiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ hutvā viṭapaṃ uṭṭhahi, taṃ rukkhaṃ upādāya sabbampi taṃ vanaṃ gosiṅgasālavananti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Dāyoti avisesena araññassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti gosiṅgasālavanaaraññeti attho. Viharantīti sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā viharanti. Imesañhi kulaputtānaṃ uparipaṇṇāsake puthujjanakālo kathito, idha khīṇāsavakālo. Tadā hi te laddhassādā laddhapatiṭṭhā adhigatapaṭisambhidā khīṇāsavā hutvā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavamānā tattha vihariṃsu. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.
世尊没有叫上法将大目犍连长老等八十位大弟子中的任何一位,甚至也没有叫上持法藏的阿难长老,就自己拿着衣钵,像离开象群的象、离开狮群的黑狮、被风吹散的云一样,独自一人前往牛角娑罗林园。
那么,世尊为什么在这里要亲自去呢?因为那三位善男子正安住在和合共住的法喜中,世尊为了鼓励他们,为了悲悯后来的众生,也是出于对法的尊重。世尊大概是这么想的:“我要鼓励这三位善男子,称赞他们,亲切接待他们,然后为他们说法。”首先,他就是出于鼓励而去的。接着他又想:“将来会有善男子这样想:正自觉者亲自去到那些和合共住的人那里,亲切接待他们,为他们说法,还鼓励了三位善男子。那谁还不愿意和合共住呢?”他们这样一想,就会很快灭尽痛苦。这是出于对后来众生的悲悯而去的。再者,诸佛都是尊重法的,这种对法的尊重在《车乘经》里已经说得很清楚了。所以,他也是出于这份对法的尊重,为了彰显法而去的。巴利
Yena gosiṅgasālavanadāyo tenupasaṅkamīti dhammasenāpatimahāmoggallānattheresu vā asītimahāsāvakesu vā, antamaso dhammabhaṇḍāgārikaānandattherampi kañci anāmantetvā sayameva pattacīvaraṃ ādāya anīkā nissaṭo hatthī viya, yūthā nissaṭo kāḷasīho viya , vātacchinno valāhako viya ekakova upasaṅkami. Kasmā panettha bhagavā sayaṃ agamāsīti? Tayo kulaputtā sāmaggirasaṃ anubhavantā viharanti, tesaṃ paggaṇhanato, pacchimajanataṃ anukampanato dhammagarubhāvato ca. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ ime kulaputte paggaṇhitvā ukkaṃsitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā dhammaṃ nesaṃ desessāmī’’ti. Evaṃ tāva paggaṇhanato agamāsi. Aparampissa ahosi – ‘‘anāgate kulaputtā sammāsambuddho samaggavāsaṃ vasantānaṃ santikaṃ sayaṃ gantvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā dhammaṃ kathetvā tayo kulaputte paggaṇhi, ko nāma samaggavāsaṃ na vaseyyāti samaggavāsaṃ vasitabbaṃ maññamānā khippameva dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti. Evaṃ pacchimajanataṃ anukampanatopi agamāsi. Buddhā ca nāma dhammagaruno honti, so ca nesaṃ dhammagarubhāvo rathavinīte āvikatova. Iti imasmā dhammagarubhāvatopi dhammaṃ paggaṇhissāmīti agamāsi.
守林人就是守护树林的人。他为了让人们不能随便进入树林里任何他们想去的地方,不让他们把花、果、树脂或木材等拿走,就在那片被篱笆围起来的树林所设的大门处坐着,守护、保护那片树林。因此被称为“守林人”。自利之形是指他们以希求自身利益的本性而安住。如果有人在佛陀的教法中出家后,却以医生、信使、跑腿等事,靠二十一种邪命来维持生活,这个人就不叫自利者。如果有人在教法中出家后,舍弃二十一种邪命,安立在四遍净戒上,学习佛语,决意修持适合自己的头陀支,在三十八种所缘中选取合自己心意的业处,离开村落,进入森林,成就诸等至,致力于观修而住,这才叫自利者。那三位善男子正是这样,所以说“以自利之形而住”。巴利
Dāyapāloti araññapālo. So taṃ araññaṃ yathā icchiticchitappadesena manussā pavisitvā tattha pupphaṃ vā phalaṃ vā niyyāsaṃ vā dabbasambhāraṃ vā na haranti, evaṃ vatiyā parikkhittassa tassa araññassa yojite dvāre nisīditvā taṃ araññaṃ rakkhati, pāleti. Tasmā ‘‘dāyapālo’’ti vutto. Attakāmarūpāti attano hitaṃ kāmayamānasabhāvā hutvā viharanti. Yo hi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammadūtakammapahiṇagamanādīnaṃ vasena ekavīsatianesanāhi jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ na attakāmarūpo nāma. Yo pana imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvā ekavīsatianesanaṃ pahāya catupārisuddhisīle patiṭṭhāya buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhitvā sappāyadhutaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāya aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu cittaruciyaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gāmantaṃ pahāya araññaṃ pavisitvā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā vipassanāya kammaṃ kurumāno viharati, ayaṃ attakāmo nāma. Tepi tayo kulaputtā evarūpā ahesuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘attakāmarūpā viharantī’’ti.
“不要让他们感到不安”的意思就是“不要使他们不舒服”,他这样劝阻世尊。他心里想:“这些善男子和合而住,可是有些人不管到哪里都会引起争吵、口角和争执,像一头尖角凶牛那样到处冲撞,有时候两个人连一条路都走不了。说不定这个人也会那样做,破坏这些善男子的和合共住。而且这个人相貌端正,肤色如金,看起来贪爱美味,从来到这里开始,可能会通过赞叹殊胜施主和自己的侍者等,扰乱这些善男子的不放逸住。还有,这些善男子的住处都是固定的、划分好的:三间茅屋、三条经行道、三个日间住处、三张床座。而这位沙门身材高大,我想可能年纪也大,他会在不合适的时候让这些善男子从住处离开。这样一来,无论从哪方面看都会让他们不安。”他不希望这样,所以劝阻世尊:“不要让他们感到不安!”巴利
Mā tesaṃ aphāsumakāsīti tesaṃ mā aphāsukaṃ akāsīti bhagavantaṃ vāresi. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ime kulaputtā samaggā viharanti, ekaccassa ca gataṭṭhāne bhaṇḍanakalahavivādā vattanti, tikhiṇasiṅgo caṇḍagoṇo viya ovijjhanto vicarati, athekamaggena dvinnaṃ gamanaṃ na hoti, kadāci ayampi evaṃ karonto imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ samaggavāsaṃ bhindeyya. Pāsādiko ca panesa suvaṇṇavaṇṇo surasagiddho maññe, gatakālato paṭṭhāya paṇītadāyakānaṃ attano upaṭṭhākānañca vaṇṇakathanādīhi imesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ appamādavihāraṃ bhindeyya. Vasanaṭṭhānāni cāpi etesaṃ kulaputtānaṃ nibaddhāni paricchinnāni tisso ca paṇṇasālā tayo caṅkamā tīṇi divāṭṭhānāni tīṇi mañcapīṭhāni. Ayaṃ pana samaṇo mahākāyo vuḍḍhataro maññe bhavissati. So akāle ime kulaputte senāsanā vuṭṭhāpessati. Evaṃ sabbathāpi etesaṃ aphāsu bhavissatī’’ti. Taṃ anicchanto, ‘‘mā tesaṃ aphāsukamakāsī’’ti bhagavantaṃ vāresi.
他是知道才阻拦,还是不知道才阻拦?是不知道。因为虽然从如来入胎那一刻起,就出现了一万个世界震动等种种神变,但住在森林里的人根性迟钝,又忙于自己的事,根本注意不到这些。而正自觉者由几千名比丘围绕,以一寻光明、八十种随形好和三十二种大人相的庄严展现佛陀威德而行走时,不用问“这是谁”就能认出来。可那时,世尊把这一切佛陀威德都藏在衣内,像满月被云层遮住一样,自己拿着钵和衣,以没人认得出的样子走来。所以守林人不知道他是谁,就拦住了他。巴利
Kiṃ panesa jānanto vāresi, ajānantoti? Ajānanto. Kiñcāpi hi tathāgatassa paṭisandhiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya dasasahassacakkavāḷakampanādīni pāṭihāriyāni pavattiṃsu, araññavāsino pana dubbalamanussā sakammappasutā tāni sallakkhetuṃ na sakkonti. Sammāsambuddho ca nāma yadā anekabhikkhusahassaparivāro byāmappabhāya asītianubyañjanehi dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇasiriyā ca buddhānubhāvaṃ dassento vicarati, tadā ko esoti apucchitvāva jānitabbo hoti. Tadā pana bhagavā sabbampi taṃ buddhānubhāvaṃ cīvaragabbhena paṭicchādetvā valāhakagabbhena paṭicchanno puṇṇacando viya sayameva pattacīvaramādāya aññātakavesena agamāsi. Iti naṃ ajānantova dāyapālo nivāresi.
长老说了这话。据说,长老一听到守林人那句话,心里就想:我们三个人住在这里,并没有别的出家人,可这个守林人却像跟出家人说话一样在讲话,那会是谁呢?于是他从白天休息的地方起身,站在门口朝路上张望,就看见了世尊。世尊在长老看见他的那一刻,就放出身上的光明,八十种随形好所庄严的一寻光明,像展开的金色布匹一样闪耀。长老心想:这个守林人就像伸手去抓昂起头冠的毒蛇之颈一样,明明是在跟世间最尊贵的人说话却不知道,还以为是在跟某位比丘说话。为了拦住他,长老说了这句话:别这样,守林人贤友,等等诸语。巴利
Etadavocāti thero kira mā samaṇāti dāyapālassa kathaṃ sutvāva cintesi – ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā idha viharāma, aññe pabbajitā nāma natthi, ayañca dāyapālo pabbajitena viya saddhiṃ katheti, ko nu kho bhavissatī’’ti divāṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya dvāre ṭhatvā maggaṃ olokento bhagavantaṃ addasa. Bhagavāpi therassa saha dassaneneva sarīrobhāsaṃ muñci, asītianubyañjanavirājitā byāmappabhā pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭo viya virocittha. Thero, ‘‘ayaṃ dāyapālo phaṇakataṃ āsivisaṃ gīvāya gahetuṃ hatthaṃ pasārento viya loke aggapuggalena saddhiṃ kathentova na jānāti, aññatarabhikkhunā viya saddhiṃ kathetī’’ti nivārento etaṃ, ‘‘mā, āvuso dāyapālā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
他走上前去。为什么他没有先去迎接世尊,就直接走上前呢?据说他心里这样想:“我们三个人和合共住,如果只有我一个人去迎接,那就不算和合共住了。”所以他想带上亲爱的好友一起去迎接。就像世尊是我所敬爱的,我的同伴们也是我所敬爱的。因此他想和他们一起迎接,不愿独自先行动身,便径直走上前去。然而有些人说,那些长老的树叶屋门口经行处的尽头就是世尊来的路,所以那位长老只是给他们示意后就去了。“来吧”,即从这里过来。“洗脚”,即用像绽放的莲花般的网纹手提来宝石色的水,洒在金黄色的小腿和脚上,用脚搓着脚洗脚。诸佛的身上本来不会沾上尘垢,为什么还要洗脚呢?是为了调适身体温度,也是为了使他们的心欢喜。世尊用我们献上的水洗了脚,并受用了,那些比丘因强烈的喜悦而心生欢喜,所以洗了脚。世尊对具寿阿那律说了这话,据说他是他们中较年长的。巴利
Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ akatvā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘mayaṃ tayo janā samaggavāsaṃ vasāma, sacāhaṃ ekakova paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi, samaggavāso nāma na bhavissatī’’ti piyamitte gahetvāva paccuggamanaṃ karissāmi. Yathā ca bhagavā mayhaṃ piyo, evaṃ sahāyānampi me piyoti, tehi saddhiṃ paccuggamanaṃ kātukāmo sayaṃ akatvāva upasaṅkami. Keci pana tesaṃ therānaṃ paṇṇasāladvāre caṅkamanakoṭiyā bhagavato āgamanamaggo hoti, tasmā thero tesaṃ saññaṃ dadamānova gatoti. Abhikkamathāti ito āgacchatha. Pāde pakkhālesīti vikasitapadumasannibhehi jālahatthehi maṇivaṇṇaṃ udakaṃ gahetvā suvaṇṇavaṇṇesu piṭṭhipādesu udakamabhisiñcitvā pādena pādaṃ ghaṃsanto pakkhālesi. Buddhānaṃ kāye rajojallaṃ nāma na upalimpati, kasmā pakkhālesīti? Sarīrassa utuggahaṇatthaṃ, tesañca cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ. Amhehi abhihaṭena udakena bhagavā pāde pakkhālesi, paribhogaṃ akāsīti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ balavasomanassavasena cittaṃ pīṇitaṃ hoti, tasmā pakkhālesi. Āyasmantaṃ anuruddhaṃ bhagavā etadavocāti so kira tesaṃ vuḍḍhataro.
326 世尊因为“为他做了集合则其余亦如已做”,所以只对长老说了这番话:“阿那律,你们还好吗……”等等。这里,“是否(kacci)”是表示疑问的虚词。“你们(vo)”是属格。这段话的意思是:“阿那律,你们还过得去吗?威仪还安适吗?还能维持生活吗?生命还能延续、支撑下去吗?你们是否不因乞食而疲惫?食物容易得到吗?人们见到你们来了,会不会觉得应该布施一瓢粥或一勺饭?”这是在问乞食的行仪。为什么要问这些?因为只有资具上不疲惫,才能修沙门法;而且这本身就是出家人应尽的行仪。阿那律回答之后,世尊为了问和合的事,就说:“阿那律,你们是王族出家,有大福德。人们如果不布施给住在森林里的你们,还会想到布施给谁呢?可是你们吃了这些之后,到底是像小鹿一样互相顶撞着过日子,还是彼此和合呢?”于是说出“阿那律,你们是否和合……”等话。巴利
326. Tassa saṅgahe kate sesānaṃ katova hotīti theraññeva etaṃ kacci vo anuruddhātiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tattha kaccīti pucchanatthe nipāto. Voti sāmivacanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kacci anuruddhā tumhākaṃ khamanīyaṃ, iriyāpatho vo khamati? Kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci vo jīvitaṃ yāpeti ghaṭiyati? Kacci piṇḍakena na kilamatha, kacci tumhākaṃ sulabhapiṇḍaṃ, sampatte vo disvā manussā uḷuṅkayāguṃ vā kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ vā dātabbaṃ maññantīti bhikkhācāravattaṃ pucchati. Kasmā? Paccayena akilamantena hi sakkā samaṇadhammo kātuṃ, vattameva vā etaṃ pabbajitānaṃ. Atha tena paṭivacane dinne, ‘‘anuruddhā, tumhe rājapabbajitā mahāpuññā, manussā tumhākaṃ araññe vasantānaṃ adatvā kassa aññassa dātabbaṃ maññissanti, tumhe pana etaṃ bhuñjitvā kiṃ nu kho migapotakā viya aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭentā viharatha, udāhu sāmaggibhāvo vo atthī’’ti sāmaggirasaṃ pucchanto, kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggātiādimāha.
在这里,“乳水相融”是说:就像牛奶和水互相混合,分不出彼此,好像变成了一体。佛陀这样问:你们是不是靠着和合,心念融为一体而安住?“以慈爱之眼”是指:先建立起慈心,再用这样的眼光去看,就叫慈爱之眼。问的是:你们是不是用这样的眼睛彼此相看而安住?“确实”是一个表示肯定的不变词,意思是:尊者,我们确实如此。“那么是如何”当中,“如何”只是不变词,“如何”是问原因。意思是:那你们是怎么这样安住的?是因为什么原因而安住?请告诉我这个原因。“慈身业”是指以慈心而起身业。“无论明处还是暗处”是指在人前还是在人后。其余诸项也同样是这个道理。巴利
Tattha khīrodakībhūtāti yathā khīrañca udakañca aññamaññaṃ saṃsandati, visuṃ na hoti, ekattaṃ viya upeti, kacci evaṃ sāmaggivasena ekattūpagatacittuppādā viharathāti pucchati. Piyacakkhūhīti mettacittaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā olokanacakkhūni piyacakkhūni nāma. Kacci tathārūpehi cakkhūhi aññamaññaṃ sampassantā viharathāti pucchati. Tagghāti ekaṃsatthe nipāto. Ekaṃsena mayaṃ, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Yathā kathaṃ panāti ettha yathāti nipātamattaṃ. Kathanti kāraṇapucchā. Kathaṃ pana tumhe evaṃ viharatha, kena kāraṇena viharatha, taṃ me kāraṇaṃ brūthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mettaṃ kāyakammanti mettacittavasena pavattaṃ kāyakammaṃ. Āvi ceva raho cāti sammukhā ceva parammukhā ca. Itaresupi eseva nayo.
在这里,当面的身业和语业只有在共住时才能表现出来,其他的身业和语业则在分开时才能表现出来。意业则无论在什么情况下都能表现出来。比如,共住的人看到床、椅子、木器或陶器被随便放在外面,看到之后不会轻视地想“这是谁乱放的”,而是当作自己乱放的一样收好,或者把应该整理的地方整理好——这就是当面的慈身业。有人离开后,另一个人把那人随便放着的坐卧具等用品照原样放好,或者整理应该整理的地方——这就是背后的慈身业。和共住的人一起说温和、令人欢喜的话、招待的话、让人怀念的话、符合法的话、诵经、讨论、提问、回答问题等等——这样做就是当面的慈语业。长老们离开后,说“我亲爱的朋友南迪亚长老、吉米拉长老有这样的戒、这样的行为”等等,讲述他们的功德——这就是背后的慈语业。心里作意“愿我亲爱的朋友南迪亚长老、吉米拉长老没有怨敌、没有恼害、快乐”——这样无论当面还是背后,都是慈意业。巴利
Tattha sammukhā kāyavacīkammāni sahavāse labbhanti, itarāni vippavāse. Manokammaṃ sabbattha labbhati. Yañhi sahavasantesu ekena mañcapīṭhaṃ vā dārubhaṇḍaṃ vā mattikābhaṇḍaṃ vā bahi dunnikkhittaṃ hoti, taṃ disvā kenidaṃ vaḷañjitanti avaññaṃ akatvā attanā dunnikkhittaṃ viya gahetvā paṭisāmentassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṃ vā pana ṭhānaṃ paṭijaggantassa sammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Ekasmiṃ pakkante tena dunnikkhittaṃ senāsanaparikkhāraṃ tatheva nikkhipantassa paṭijaggitabbayuttaṭṭhānaṃ vā pana paṭijaggantassa parammukhā mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Sahavasantassa pana tehi saddhiṃ madhuraṃ sammodanīyaṃ kathaṃ paṭisanthārakathaṃ sāraṇīyakathaṃ dhammīkathaṃ sarabhaññaṃ sākacchaṃ pañhapucchanaṃ pañhavissajjananti evamādikaraṇe sammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. Theresu pana pakkantesu mayhaṃ piyasahāyo nandiyatthero kimilatthero evaṃ sīlasampanno, evaṃ ācārasampannotiādiguṇakathanaṃ parammukhā mettaṃ vacīkammaṃ nāma hoti. Mayhaṃ piyamitto nandiyatthero kimilatthero avero hotu, abyāpajjo sukhī hotūti evaṃ samannāharato pana sammukhāpi parammukhāpi mettaṃ manokammaṃ hotiyeva.
尊者,我们的身体确实各不相同。因为身体就像面团或陶土一样,没法揉压成一团、合为一体。不过我想,心却是一体的。这是说,心在利益、无间、无诤、和合这些意义上,确实是一体的。那他们又是怎么放下自己的心,随别人的心而行动的呢?比如,一个人的钵里生了污垢,一个人的衣服脏了,一个人有涂地修补的作务。这时,钵里生了污垢的那个人说:贤友,我的钵里生了污垢,该煮一煮了。其他人不会说“我的衣服脏了要洗”或者“我的涂地修补要作”,而是进林子里捡柴火、劈好,把钵煮干净,做完这件事之后,再去洗衣服或者作涂地修补。就算之前有人先说了“贤友,我的衣服脏了该洗了”或者“我的叶屋污秽了该作涂地修补了”,做法也是一样的。巴利
Nānā hi kho no, bhante, kāyāti kāyañhi piṭṭhaṃ viya mattikā viya ca omadditvā ekato kātuṃ na sakkā. Ekañca pana maññe cittanti cittaṃ pana no hitaṭṭhena nirantaraṭṭhena aviggahaṭṭhena samaggaṭṭhena ekamevāti dasseti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ sakaṃ cittaṃ nikkhipitvā itaresaṃ cittavasena vattiṃsūti? Ekassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhahati, ekassa cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ hoti, ekassa paribhaṇḍakammaṃ hoti. Tattha yassa patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ, tena mamāvuso, patte malaṃ uṭṭhitaṃ pacituṃ vaṭṭatīti vutte itare mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ dhovitabbaṃ, mayhaṃ paribhaṇḍaṃ kātabbanti avatvā araññaṃ pavisitvā dārūni āharitvā chinditvā pattakaṭāhe paribhaṇḍaṃ katvā tato paraṃ cīvaraṃ vā dhovanti, paribhaṇḍaṃ vā karonti. Mamāvuso, cīvaraṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ dhovituṃ vaṭṭati, mama paṇṇasālā uklāpā paribhaṇḍaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti paṭhamataraṃ ārocitepi eseva nayo.
327 “萨度,萨度,阿那律们!”——当他们先前说“尊者,我们并没有因为团食而疲惫”时,世尊没有表示赞许。为什么呢?因为这种叫做抟食的食物,对恶趣和人天世间的众生来说,本来就是习以为常的。然而,这个世间的共住大多陷入争论;在恶趣和人天世间,这些众生本来就彼此对立,他们要和睦相处的时候很难得,只是偶尔才有。正因为和睦共住如此难得,世尊才在这里表示赞许。接着,为了询问他们不放逸的特征,世尊说:“阿那律们,你们是否……”等等。其中,“你们”只是个不变词,也可作主格,意思是“你们是否”。“在我们中”指“在我们三人中”。“乞食后返回”指在村里乞食后回来。“残余容器”指为了把多余的团食拿走存放,而把一只带盖的容器洗净放好。巴利
327.Sādhusādhu, anuruddhāti bhagavā heṭṭhā na ca mayaṃ, bhante, piṇḍakena kilamimhāti vutte na sādhukāramadāsi. Kasmā? Ayañhi kabaḷīkāro āhāro nāma imesaṃ sattānaṃ apāyalokepi devamanussalokepi āciṇṇasamāciṇṇova. Ayaṃ pana lokasannivāso yebhuyyena vivādapakkhando, apāyaloke devamanussalokepi ime sattā paṭiviruddhā eva, etesaṃ sāmaggikālo dullabho, kadācideva hotīti samaggavāsassa dullabhattā idha bhagavā sādhukāramadāsi. Idāni tesaṃ appamādalakkhaṇaṃ pucchanto kaccipana vo, anuruddhātiādimāha. Tattha voti nipātamattaṃ paccattavacanaṃ vā, kacci tumheti attho. Amhākanti amhesu tīsu janesu. Piṇḍāya paṭikkamatīti gāme piṇḍāya caritvā paccāgacchati. Avakkārapātinti atirekapiṇḍapātaṃ apanetvā ṭhapanatthāya ekaṃ samuggapātiṃ dhovitvā ṭhapeti.
据说这些长老并不一起进村乞食,因为他们乐于安住于果定。清晨,他们料理好身体,完成该做的义务,进入住处,定好时间,然后入果定而坐。他们当中,最先坐下入定的人,会按自己设定的时间最先出定。他乞食回来,走到用斋的地方,心里知道:“有两位比丘还在后面,我最先回来。”于是盖好钵,铺好座位等。如果钵里的食物刚好够量,就坐下来吃。如果有多余的,就放进残食器里,盖好钵再吃。吃完后,洗净钵,擦干,装进钵袋,拿起钵和衣,回到自己的住处。第二位回来时也知道:“一位已经先到,一位还在后面。”如果他钵里的食物正好够量,就直接吃。如果不够,就从残食器里取来补足再吃。如果有多余的,就放进残食器里,只吃够量的部分,然后像第一位长老那样回到住处。第三位回来时也知道:“两位已经先到,我最后。”他也像第二位长老那样吃完,做完该做的事,洗净钵,擦干,装进钵袋,收起座位并整理好;把饮用水瓶或洗用水瓶里剩下的水倒掉,把瓶口朝下放好;如果残食器里还有剩下的食物,就按前面说的方式处理掉,洗净容器并收拾好;然后倒掉垃圾,收起扫帚,放在蚂蚁不会经过的地方,再打扫斋堂。之后拿起钵和衣,回到自己的住处。这是长老们在村外林中的用斋处——斋堂里所行的规矩。就是针对这个,才说了“后至者”等这段话。巴利
Yo pacchāti te kira therā na ekatova bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanti, phalasamāpattiratā hete. Pātova sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā vattappaṭipattiṃ pūretvā senāsanaṃ pavisitvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdanti. Tesu yo paṭhamataraṃ nisinno attano kālaparicchedavasena paṭhamataraṃ uṭṭhāti; so piṇḍāya caritvā paṭinivatto bhattakiccaṭṭhānaṃ āgantvā jānāti – ‘‘dve bhikkhū pacchā, ahaṃ paṭhamataraṃ āgato’’ti. Atha pattaṃ pidahitvā āsanapaññāpanādīni katvā yadi patte paṭivisamattameva hoti, nisīditvā bhuñjati. Yadi atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pātiṃ pidhāya bhuñjati. Katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Dutiyopi āgantvāva jānāti – ‘‘eko paṭhamaṃ āgato, eko pacchato’’ti. So sace patte bhattaṃ pamāṇameva hoti, bhuñjati. Sace mandaṃ, avakkārapātito gahetvā bhuñjati. Sace atirekaṃ hoti, avakkārapātiyaṃ pakkhipitvā pamāṇameva bhuñjitvā purimatthero viya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Tatiyopi āgantvāva jānāti – ‘‘dve paṭhamaṃ āgatā, ahaṃ pacchato’’ti. Sopi dutiyatthero viya bhuñjitvā katabhattakicco pattaṃ dhovitvā vodakaṃ katvā thavikāya osāpetvā āsanāni ukkhipitvā paṭisāmeti; pānīyaghaṭe vā paribhojanīyaghaṭe vā avasesaṃ udakaṃ chaḍḍetvā ghaṭe nikujjitvā avakkārapātiyaṃ sace avasesabhattaṃ hoti, taṃ vuttanayena jahitvā pātiṃ dhovitvā paṭisāmeti; bhattaggaṃ sammajjati. Tato kacavaraṃ chaḍḍetvā sammajjaniṃ ukkhipitvā upacikāhi muttaṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā pattacīvaramādāya vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisati. Idaṃ therānaṃ bahivihāre araññe bhattakiccakaraṇaṭṭhāne bhojanasālāyaṃ vattaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya, ‘‘yo pacchā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
关于“看见者”等说法,应当理解为他们在寺院内部的做法。其中,“净瓶”是指洗濯用的水罐。“空”就是空无所有。“空无”是它的同义词。“不能独举”是指一个人抬不起来,极其沉重。“以手势”是指用手势示意。据说,他们从饮用水瓶等容器中拿一个空瓶,到池塘去,把瓶子内外洗净,过滤好水,放在岸边,然后用手势招呼另一位比丘,不指名呼唤,也不泛泛出声。为什么不指名呼唤?因为怕声音打扰那位比丘。为什么不泛泛出声?因为如果泛泛出声,两人可能同时出来,争着说“我先!我先!”,这样第三位比丘该做的事就被中断了。不过,他们会控制脚步声,走到另一位比丘白天住处附近,知道对方看见自己后,就打手势;那位比丘看懂手势后过来,于是两人手拉手,把东西放在两人手上一起抬起。正是针对这个情景才说:“以手势招呼另一位,手拉手地一起安放。”巴利
Yo passatītiādi pana nesaṃ antovihāre vattanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha vaccaghaṭanti ācamanakumbhiṃ. Rittanti rittakaṃ. Tucchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Avisayhanti ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ, atibhāriyaṃ. Hatthavikārenāti hatthasaññāya. Te kira pānīyaghaṭādīsu yaṃkiñci tucchakaṃ gahetvā pokkharaṇiṃ gantvā anto ca bahi ca dhovitvā udakaṃ parissāvetvā tīre ṭhapetvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ hatthavikārena āmantenti, odissa vā anodissa vā saddaṃ na karonti. Kasmā odissa saddaṃ na karonti? Taṃ bhikkhuṃ saddo bādheyyāti. Kasmā anodissa saddaṃ na karonti? Anodissa sadde dinne, ‘‘ahaṃ pure, ahaṃ pure’’ti dvepi nikkhameyyuṃ, tato dvīhi kattabbakamme tatiyassa kammacchedo bhaveyya. Saṃyatapadasaddo pana hutvā aparassa bhikkhuno divāṭṭhānasantikaṃ gantvā tena diṭṭhabhāvaṃ ñatvā hatthasaññaṃ karoti, tāya saññāya itaro āgacchati, tato dve janā hatthena hatthaṃ saṃsibbantā dvīsu hatthesu ṭhapetvā upaṭṭhapenti. Taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘hatthavikārena dutiyaṃ āmantetvā hatthavilaṅghakena upaṭṭhapemā’’ti.
“每五日一次”这句话,说的是在十四日、十五日、初八日这些日子,本来只是常规的闻法时间。他们把这件事不间断地做下去之后,每逢第五天,两位长老在还不太晚的时候沐浴,然后前往阿那律长老的住处。在那里,三个人一起坐下,从三藏中挑一部,互相提问、互相解答。他们这样研讨着,天就亮了。就是针对这个情况才说了这句话。到这里为止,长老被世尊问及不放逸之相时,恰恰就是在那些容易放逸的地方,回答了什么是不放逸之相。因为其他比丘有这些事:进村乞食的时候、出村的时候、换下裙的时候、披上衣的时候、在村里乞食的时候、说法的时候、随喜回向的时候、出村之后吃饭的时候、洗钵的时候、晾钵的时候、收拾钵和衣的时候——这些都是容易让人心思散乱、拖延耽搁的地方。所以长老为了说明“除了这些该做的事之外,我们根本没有所谓放逸的时间”,就正好在那些可能放逸的地方,解释了不放逸之相。巴利
Pañcāhikaṃ kho panāti cātuddase pannarase aṭṭhamiyanti idaṃ tāva pakatidhammassavanameva, taṃ akhaṇḍaṃ katvā pañcame pañcame divase dve therā nātivikāle nhāyitvā anuruddhattherassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Tattha tayopi nisīditvā tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ aññamaññaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanti , aññamaññaṃ vissajjenti, tesaṃ evaṃ karontānaṃyeva aruṇaṃ uggacchati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā therena bhagavatā appamādalakkhaṇaṃ pucchitena pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjitaṃ hoti. Aññesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhācāraṃ pavisanakālo, nikkhamanakālo, nivāsanaparivattanaṃ, cīvarapārupanaṃ, antogāme piṇḍāya caraṇaṃ dhammakathanaṃ, anumodanaṃ , gāmato nikkhamitvā bhattakiccakaraṇaṃ, pattadhovanaṃ, pattaosāpanaṃ, pattacīvarapaṭisāmananti papañcakaraṇaṭṭhānāni etāni. Tasmā thero amhākaṃ ettakaṃ ṭhānaṃ muñcitvā pamādakālo nāma natthīti dassento pamādaṭṭhānesuyeva appamādalakkhaṇaṃ vissajjesi.
328 世尊称赞他说得好,接着为了问他初禅,又说了“那么,你们有吗”等话。其中,“超出人法”是指超越人法。“堪称圣者智见的殊胜”是指能成就圣者境界的智的殊胜。“尊者,我们怎么会没有呢”意思是:尊者,为什么没有证得呢?其实已经证得了啊。“乃至天众”意思是“乃至正是”。巴利
328. Athassa bhagavā sādhukāraṃ datvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ pucchanto puna atthi pana votiādimāha. Tattha uttari manussadhammāti manussadhammato uttari. Alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti ariyabhāvakaraṇasamattho ñāṇaviseso. Kiñhi no siyā, bhanteti kasmā, bhante, nādhigato bhavissati, adhigatoyevāti. Yāva devāti yāva eva.
329 当(长老)回答已证得初禅后,(世尊)为了询问第二禅等,又说了“那么,还有……”等等的话。其中,“为了超越”就是“为了超越(初禅等)”。“为了止息”就是“为了止息”。其余部分,到处都应依照前面所说的方式理解。不过,在最后一个问题里,世尊为了问依出世间智见而证得的灭尽定,才说“足以成为圣者智见的殊胜”。长老也按照所问如实作了回答。其中,因为不感受任何感受的乐,比有感受的乐更寂静、更殊胜,所以他说:“我们不见有其他更超越或更殊胜的安乐住。”巴利
329. Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādhigame byākate dutiyajjhānādīni pucchanto etassa pana votiādimāha. Tattha samatikkamāyāti samatikkamatthāya. Paṭippassaddhiyāti paṭippassaddhatthāya. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Pacchimapañhe pana lokuttarañāṇadassanavasena adhigataṃ nirodhasamāpattiṃ pucchanto alamariyañāṇadassanavisesoti āha. Theropi pucchānurūpeneva byākāsi. Tattha yasmā vedayitasukhato avedayitasukhaṃ santataraṃ paṇītataraṃ hoti, tasmā aññaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ uttaritaraṃ vā paṇītataraṃ vā na samanupassāmāti āha.
330 “以法语”是指:以与和合的利益相应、与法相应的言说。他们所有人对四圣谛都已究竟完成所作,因此不必再为他们讲说任何为了证悟的法。世尊只是就“和合有这种利益、有那种利益”来对他们讲说和合的利益。“追随世尊”就是跟随而去。据说,他们接过世尊的钵和衣,走了一小段路,当世尊走到精舍院墙的边界时,说:“把钵和衣拿给我,你们就留在这里。”便离开了。“从那里返回”就是从他们当时站立的地方折返回来。“我们这些尊者……”是因为他们虽然已依止世尊获得出家等,却对自己的功德之谈感到厌烦,由于欲求证悟而这样说。“这些和这些”是指初禅等世间与出世间的。“以心知心、遍知”是指:今天我的尊者们以世间等至度过了,今天以出世间等至度过了——如此以心限定心而了知。“诸天神也对我……”意思是:世尊阿那律,今天圣者难陀长老、今天圣者吉米拉长老以这种和那种等至度过了——诸天神这样禀告。“被问及问题”是指:那也是我自己了知的,或者由诸天神禀告的,仅凭这一点我的口就张开,我主动发问而说,未被问则不说。然而,世尊被问及问题、以询问问题而作了回答,对此我有什么不满意的呢?这样说。巴利
330.Dhammiyā kathāyāti sāmaggirasānisaṃsappaṭisaṃyuttāya dhammiyā kathāya. Sabbepi te catūsu saccesu pariniṭṭhitakiccā, tena tesaṃ paṭivedhatthāya kiñci kathetabbaṃ natthi. Sāmaggirasena pana ayañca ayañca ānisaṃsoti sāmaggirasānisaṃsameva nesaṃ bhagavā kathesi. Bhagavantaṃ anusaṃyāyitvāti anugantvā. Te kira bhagavato pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā thokaṃ agamaṃsu, atha bhagavā vihārassa pariveṇapariyantaṃ gatakāle, ‘‘āharatha me pattacīvaraṃ, tumhe idheva tiṭṭhathā’’ti pakkāmi. Tato paṭinivattitvāti tato ṭhitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā. Kiṃ nu kho mayaṃ āyasmatoti bhagavantaṃ nissāya pabbajjādīni adhigantvāpi attano guṇakathāya aṭṭiyamānā adhigamappicchatāya āhaṃsu. Imāsañca imāsañcāti paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ lokiyalokuttarānaṃ. Cetasā ceto paricca viditoti ajja me āyasmanto lokiyasamāpattiyā vītināmesuṃ, ajja lokuttarāyāti evaṃ cittena cittaṃ paricchinditvā viditaṃ. Devatāpi meti, bhante anuruddha, ajja ayyo nandiyatthero, ajja ayyo kimilatthero imāya ca imāya ca samāpattiyā vītināmesīti evamārocesunti attho. Pañhābhipuṭṭhenāti tampi mayā sayaṃ viditanti vā devatāhi ārocitanti vā ettakeneva mukhaṃ me sajjanti kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā apuṭṭheneva me na kathitaṃ. Bhagavatā pana pañhābhipuṭṭhena pañhaṃ abhipucchitena satā byākataṃ, tatra me kiṃ na rocathāti āha.
331 “长”这个名字,是像《长部》3.293 里说的“宝珠、上等宝珠、长,还有塞利萨咖和同伴”那样传下来的,他是二十八位夜叉将军中的一位天王。“波罗阇那”就是那个夜叉的名字。“他前往世尊那里”:据说他是被多闻天王派去的,在去那个地方的路上,看见世尊自己拿着钵和衣,从砖屋走到牛角娑罗林中间,知道世尊正亲自拿着钵和衣,要去牛角娑罗林里那三位善男子那里。他想:“今天会有一次大说法,我也应该参与这场说法。”于是他以看不见的身体跟在导师身后,一步步走去,站在不远处听了法。导师离开时,他没有跟着走,而是为了看看“这些长老会怎么做”而留在原地。然后,他看见那两位长老围着阿那律长老,心想:“这些长老依靠世尊,证得出家等一切功德之后,却对世尊心怀吝惜,不能忍受别人分享,过分地隐藏、遮盖。现在我不让他们再遮盖了,我要从地面直到梵天界,宣扬他们的功德。”这样想完,他就前往世尊那里。巴利
331.Dīghoti ‘‘maṇi māṇivaro dīgho, atho serīsako sahā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.293) evaṃ āgato aṭṭhavīsatiyā yakkhasenāpatīnaṃ abbhantaro eko devarājā. Parajanoti tasseva yakkhassa nāmaṃ. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti so kira vessavaṇena pesito etaṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchanto bhagavantaṃ sayaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā giñjakāvasathato gosiṅgasālavanassa antare disvā bhagavā attanā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gosiṅgasālavane tiṇṇaṃ kulaputtānaṃ santikaṃ gacchati. Ajja mahatī dhammadesanā bhavissati. Mayāpi tassā desanāya bhāginā bhavitabbanti adissamānena kāyena satthu padānupadiko gantvā avidūre ṭhatvā dhammaṃ sutvā satthari gacchantepi na gato, – ‘‘ime therā kiṃ karissantī’’ti dassanatthaṃ pana tattheva ṭhito. Atha te dve there anuruddhattheraṃ paliveṭhente disvā, – ‘‘ime therā bhagavantaṃ nissāya pabbajjādayo sabbaguṇe adhigantvāpi bhagavatova maccharāyanti, na sahanti, ativiya nilīyanti paṭicchādenti, na dāni tesaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ dassāmi, pathavito yāva brahmalokā etesaṃ guṇe pakāsessāmī’’ti cintetvā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
尊者,那些住在跋耆国的人真是有福啊!他们能见到世尊和这三位善男子,能礼敬他们,能布施应施之物,能听闻正法——尊者,跋耆人真是有福啊。
“听到声音”:据说他凭自己的夜叉神力发出巨大的声音,响彻整个跋耆国,说出了那番话。因为他的缘故,那些住在树上、山上等处的各类地居天神听到了声音。针对这件事,才说“听到声音”。
“转告”:听到那么大的声音之后,他们就转告。这个道理在每一处都适用。
“乃至梵天界”:一直到色究竟梵天界。
“如果那个家族也”:意思是“这些善男子从我们的家族出家,出家后具备这样的戒行、功德、正行和善法”,如果那个家族也以净信心忆念这三位善男子,那么无论在哪里都应这样理解其含义。
就这样,世尊顺着话题的关联,结束了这次说法。巴利
Lābhā vata, bhanteti ye, bhante, vajjiraṭṭhavāsino bhagavantañca ime ca tayo kulaputte passituṃ labhanti, vandituṃ labhanti, deyyadhammaṃ dātuṃ labhanti, dhammaṃ sotuṃ labhanti, tesaṃ lābhā, bhante, vajjīnanti attho. Saddaṃ sutvāti so kira attano yakkhānubhāvena mahantaṃ saddaṃ katvā sakalaṃ vajjiraṭṭhaṃ ajjhottharanto taṃ vācaṃ nicchāresi. Tena cassa tesu rukkhapabbatādīsu adhivatthā bhummā devatā saddaṃ assosuṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘saddaṃ sutvā’’ti. Anussāvesunti mahantaṃ saddaṃ sutvā sāvesuṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yāva brahmalokāti yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā. Tañcepi kulanti, ‘‘amhākaṃ kulato nikkhamitvā ime kulaputtā pabbajitā evaṃ sīlavanto guṇavanto ācārasampannā kalyāṇadhammā’’ti evaṃ tañcepi kulaṃ ete tayo kulaputte pasannacittaṃ anussareyyāti evaṃ sabbattha attho daṭṭhabbo. Iti bhagavā yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
《大牛角经》注释巴利
2. Mahāgosiṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
332 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《大牛角经》。其中“牛角沙罗树林”这一句,是为了说明他们居住的地方。因为在其他经里,通常是先说乞食的村庄,比如“住在舍卫城祇树给孤独园”,先点明乞食的村庄,然后才说明居住的地方。但在这部《大牛角经》里,世尊乞食的村庄并没有固定说明,大概是某一个村庄吧。所以这里只说明了居住的地方。这部经就是以林野为缘起而说的。 “与众多”就是与许多比丘一起。“声名远播”是指在各处都闻名、为人熟知。“与长老声闻弟子一起”:因为他们具备巴帝摩卡防护等坚实修持所成就的功德,所以称为“长老”;又因为他们是听闻佛法之后出生的人,所以称为“声闻”;这里说世尊与他们同在一起。 接下来,为了具体显示这些长老是谁,经文说“与具寿舍利弗……一起”。其中,具寿舍利弗以自身的戒等功德,在佛陀的教法中声名远播。就像有眼睛的人看到高悬天空中央的太阳或月亮一样,又像站在海边的人看到大海一样,他广为人知、备受瞩目。 不过,不应只凭这部经里提到的功德来了解这位长老的伟大;还应依据其他许多经来了解,比如《法嗣经》《无秽经》《正见经》《狮子吼经》《马车经》《大象迹喻经》《大问答经》《咖都马经》《长爪经》《逐一经》《应亲近不应亲近经》《谛分别经》《团食清净经》《快乐经》《合诵经》《十上经》《自恣经》(《相应部》1.215等)、《苏斯玛经》《长老问经》《大义释》《无碍解道》《长老狮子吼经》《出离》《最上》等。因为在《最上》中这样说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,大智慧第一的,就是舍利弗。”(《增支部》1.188-189)巴利
332.Evaṃme sutanti mahāgosiṅgasuttaṃ. Tattha gosiṅgasālavanadāyeti idaṃ vasanaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññesu hi suttesu, ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā pacchā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Imasmiṃ pana mahāgosiṅgasutte bhagavato gocaragāmo anibandho, kocideva gocaragāmo bhavissati. Tasmā vasanaṭṭhānameva paridīpitaṃ. Araññanidānakaṃ nāmetaṃ suttanti. Sambahulehīti bahukehi. Abhiññātehi abhiññātehīti sabbattha vissutehi pākaṭehi. Therehi sāvakehi saddhinti pātimokkhasaṃvarādīhi thirakārakeheva dhammehi samannāgatattā therehi, savanante jātattā sāvakehi saddhiṃ ekato. Idāni te there sarūpato dassento, āyasmatā ca sāriputtenātiādimāha. Tatthāyasmā sāriputto attano sīlādīhi guṇehi buddhasāsane abhiññāto. Cakkhumantānaṃ gaganamajjhe ṭhito sūriyo viya cando viya, samuddatīre ṭhitānaṃ sāgaro viya ca pākaṭo paññāto. Na kevalañcassa imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇavaseneva mahantatā veditabbā, ito aññesaṃ dhammadāyādasuttaṃ anaṅgaṇasuttaṃ sammādiṭṭhisuttaṃ sīhanādasuttaṃ rathavinītaṃ mahāhatthipadopamaṃ mahāvedallaṃ cātumasuttaṃ dīghanakhaṃ anupadasuttaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbasuttaṃ saccavibhaṅgasuttaṃ piṇḍapātapārisuddhi sampasādanīyaṃ saṅgītisuttaṃ dasuttarasuttaṃ pavāraṇāsuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.215 ādayo) susimasuttaṃ therapañhasuttaṃ mahāniddeso paṭisambhidāmaggo therasīhanādasuttaṃ abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi suttānaṃ vasena therassa mahantatā veditabbā. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ mahāpaññānaṃ yadidaṃ sāriputto’’ti (a. ni. 1.188-189) vuttaṃ.
大目犍连长老也凭借戒行等功德,以及这部经里提到的那些功德,像前面那位长老一样,广为人知、声名显赫、地位崇高。此外,还应当根据《推度经》《小渴爱灭尽经》《魔怖经》《殿堂震动》、整部《神足相应》《降伏难陀与优波难陀》、示现双神变时前往天界、《天宫故事》《鬼故事》《长老的出离》以及“第一”的称号等,来了解他的伟大。因为在“第一”的经文中说过:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘弟子中,神通第一的,就是大目犍连。”(《增支部》1.190)巴利
Mahāmoggallānopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa anumānasuttaṃ, cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ māratajjaniyasuttaṃ pāsādakampanaṃ sakalaṃ iddhipādasaṃyuttaṃ nandopanandadamanaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyakāle devalokagamanaṃ vimānavatthu petavatthu therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo . Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ iddhimantānaṃ yadidaṃ mahāmoggallāno’’ti (a. ni. 1.190) vuttaṃ.
大迦叶长老也凭借戒行等种种功德,以及这部经里提到的那些功德,像那位长老一样,广为人知、声名显赫、地位崇高。此外,还可以通过《衣相易经》《补衲衣经》(《相应部》2.154等)、《月喻经》、整部《迦叶相应》、《大圣种经》、长老的出家事迹,以及“第一”的称号这些方面,来了解他的伟大。因为在“第一”的开示中,世尊这样说:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,头陀论者第一,就是大迦叶。”(《增支部》1.191)巴利
Mahākassapopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa cīvaraparivattanasuttaṃ jiṇṇacīvarasuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.154 ādayo) candopamaṃ sakalaṃ kassapasaṃyuttaṃ mahāariyavaṃsasuttaṃ therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ , bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhutavādānaṃ yadidaṃ mahākassapo’’ti (a. ni. 1.191) vuttaṃ.
阿那律长老也凭借戒行等功德,以及这部经里提到的功德,像那位长老一样广为人知、声名显赫、地位崇高。此外,还可以通过《小牛角经》《那喇咖巴那经》《无上经》《随烦恼经》《阿那律相应》《大人之思惟经》,以及长老的出家事迹和“第一”的称号这些方面,来了解他的伟大。因为在“第一”的开示中说过:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,天眼第一者,就是阿那律。”(《增支部》1.192)巴利
Anuruddhattheropi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa cūḷagosiṅgasuttaṃ naḷakapānasuttaṃ anuttariyasuttaṃ upakkilesasuttaṃ anuruddhasaṃyuttaṃ mahāpurisavitakkasuttaṃ therassa abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dibbacakkhukānaṃ yadidaṃ anuruddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.192) vuttaṃ.
关于“与尊者离婆多在一起”这句话,这里要说明有两位离婆多:一位是卡迪拉瓦尼亚·雷瓦达,另一位是疑结离婆多。其中,卡迪拉瓦尼亚·雷瓦达是法将舍利弗长老的弟弟,不是这里所指的那位。这里指的是那位因为“红糖不如法吗?绿豆不如法吗?”(《大品》272)这类事情而总是充满疑惑的雷瓦达长老。这位长老也同样以戒行等功德,以及本经中所说的那些功德,像其他大长老一样广为人知、声名远扬。另外,从他的出离事迹和“第一”的称号,也能看出他的伟大。因为在说到“第一”的时候,世尊这样说过:“诸比丘,在我的声闻弟子比丘中,最乐于修习禅那的,第一就是疑结离婆多。”(《增支部》1.204)巴利
Āyasmatā ca revatenāti ettha pana dve revatā khadiravaniyarevato ca kaṅkhārevato ca. Tattha khadiravaniyarevato dhammasenāpatittherassa kaniṭṭhabhātiko, na so idha adhippeto. ‘‘Akappiyo guḷo, akappiyā muggā’’ti (mahāva. 272) evaṃ kaṅkhābahulo pana thero idha revatoti adhippeto. Sopi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa abhinikkhamanenapi etadaggenapi mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ jhāyīnaṃ yadidaṃ kaṅkhārevato’’ti (a. ni. 1.204) vuttaṃ.
阿难长老也因为他自身的戒行等功德,以及这部经里提到的那些功德,像前面那位长老一样,广为人知、声名显赫、伟大。此外,还应通过《有学经》《巴希帝咖经》《不动适切经》《果巴咖·目犍连经》《多界经》《小空经》《大空经》《希有未曾有法经》《一夜贤者经》《大因缘经》《大般涅槃经》《苏跋经》《小千世界经》,以及他出离的事迹和“第一”的称号,来了解他的伟大。因为在说到“第一”时,世尊这样说过:“诸比丘,在我的比丘声闻弟子中,多闻第一的,就是阿难。”(《增支部》1.219-223)巴利
Ānandattheropi sīlādiguṇehi ceva imasmiṃ sutte āgataguṇehi ca thero viya abhiññāto pākaṭo mahā. Apicassa sekkhasuttaṃ bāhitikasuttaṃ āneñjasappāyaṃ gopakamoggallānaṃ bahudhātukaṃ cūḷasuññataṃ mahāsuññataṃ acchariyabbhutasuttaṃ bhaddekarattaṃ mahānidānaṃ mahāparinibbānaṃ subhasuttaṃ cūḷaniyalokadhātusuttaṃ abhinikkhamanaṃ etadagganti imesampi vasena mahantabhāvo veditabbo. Etadaggasmiñhi, ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) vuttaṃ.
“以及其他许多名声卓著者”的意思是:不只是和这几位在一起,世尊还和众多其他因大功德而声名远播、广为人知的声闻长老比丘们一起,住在牛角娑罗树林园中。要知道,当时具寿舍利弗自己是大智慧者,还带着其他许多大智慧的比丘,一起围绕着十力世尊而住。具寿大目犍连自己具足神通,具寿大迦叶自己修持头陀行,具寿阿那律自己拥有天眼,具寿雷瓦达自己乐于禅那,具寿阿难自己多闻,并带着其他许多多闻的比丘,围绕着十力世尊而住。就这样,应当了知,那时这几位以及其他名声卓著的诸大长老,大约有三万比丘,围绕着十力世尊而住。巴利
Aññehi ca abhiññātehi abhiññātehīti na kevalañca eteheva, aññehi ca mahāguṇatāya pākaṭehi abhiññātehi bahūhi therehi sāvakehi saddhiṃ bhagavā gosiṅgasālavanadāye viharatīti attho. Āyasmā hi sāriputto sayaṃ mahāpañño aññepi bahū mahāpaññe bhikkhū gahetvā tadā dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihāsi. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno sayaṃ iddhimā, āyasmā mahākassapo sayaṃ dhutavādo, āyasmā anuruddho sayaṃ dibbacakkhuko, āyasmā revato sayaṃ jhānābhirato, āyasmā ānando sayaṃ bahussuto aññepi bahū bahussute bhikkhū gahetvā tadā dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihāsi, evaṃ tadā ete ca aññe ca abhiññātā mahātherā tiṃsasahassamattā bhikkhū dasabalaṃ parivāretvā vihariṃsūti veditabbā.
从独处静坐中出定,是指从果定(果等至)的远离状态中出定。关于“前往具寿大迦叶那里”这句话:据说,这位长老从独处静坐中出定后,向西方世界望去,看见那圆满五十由旬的日轮正在沉落,那景象就像在林边嬉戏的酒醉刹帝利从耳边掉落的耳环,又像有人把红毯叠好放进箱子里,也像从宝象的象牙上掉落的价值十万的黄金钵。紧接着,他又向东方世界望去,看见那从海云色的海洋深处升起、停留在东方铁围山山顶上、带有兔相庄严的四十九由旬月轮,宛如有人握住轮辋转动银轮,好像从银色山顶涌出一团圆圆的乳流,又像一只展开翅膀腾飞于空中的白天鹅。接着,他又望向娑罗林。就在那时,那些娑罗树从树根到树梢,所有的花都尽情盛放,看上去就像披着丝帛一样,又像挂满了成串的珍珠那样光辉闪耀。大地仿佛用落花铺成的毯子作供养而庄严起来,又好像被到处飘落的花粉如虫胶汁般洒着。一群群蜜蜂沉醉在花粉中,一边在树林间飞舞,一边如同在歌唱。而且那一天,正好是伍波萨他日。于是,长老心想:“今天我要用什么方式来度过这愉快的时光呢?”要知道,圣弟子们天生就喜欢听闻正法。这时他心里想:“今天,我去我的长兄法将长老那里,以闻法的喜悦度过时光吧。”不过,他在准备前往时没有打算独自去,而是想:“我要带上我的亲密伙伴大迦叶长老一起去。”于是,他从座位上站起来,抖了抖坐具,便朝着具寿大迦叶走去。巴利
Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti phalasamāpattivivekato vuṭṭhito. Yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkamīti thero kira paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito pacchimalokadhātuṃ olokento vanante kīḷantassa mattakhattiyassa kaṇṇato patamānaṃ kuṇḍalaṃ viya, saṃharitvā samugge pakkhipamānaṃ rattakambalaṃ viya, maṇināgadantato patamānaṃ satasahassagghanikaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ viya ca atthaṃ gacchamānaṃ paripuṇṇapaṇṇāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ addasa. Tadanantaraṃ pācīnalokadhātuṃ olokento nemiyaṃ gahetvā parivattayamānaṃ rajatacakkaṃ viya, rajatakūṭato nikkhamantaṃ khīradhārāmaṇḍaṃ viya, sapakkhe papphoṭetvā gaganatale pakkhandamānaṃ setahaṃsaṃ viya ca meghavaṇṇāya samuddakucchito uggantvā pācīnacakkavāḷapabbatamatthake sasalakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ ekūnapaṇṇāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ addasa. Tato sālavanaṃ olokesi. Tasmiñhi samaye sālarukkhā mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā sabbapāliphullā dukūlapārutā viya, muttākalāpavinaddhā viya ca virociṃsu. Bhūmitalaṃ pupphasantharapūjāya paṭimaṇḍitaṃ viya, tattha tattha nipatantena pupphareṇunā lākhārasena siñcamānaṃ viya ca ahosi. Bhamaramadhukaragaṇā kusumareṇumadamattā upagāyamānā viya vanantaresu vicaranti. Tadā ca uposathadivasova hoti. Atha thero, ‘‘kāya nu kho ajja ratiyā vītināmessāmī’’ti cintesi, ariyasāvakā ca nāma piyadhammassavanā honti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ jeṭṭhabhātikassa dhammasenāpatittherassa santikaṃ gantvā dhammaratiyā vītināmessāmī’’ti. Gacchanto pana ekakova agantvā ‘‘mayhaṃ piyasahāyaṃ mahākassapattheraṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkami.
“是的,贤友。”具寿大迦叶这样回答。这位长老也是喜爱听闻正法的圣弟子,所以听了他的话之后,没有找任何借口,比如“去吧,贤友,我头有点疼,或者背有点疼”,而是满心欢喜地说:“是的,贤友。”答应之后,他从座位上起身,抖了抖皮垫,就跟在大目犍连后面走了。那时,两位大长老并排而行,光彩夺目,就像两轮明月、两轮太阳、两头六牙象王、两头狮子、两只老虎。那时,具寿阿那律正坐在自己的日间住处,看见两位大长老正往舍利弗长老那里去,又看西方,见太阳好像正沉入林中;看东方,见月亮好像正从林中升起;再看那片娑罗林,只见整片娑罗林全都开满了花。他心想:“今天是伍波萨他日,我的这两位兄长正前往法将那里,一定会有盛大的闻法,我也应当参与闻法。”于是他从座位上起身,抖了抖皮垫,跟在大长老们后面,一步接一步地走了出去。因此经文说:“那时,具寿大目犍连、具寿大迦叶和具寿阿那律,一同前往具寿舍利弗那里。”“前往”是指,他们三人依次而行,像三个月亮、三个太阳、三头狮子一样,光辉闪耀地前去。巴利
Evamāvusotikho āyasmā mahākassapoti theropi yasmā piyadhammassavanova ariyasāvako, tasmā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā gacchāvuso, tvaṃ, mayhaṃ sīsaṃ vā rujjati piṭṭhi vāti kiñci lesāpadesaṃ akatvā tuṭṭhahadayova, ‘‘evamāvuso’’tiādimāha. Paṭissutvā ca nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā mahāmoggallānaṃ anubandhi. Tasmiṃ samaye dve mahātherā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitāni dve candamaṇḍalāni viya, dve sūriyamaṇḍalāni viya, dve chaddantanāgarājāno viya, dve sīhā viya, dve byagghā viya ca virociṃsu. Anuruddhattheropi tasmiṃ samaye divāṭṭhāne nisinno dve mahāthere sāriputtattherassa santikaṃ gacchante disvā pacchimalokadhātuṃ olokento sūriyaṃ vanantaṃ pavisantaṃ viya, pācīnalokadhātuṃ olokento candaṃ vanantato uggacchantaṃ viya, sālavanaṃ olokento sabbapāliphullameva sālavanañca disvā ajja uposathadivaso, ime ca me jeṭṭhabhātikā dhammasenāpatissa santikaṃ gacchanti, mahantena dhammassavanena bhavitabbaṃ, ahampi dhammassavanassa bhāgī bhavissāmīti nisinnaṭṭhānato vuṭṭhāya cammakhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā mahātherānaṃ padānupadiko hutvā nikkhami. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā ca mahāmoggallāno āyasmā ca mahākassapo āyasmā ca anuruddho yenāyasmā sāriputto tenupasaṅkamiṃsū’’ti. Upasaṅkamiṃsūti. Paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā tayo candā viya, sūriyā viya, sīhā viya ca virocamānā upasaṅkamiṃsu.
333 当那些大长老这样前来时,具寿阿难正坐在自己的日间住处,看见他们后心想:“今天一定会有盛大的闻法集会,我也应该参与其中。不过我不能一个人去,我要带上我的好朋友雷瓦达长老一起去。”这一切,应当按前面讲大目犍连、大迦叶、阿那律长老前来时的同样方式详细理解。于是,他们两人一前一后站着,像两轮明月、两轮太阳、两头狮子一样光辉闪耀地走上前去。因此经文说:“具寿舍利弗看见了……”等等。舍利弗看见后,对具寿阿难说了这番话:他远远看见,等对方逐渐走近、到了可以交谈的距离时,才说出“来吧,具寿”等话。“贤友,这地方真令人愉悦。”这里“令人愉悦”有两种:环境的愉悦和人的愉悦。其中,所谓环境,就是长满铁力木、娑罗、檀香、黄兰等各种树木,树荫浓密,花果丰盛,树种多样,水源充足,又远离村落,这就叫环境的愉悦。针对这个,有偈颂说:巴利
333. Evaṃ upasaṅkamante pana te mahāthere āyasmā ānando attano divāṭṭhāne nisinnoyeva disvā, ‘‘ajja mahantaṃ dhammassavanaṃ bhavissati, mayāpi tassa bhāginā bhavitabbaṃ, na kho pana ekakova gamissāmi, mayhaṃ piyasahāyampi revatattheraṃ gahetvā gamissāmī’’ti sabbaṃ mahāmoggallānassa mahākassapassa anuruddhassa upasaṅkamane vuttanayeneva vitthārato veditabbaṃ. Iti te dve janā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhitā dve candā viya, sūriyā viya, sīhā viya ca virocamānā upasaṅkamiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasā kho āyasmā sāriputto’’tiādi . Disvāna āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ etadavocāti dūratova disvā anukkamena kathāupacāraṃ sampattametaṃ, ‘‘etu kho āyasmā’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca. Ramaṇīyaṃ, āvusoti ettha duvidhaṃ rāmaṇeyyakaṃ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṃ puggalarāmaṇeyyakañca. Tattha vanaṃ nāma nāgasalaḷasālacampakādīhi sañchannaṃ hoti bahalacchāyaṃ pupphaphalūpagaṃ vividharukkhaṃ udakasampannaṃ gāmato nissaṭaṃ, idaṃ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
“ 可爱的林野,世人却不在那里感到快乐;
离了贪欲的人会得到安乐,他们不是还在追求欲乐的人。”巴利
‘‘Ramaṇīyāni araññāni, yattha na ramatī jano; Vītarāgā ramissanti, na te kāmagavesino’’ti. (dha. pa. 99);
不过,即使这片林地位于干旱地带,没有水,树荫稀少,遍地荆棘,只要佛陀等圣者住在那里,这地方就叫作“令人愉悦的人之处”。针对这一点,有这样的偈颂说:巴利
Vanaṃ pana sacepi ujjaṅgale hoti nirudakaṃ viralacchāyaṃ kaṇṭakasamākiṇṇaṃ, buddhādayopettha ariyā viharanti, idaṃ puggalarāmaṇeyyakaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
“ 不管是在村子里,还是在荒野中;不管是在低洼地,还是在高地上。
阿拉汉们安住的地方,那片土地就是可爱的。”巴利
‘‘Gāme vā yadi vāraññe, ninne vā yadi vā thale; Yattha arahanto viharanti, taṃ bhūmirāmaṇeyyaka’’nti. (dha. pa. 98);
在这里,这两种情况都能见到。因为那时,牛角娑罗林处处开满花,花香芬芳;而且在这个连同天界在内的世间,最上之人——正自觉者,正和大约三万位著名的比丘们一起住在那裡。就是针对这一点才说:贤友阿难,牛角娑罗林真可爱。巴利
Idha pana taṃ duvidhampi labbhati. Tadā hi gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sabbapāliphullaṃ hoti kusumagandhasugandhaṃ, sadevake cettha loke aggapuggalo sammāsambuddho tiṃsasahassamattehi abhiññātabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ viharati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ramaṇīyaṃ, āvuso ānanda, gosiṅgasālavana’’nti.
“纯净”是指离开了污垢,也就是说,远离了云、雾、烟、尘、罗睺这五种杂染。“一切处盛开”是指到处都开满了花,从根部一直到树梢,没有一处不开花。“仿佛散发着天界的香气”是说,就像天界的曼陀罗花、拘吠陀罗花、昼度树的花以及旃檀粉末的香气那样,四处飘散;又像三十三天、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天和梵天神等诸天降临的地方,香气在那里弥漫飘荡。巴利
Dosināti dosāpagatā, abbhaṃ mahikā dhūmo rajo rāhūti imehi pañcahi upakkilesehi virahitāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbapāliphullāti sabbattha pāliphullā, mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva aggā apupphitaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Dibbā maññe gandhā sampavantīti dibbā mandārapupphakoviḷārapāricchattakacandanacuṇṇagandhā viya samantā pavāyanti, sakkasuyāsantusitanimmānaratiparanimmitamahābrahmānaṃ otiṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ viya vāyantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
贤友阿难,他是什么样的人呢?阿难长老在那五位长老当中,就像僧团里最下座的新比丘一样。为什么长老首先问他呢?因为彼此都把对方当作自己人。那两位长老互相把对方当作自己人。舍利弗长老把阿难长老当作自己人,心想:“他〔阿难〕替我做了本该由我来做的侍奉世尊的事。”阿难长老把舍利弗长老当作自己人,因为舍利弗长老是世尊弟子中的上首。他〔阿难〕让良家子弟出家后,就带到舍利弗长老面前,让他们依舍利弗长老受具足戒;舍利弗长老也同样这么做。就这样,他们〔两位长老〕各自拿出自己的衣和钵,让人出家,并让他们依止和尚受戒,这样就有了五百位比丘。阿难尊者得到上好的衣服等物品时,也都送给长老〔舍利弗〕。巴利
Kathaṃrūpena, āvuso ānandāti ānandatthero tesaṃ pañcannaṃ therānaṃ saṅghanavakova. Kasmā thero taṃyeva paṭhamaṃ pucchatīti? Mamāyitattā. Te hi dve therā aññamaññaṃ mamāyiṃsu. Sāriputtatthero, ‘‘mayā kattabbaṃ satthu upaṭṭhānaṃ karotī’’ti ānandattheraṃ mamāyi. Ānandatthero bhagavato sāvakānaṃ aggoti sāriputtattheraṃ mamāyi, kuladārake pabbājetvā sāriputtattherassa santike upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpesi. Sāriputtattheropi tatheva akāsi. Evaṃ ekamekena attano pattacīvaraṃ datvā pabbājetvā upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpitāni pañca bhikkhusatāni ahesuṃ. Āyasmā ānando paṇītāni cīvarādīnipi labhitvā therasseva deti.
据说,有一位婆罗门心想:“对佛宝和僧宝的供养是清楚明白的,但怎样才算是供养了法宝呢?”他来到世尊面前,问了这个道理。世尊说:“婆罗门,如果你想供养法宝,就去供养一位多闻者。”他〔婆罗门〕问比丘僧团:“尊者,请告诉我谁是多闻者。”他〔婆罗门〕走到比丘僧团那里,说:“尊者,请告诉我谁是多闻者。”僧团说:“婆罗门,是阿难长老。”那位婆罗门就用价值千金的衣服供养了长老。长老拿了那件衣服,来到世尊面前。世尊问:“阿难,从哪里得来的?”他〔阿难〕说:“尊者,是一位婆罗门给的,但我想把它送给具寿舍利弗。”〔世尊说〕“阿难,那就给他〔舍利弗〕吧。”〔阿难答〕“尊者,他〔舍利弗〕外出游方去了。”〔世尊说〕“等他〔舍利弗〕回来时再给。”〔阿难答〕“尊者,已经制了学处。”〔世尊问〕“舍利弗什么时候回来?”〔阿难答〕“尊者,大约十天后。”世尊说:“阿难,我允许把多余的衣服最多存放十天。”于是制定了这条学处。舍利弗长老也一样,无论得到什么合意的东西,都送给阿难长老。就这样,那两位长老互相以对方为念。正因为这样的互相系念,所以先问了阿难。巴利
Eko kira brāhmaṇo cintesi – ‘‘buddharatanassa ca saṅgharatanassa ca pūjā paññāyati, kathaṃ nu kho dhammaratanaṃ pūjitaṃ nāma hotī’’ti? So bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘sacesi, brāhmaṇa, dhammaratanaṃ pūjitukāmo, ekaṃ bahussutaṃ pūjehī’’ti bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathāti bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchati. So bhikkhusaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathāti āha. Ānandatthero brāhmaṇāti. Brāhmaṇo theraṃ sahassagghanikena cīvarena pūjesi. Thero taṃ gahetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā ‘‘kuto, ānanda, laddha’’nti āha. Ekena, bhante, brāhmaṇena dinnaṃ, idaṃ panāhaṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa dātukāmoti. Dehi, ānandāti. Cārikaṃ pakkanto, bhanteti. Āgatakāle dehīti. Sikkhāpadaṃ, bhante, paññattanti. Kadā pana sāriputto āgamissatīti? Dasāhamattena, bhanteti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, ānanda, dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ nikkhipitu’’nti (pārā. 461; mahāva. 347) sikkhāpadaṃ paññapesi. Sāriputtattheropi tatheva yaṃkiñci manāpaṃ labhati, taṃ ānandattherassa deti. Evaṃ te therā aññamaññaṃ mamāyiṃsu, iti mamāyitattā paṭhamaṃ pucchi.
另外,这种征询同意式的提问,本来就应该从下座开始问起。所以长老心想:“我先问阿难,阿难会凭自己的辩才来回答。然后我再问雷瓦达、阿那律、大迦叶、大目犍连。大目犍连也会凭自己的辩才来回答。接着五位长老都会来问我,我也会凭自己的辩才来回答。但就算到了这一步,这场说法也还不算达到顶峰、达到圆满。那时我们大家一起去亲近十力者发问,导师会用一切知智来回答。到了这一步,这场说法才算达到顶峰、达到圆满。就像在一个地方发生了纠纷,会先送到村长那里;村长解决不了,就送到地方长官那里;地方长官解决不了,就送到大审判官那里;大审判官解决不了,就送到将军那里;将军解决不了,就送到副王那里;副王解决不了,就送到国王那里。一旦国王作出判决,这纠纷就不再辗转传递,凭国王的一句话就了结了。同样地,我先问阿难……然后我们大家一起去亲近十力者发问,导师会用一切知智来回答。到了这一步,这场说法才算达到顶峰、达到圆满。”长老就这样进行征询同意式的提问,首先问了阿难长老。巴利
Apica anumatipucchā nāmesā khuddakato paṭṭhāya pucchitabbā hoti. Tasmā thero cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ ānandaṃ pucchissāmi, ānando attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissati. Tato revataṃ, anuruddhaṃ, mahākassapaṃ, mahāmoggallānaṃ pucchissāmi. Mahāmoggallāno attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissati. Tato pañcapi therā maṃ pucchissanti, ahampi attano paṭibhānaṃ byākarissāmī’’ti. Ettāvatāpi ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā na bhavissati, atha mayaṃ sabbepi dasabalaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma, satthā sabbaññutaññāṇena byākarissati. Ettāvatā ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati. Yathā hi janapadamhi uppanno aṭṭo gāmabhojakaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmiṃ nicchituṃ asakkonte janapadabhojakaṃ pāpuṇāti, tasmiṃ asakkonte mahāvinicchayaamaccaṃ, tasmiṃ asakkonte senāpatiṃ, tasmiṃ asakkonte uparājaṃ, tasmiṃ vinicchituṃ asakkonte rājānaṃ pāpuṇāti, raññā vinicchitakālato paṭṭhāya aṭṭo aparāparaṃ na sañcarati, rājavacaneneva chijjati. Evamevaṃ ahañhi paṭhamaṃ ānandaṃ pucchissāmi…pe… atha mayaṃ sabbepi dasabalaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchissāma, satthā sabbaññutaññāṇena byākarissati. Ettāvatā ayaṃ dhammadesanā sikhāppattā vepullappattā bhavissati. Evaṃ anumatipucchaṃ pucchanto thero paṭhamaṃ ānandattheraṃ pucchi.
“多闻”的意思是:他听闻了很多,也就是以巴利文句、连贯及前后次第为依据,受持了九分教的佛陀教法。“持闻者”是指能承载所闻之法的人。有的人在这里学到的,到那里就丢掉了,就像破罐里的水存不住一样,在大众中既讲不出一部经或一则本生故事,也诵不出来,这种人就不叫持闻者。反之,有的人所受持的佛语,就像刚学的时候一样,即使十年、二十年不温习也不会忘失,这才叫持闻者。“积闻者”是指所闻之法的积集者。就像所闻之法积藏在心匣中,如同刻在石头上的字,又像装在金瓶里的狮子脂,牢牢地保持着,这才叫积闻者。“已持者”是安住、纯熟的意思。有的人所受持的佛语,并不安住、纯熟、稳固,当被要求讲某部经或某则本生故事时,他说“我温习一下、对照一下、再仔细考察一下就会知道”。有的人所持的则安住、纯熟,如同有分流一样,当被要求讲某部经或某则本生故事时,他直接提取出来就讲那一个。针对这一点,所以说“已持者”。巴利
Bahussuto hotīti bahu assa sutaṃ hoti, navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ pāḷianusandhipubbāparavasena uggahitaṃ hotīti attho. Sutadharoti sutassa ādhārabhūto. Yassa hi ito gahitaṃ ito palāyati, chiddaghaṭe udakaṃ viya na tiṭṭhati, parisamajjhe ekaṃ suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathetuṃ vā vācetuṃ vā na sakkoti, ayaṃ na sutadharo nāma. Yassa pana uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahitakālasadisameva hoti, dasapi vīsatipi vassāni sajjhāyaṃ akarontassa na nassati, ayaṃ sutadharo nāma. Sutasannicayoti sutassa sannicayabhūto. Yathā hi sutaṃ hadayamañjūsāya sannicitaṃ silāyaṃ lekhā viya, suvaṇṇaghaṭe pakkhittasīhavasā viya ca ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ sutasannicayo nāma. Dhātāti ṭhitā paguṇā. Ekaccassa hi uggahitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ niccalitaṃ na hoti, asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehīti vutte sajjhāyitvā saṃsanditvā samanuggāhitvā jānissāmīti vadati. Ekaccassa dhātaṃ paguṇaṃ bhavaṅgasotasadisaṃ hoti, asukasuttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā kathehīti vutte uddharitvā tameva katheti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dhātā’’ti.
“以口诵习熟”:是指按照十经、十品、五十经的方式,用口反复诵习。“以意善察”:就是用心的再三观察。对于已经用口诵习过的佛语,再用心中思惟时,处处都变得清晰明了,就像点亮大灯后站在那里,所见到的色像都清清楚楚。正是针对这个,才说“以口诵习熟,以意善察”。“以见善通达”:是从义理上和从原因上,以智慧善加通达。“以圆满的句文”:这里,“句”本身就是从文辞上表达义理的“句文”。所谓“圆满”,是指句文具足字母,不舍弃十种文句智。意思就是具备这样圆满的句文。再者,如果有比丘在大众中说法时,把正在讲的经或本生故事放下,另外引出一部带有责难性质的经,为它讲譬喻,却把原本的义理丢到一边,这样拿起这部经,又跳到那边,偏到一边去,看准时机就结束。那么,被放下的经就只是被搁置了,他的讲说就叫作“不圆满”。然而,如果有比丘把经或本生故事放下后,一步也不往外偏离,顺着巴利文的连结和前后文,不抹掉它们,安立在师长们所教导的方式上,就像用画笔细细描画,像把水引入深渠中,像良种骏马踏步而行,他的讲说才叫作“圆满”。针对这样的讲说,才说“以圆满的句文”。巴利
Vacasā paricitāti suttadasaka-vaggadasaka-paṇṇāsadasakānaṃ vasena vācāya sajjhāyitā. Manasānupekkhitāti cittena anupekkhitā, yassa vācāya sajjhāyitaṃ buddhavacanaṃ manasā cintentassa tattha tattha pākaṭaṃ hoti. Mahādīpaṃ jāletvā ṭhitassa rūpagataṃ viya paññāyati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘vacasā paricitā manasānupekkhitā’’ti. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti atthato ca kāraṇato ca paññāya suppaṭividdhā. Parimaṇḍalehipadabyañjanehīti ettha padameva atthassa byañjanato padabyañjanaṃ, taṃ akkharapāripūriṃ katvā dasavidhabyañjanabuddhiyo aparihāpetvā vuttaṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ nāma hoti, evarūpehi padabyañjanehīti attho. Apica yo bhikkhu parisati dhammaṃ desento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhapitvā aññaṃ upārambhakaraṃ suttaṃ āharati, tassa upamaṃ katheti, tadatthaṃ ohāreti, evamidaṃ gahetvā ettha khipanto ekapasseneva pariharanto kālaṃ ñatvā vuṭṭhahati. Nikkhittasuttaṃ pana nikkhattamattameva hoti, tassa kathā aparimaṇḍalā nāma hoti. Yo pana suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā nikkhipitvā bahi ekapadampi agantvā pāḷiyā anusandhiñca pubbāparañca amakkhento ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhatvā tulikāya paricchindanto viya, gambhīramātikāya udakaṃ pesento viya, padaṃ koṭṭento sindhavājānīyo viya gacchati, tassa kathā parimaṇḍalā nāma hoti. Evarūpiṃ kathaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘parimaṇḍalehi padabyañjanehī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“相续不断”在这里是指:有的比丘讲法时,无论是开始讲一部经还是一则本生故事,从开口那一刻起就急急忙忙,像钻木取火的人那样急促,像吞吃滚烫食物的人那样慌张;他把经文前后脉络中已经掌握的部分当成已掌握,没掌握的部分当成没掌握,就像在枯叶堆里赶蜥蜴,这里拍一下、那里打一下,把它赶出来后就丢下不管走了。也有比丘说法时,有时快有时慢,有时大声有时小声。就像饿鬼的火,有时烧起来,有时又熄灭;同样,在这里,这种说法者就叫作“饿鬼火式的说法者”,当听众想起身离开时,他又一遍遍地重新开讲。还有的说法者讲着讲着就在各处卡住停顿,唉声叹气地讲,像在哭一样。以上这些人所有的讲说,都叫作“不相续”。但如果有人开始讲一部经后,稳稳地依照师长们所教的方式,不让脉络中断,像河水奔流一样推进,像从空中恒河倾泻而下的水一样不停歇地讲说,他的讲说就是“相续不断”的。针对这种情况,才说“相续不断”。“为了断除随眠”,是为了彻底断除七种随眠。“以这样的”:以这样一位多闻的比丘,和同样多闻的百位或千位比丘一起,或者以袈裟边缘挨着袈裟边缘,或者以盘腿坐处紧挨着盘腿坐处,坐在牛角娑罗林中,使这片林园增添光彩。按照这种方式,应当理解所有类似段落的意思。巴利
Anuppabandhehīti ettha yo bhikkhu dhammaṃ kathento suttaṃ vā jātakaṃ vā ārabhitvā āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya turitaturito araṇiṃ manthento viya, uṇhakhādanīyaṃ khādanto viya, pāḷiyā anusandhipubbāparesu gahitaṃ gahitameva aggahitaṃ aggahitameva ca katvā purāṇapaṇṇantaresu caramānaṃ godhaṃ uṭṭhapento viya tattha tattha paharanto osāpento ohāya gacchati. Yopi dhammaṃ kathento kālena sīghaṃ kālena dandhaṃ kālena mahāsaddaṃ kālena khuddakasaddaṃ karoti. Yathā petaggi kālena jalati, kālena nibbāyati, evameva idha petaggidhammakathiko nāma hoti, parisāya uṭṭhātukāmāya punappunaṃ ārabhati. Yopi kathento tattha tattha vitthāyati, nitthunanto kandanto viya katheti, imesaṃ sabbesampi kathā appabandhā nāma hoti. Yo pana suttaṃ ārabhitvā ācariyehi dinnanaye ṭhito acchinnadhāraṃ katvā nadīsotaṃ viya pavatteti, ākāsagaṅgato bhassamānaṃ udakaṃ viya nirantaraṃ kathaṃ pavatteti, tassa kathā anuppabandhā hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘anuppabandhehī’’ti. Anusayasamugghātāyāti sattannaṃ anusayānaṃ samugghātatthāya. Evarūpenāti evarūpena bahussutena bhikkhunā tathārūpeneva bhikkhusatena bhikkhusahassena vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇena vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ, pallaṅkena vā pallaṅkaṃ āhacca nisinnena gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyya. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.
334 以独处为其乐处者,就是“以独处为乐处”。乐于独处者,就是“乐于独处”。巴利
334. Paṭisallānaṃ assa ārāmoti paṭisallānārāmo. Paṭisallāne ratoti paṭisallānarato.
335 “一千个世界”就是指一千个世界界域。因为这位长老日常忆念的范围,本来就只系在这一千个世界上;不过,如果他愿意,也能观察几千个轮围世界。“登上最上妙楼”是指登上那座七层或九层的最胜妙楼的顶层。“他能观见一千个轮圈”是指:他打开楼阁周廊的窗户,观见那些以轮毂为中心而立、轮圈紧挨着轮圈的一千个轮圈。对他来说,轮毂清晰可见,轮辐清晰可见,辐间空隙清晰可见,外轮圈也清晰可见。贤友,正是如此,这位具天眼的比丘以超越常人的天眼观察一千个世界。对他来说,站在楼阁中的人看车轮的轮毂那样,一千个轮围世界中的一千座须弥山清晰显现;各大洲像轮辐一样清晰显现;洲上居住的人们像辐间空隙一样清晰显现;轮围山像外轮圈一样清晰显现。巴利
335.Sahassaṃlokānanti sahassaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ. Ettakañhi therassa dhuvasevanaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ, ākaṅkhamāno pana thero anekānipi cakkavāḷasahassāni voloketiyeva. Uparipāsādavaragatoti sattabhūmakassa vā navabhūmakassa vā pāsādavarassa upari gato. Sahassaṃ nemimaṇḍalānaṃ volokeyyāti pāsādapariveṇe nābhiyā patiṭṭhitānaṃ nemivaṭṭiyā nemivaṭṭiṃ āhacca ṭhitānaṃ nemimaṇḍalānaṃ sahassaṃ vātapānaṃ vivaritvā olokeyya, tassa nābhiyopi pākaṭā honti, arāpi arantarānipi nemiyopi. Evameva kho, āvusoti, āvuso, evaṃ ayampi dibbacakkhuko bhikkhu dibbena cakkhunā atikkantamānusakena sahassaṃ lokānaṃ voloketi. Tassa pāsāde ṭhitapurisassa cakkanābhiyo viya cakkavāḷasahasse sinerusahassaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Arā viya dīpā pākaṭā honti. Arantarāni viya dīpaṭṭhitamanussā pākaṭā honti. Nemiyo viya cakkavāḷapabbatā pākaṭā honti.
336 336. “阿兰若住者”是指已经受持阿兰若头陀支的人。其余那些词句也是同样的道理。巴利
336.Āraññikoti samādiṇṇaaraññadhutaṅgo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
337 不会使人退缩,意思是不使人消沉。不能将有因有缘的问题提出并解答者,就叫做使人退缩。他不会这样做,这就是这句话的意思。能持续运转,意思是像河里的水流一样不断向前流。巴利
337.No ca saṃsādentīti na osādenti. Sahetukañhi sakāraṇaṃ katvā pañhaṃ pucchituṃ vissajjitumpi asakkonto saṃsādeti nāma. Evaṃ na karontīti attho. Pavattinī hotīti nadīsotodakaṃ viya pavattati.
338 通过任何一种住等至,也就是通过任何一种世间的住等至,或者通过任何一种出世间的住等至。巴利
338.Yāyavihārasamāpattiyāti yāya lokiyāya vihārasamāpattiyā, yāya lokuttarāya vihārasamāpattiyā.
339 “萨度,萨度,舍利弗”这句赞叹是对阿难尊者说的。不过,世尊是跟舍利弗尊者交谈。这个道理在各处都一样。“正如阿难那样”意思是:就像阿难正确解答时会解答的那样,阿难所解答的,正好适合他自己,完全符合他内心的意愿。阿难尊者自己就是多闻的人,他内心的意愿也是这样:“但愿教法中的同梵行者们都能成为多闻的人。”为什么?因为多闻的人能清楚分辨什么是允许的、什么是不允许的,什么是有过失的、什么是没有过失的,什么是重的、什么是轻的,什么是可以对治的、什么是不可对治的。多闻的人回想自己学过的佛语,就能知道:这一段讲的是戒,这一段讲的是定,这一段讲的是观,这一段讲的是道、果、涅槃。于是,在讲到戒的地方他就圆满戒,在讲到定的地方他就圆满定,在讲到观的地方他就让观成熟,然后修习圣道,亲自证悟圣果。所以长老心里才有这样的意愿:“但愿同梵行者们能掌握一部、两部、三部、四部或五部经藏,反复思惟,在讲到戒、定、观等地方圆满相应的修行,并按次第亲自证悟道、果、涅槃。”在其余各句中也同样适用这个道理。巴利
339.Sādhu sādhu sāriputtāti ayaṃ sādhukāro ānandattherassa dinno. Sāriputtattherena pana saddhiṃ bhagavā ālapati. Esa nayo sabbattha. Yathā taṃ ānandovāti yathā ānandova sammā byākaraṇamāno byākareyya, evaṃ byākataṃ ānandena attano anucchavikameva, ajjhāsayānurūpameva byākatanti attho. Ānandatthero hi attanāpi bahussuto, ajjhāsayopissa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sāsane sabrahmacārī bahussutā bhaveyyu’’nti. Kasmā? Bahussutassa hi kappiyākappiyaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ, garukalahukaṃ satekicchātekicchaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Bahussuto uggahitabuddhavacanaṃ āvajjitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, imasmiṃ samādhi, imasmiṃ vipassanā, imasmiṃ maggaphalanibbānānīti sīlassa āgataṭṭhāne sīlaṃ pūretvā, samādhissa āgataṭṭhāne samādhiṃ pūretvā vipassanāya āgataṭṭhāne vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā maggaṃ bhāvetvā phalaṃ sacchikaroti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ ajjhāsayo hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ekaṃ vā dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā pañca vā nikāye uggahetvā āvajjantā sīlādīnaṃ āgataṭṭhānesu sīlādīni paripūretvā anukkamena maggaphalanibbānāni sacchikareyyu’’nti. Sesavāresupi eseva nayo.
340 具寿雷瓦达确实心向禅那、乐于禅那,所以他这样想:“真希望同梵行者们都能独自静坐,修习遍业处的前行,成就八等至,再以禅那为近因增长观,最终亲证出世间法。”因此他这样作答。巴利
340. Āyasmā hi revato jhānajjhāsayo jhānābhirato, tasmāssa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ekikā nisīditvā kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
341 具寿阿那律有天眼。他这样想:真希望同梵行者们都能增长光明,用天眼看见成千上万世界中有情众生的死去与投生,对轮回生起恐惧而悚惧其心,进而增长观,亲证出世间法。因此他这样回答。巴利
341. Āyasmā anuruddho dibbacakkhuko, tassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbena cakkhunā anekesu cakkavāḷasahassesu cavamāne ca upapajjamāne ca satte disvā vaṭṭabhayena cittaṃ saṃvejetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
342 具寿大迦叶是倡导头陀行的人,他心里这样想:“真希望同梵行者们都成为倡导头陀行的人,以头陀支的力量消除对资具的渴爱,再抖落种种烦恼,增长观慧,亲证出世间法。”因此他这样作答。巴利
342. Āyasmā mahākassapo dhutavādo, tassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī dhutavādā hutvā dhutaṅgānubhāvena paccayataṇhaṃ milāpetvā aparepi nānappakāre kilese dhunitvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
343 具寿大目犍连已到达禅定巴拉密的顶峰。至于微细的心与心之间的差别、蕴与蕴之间的差别、界与界之间的差别、处与处之间的差别,入禅那的次第、入所缘的次第,禅支的分别、所缘的分别,禅支的转移、所缘的转移,单方面增长、两方面增长——这些只有精通阿毗达摩的论师才清楚。不通达阿毗达摩的人说法时,不知道“这是自己的宗义,这是对方的宗义”。他想阐明自己的宗义,却阐明了对方的宗义;想阐明对方的宗义,却阐明了自己的宗义,在法的辨别上把人误导。通达阿毗达摩的人,则按照自己宗义的准则阐明自己的宗义,按照对方宗义的准则阐明对方的宗义,在法的辨别上不误导人。因此,长老心中这样想:“啊,愿同梵行者们都成为通达阿毗达摩的论师,把智慧深入到这些微细之处,增长观行,亲证出世间法。”因此他这样作答。巴利
343. Āyasmā mahāmoggallāno samādhipāramiyā matthakaṃ patto, sukhumaṃ pana cittantaraṃ khandhantaraṃ dhātvantaraṃ āyatanantaraṃ jhānokkantikaṃ ārammaṇokkantikaṃ aṅgavavatthānaṃ ārammaṇavavatthānaṃ aṅgasaṅkanti ārammaṇasaṅkanti ekatovaḍḍhanaṃ ubhatovaḍḍhananti ābhidhammikadhammakathikasseva pākaṭaṃ. Anābhidhammiko hi dhammaṃ kathento – ‘‘ayaṃ sakavādo ayaṃ paravādo’’ti na jānāti. Sakavādaṃ dīpessāmīti paravādaṃ dīpeti, paravādaṃ dīpessāmīti sakavādaṃ dīpeti, dhammantaraṃ visaṃvādeti. Ābhidhammiko sakavādaṃ sakavādaniyāmeneva , paravādaṃ paravādaniyāmeneva dīpeti, dhammantaraṃ na visaṃvādeti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī ābhidhammikā hutvā sukhumesu ṭhānesu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
344 具寿舍利弗已经到达智慧巴拉密的顶峰,而且只有有智慧的人才能让心听从自己的掌控,没有智慧的人做不到。没有智慧的人被生起的心所控制,东奔西窜,没过几天就还俗了,遭遇不幸和毁灭。因此,长老心里这样想:“啊,但愿同梵行者们都不被心所控制,而能让心听从自己的掌控,粉碎一切偏逸与躁动,不让心向外跑出去哪怕一点点,增长观慧,亲自证得出世间法。”正是因为这个缘故,他才这样作答。巴利
344. Āyasmā sāriputto paññāpāramiyā matthakaṃ patto, paññavāyeva ca cittaṃ attano vase vattetuṃ sakkoti, na duppañño. Duppañño hi uppannassa cittassa vase vattetvā ito cito ca vipphanditvāpi katipāheneva gihibhāvaṃ patvā anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā therassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘aho vata sabrahmacārī acittavasikā hutvā cittaṃ attano vase vattetvā sabbānassa visevitavipphanditāni bhañjitvā īsakampi bahi nikkhamituṃ adentā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā lokuttaradhammaṃ sacchikareyyu’’nti. Tasmā evaṃ byākāsi.
345 舍利弗,你们所有人的善说都是有根据的。舍利弗,为什么这样说呢?因为名为僧园的地方,确实有多闻比丘使它庄严的理由,也有乐于禅那的比丘、具天眼的比丘、提倡头陀行的比丘、通晓阿毗达摩的比丘、能掌控自心的比丘使它庄严的理由。因此,你们所有人的善说都是有根据的,依这样那样的原因而说,才是善说,不是不善说。再者,“也请听听我的”——就是请你们也听听我所说的话。“我不将破此结跏趺座”——意思是我不将破坏这个依四支精进而盘起的结跏趺座,也就是不放松、不放腿的意思。据说,这是世尊在智慧成熟圆满时,舍弃了王权的荣耀而出家,次第登上菩提道场后,依四支精进而盘坐于不败结跏趺座,坚固决意而坐,摧破三魔之顶,在破晓时分,震响了十千世界,证得了一切知智。这句话是针对他自己的大菩提座而说的。再者,这也是出于慈悯未来的众生,为了展示以修行为核心的凡夫善士典范而说的。因为世尊清楚地预见到:“未来世,有这样志趣的善男子会这样反思:‘世尊在开示《大牛角经》时,在这里说:“舍利弗,有比丘在午后……像这样的比丘,舍利弗,才能让牛角娑罗林更加庄严。”我们应当领会世尊的意趣。’他们会在午后从托钵乞食回来,依四支精进而坚固决意,心想:‘未证得阿拉汉果,我绝不破此结跏趺座。’从而精进修习沙门法。他们如此修行,不久就能终结生老死。”正是出于对未来的众生的慈悯,为了展示以修行为核心的凡夫善士典范,世尊才这样说。舍利弗,像这样的比丘,确实能以绝对的方式让牛角娑罗林更加庄严。就这样,随顺经文的脉络,世尊结束了这次开示。巴利
345.Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsitaṃ pariyāyenāti sāriputta, yasmā saṅghārāmassa nāma bahussutabhikkhūhipi sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthi, jhānābhiratehipi, dibbacakkhukehipi, dhutavādehipi, ābhidhammikehipi, acittavasikehipi sobhanakāraṇaṃ atthi. Tasmā sabbesaṃ vo subhāsitaṃ pariyāyena, tena tena kāraṇena subhāsitameva, no dubbhāsitaṃ. Apica mamapi suṇāthāti apica mamapi vacanaṃ suṇātha. Na tāvāhaṃ imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmīti na tāva ahaṃ imaṃ caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya ābhujitaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmi, na mocessāmīti attho. Idaṃ kira bhagavā paripākagate ñāṇe rajjasiriṃ pahāya katābhinikkhamano anupubbena bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya aparājitapallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā daḷhasamādāno hutvā nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ bhinditvā paccūsasamaye dasasahassilokadhātuṃ unnādento sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhi, taṃ attano mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ sandhāya evamāha. Apica pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamānopi paṭipattisāraṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ dassento evamāha. Passati hi bhagavā – ‘‘anāgate evaṃ ajjhāsayā kulaputtā iti paṭisañcikkhissanti, ‘bhagavā mahāgosiṅgasuttaṃ kathento idha, sāriputta, bhikkhu pacchābhattaṃ…pe… evarūpena kho, sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti āha, mayaṃ bhagavato ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhissāmā’ti pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya daḷhasamādānā hutvā ‘arahattaṃ appatvā imaṃ pallaṅkaṃ na bhindissāmā’ti samaṇadhammaṃ kātabbaṃ maññissanti, te evaṃ paṭipannā katipāheneva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissantī’’ti, imaṃ pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamāno paṭipattisāraṃ puthujjanakalyāṇakaṃ dassento evamāha. Evarūpena kho, sāriputta, bhikkhunā gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti, sāriputta, evarūpena bhikkhunā nippariyāyeneva gosiṅgasālavanaṃ sobheyyāti yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
《大牧牛者经》的注释巴利
3. Mahāgopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
346 “如是我闻”这一段,说的就是《大牧牛者经》。在这部经里,有三种讲法:一管式、四方形式、安坐式。其中,先把经文诵出来,再逐词解释每个词的意思,这叫一管式。先讲愚痴的牧牛人,再讲愚痴的比丘,接着讲聪明的牧牛人,再讲聪明的比丘,这样组成四组来讲,叫四方形式。先讲愚痴的牧牛人并一路讲到结尾,先讲愚痴的比丘并一路讲到结尾,先讲聪明的牧牛人并一路讲到结尾,先讲聪明的比丘并一路讲到结尾,这叫安坐式。这是这里所有老师都惯用的讲法。巴利
346.Evaṃme sutanti mahāgopālakasuttaṃ. Tattha tisso kathā ekanāḷikā, caturassā, nisinnavattikāti. Tattha pāḷiṃ vatvā ekekapadassa atthakathanaṃ ekanāḷikā nāma. Apaṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā, apaṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā, paṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvāti catukkaṃ bandhitvā kathanaṃ caturassā nāma. Apaṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, apaṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitaṃ gopālakaṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamanaṃ, paṇḍitaṃ bhikkhuṃ dassetvā pariyosānagamananti ayaṃ nisinnavattikā nāma. Ayaṃ idha sabbācariyānaṃ āciṇṇā.
比丘们,“以十一种”是指以十一种缺点。“牛群”是指一群牛。“护持”是指看管着四处走动。“令增长”是指让它们壮大。“此处”是指在这个世间。“不识色”是指从数目上或从外观上都不认识牛。从数目上不认识,就是不知道自己有多少头牛,是一百头还是一千头,算不清数目。牛被抢走或跑丢了,他数一数牛群,心想“今天少了这么多”,却不肯走过两三个村子或进入森林去寻找;别人的牛混进了自己的牛群,他数一数,心想“这些不是我们的牛”,却不用棍子把它们赶出去。这样一来,他丢掉的牛就真的丢了。牛主人看见他赶着别人的牛到处走,就呵斥说:“这家伙这么长时间一直占着我们的母牛!”然后把自家的牛牵走。他的牛群就这样越来越少,也享受不到五种牛制品了。从外观上不认识,就是不知道“这些牛是白色的,这些是红色的,这些是黑色的,这些是花斑的,这些是青色的”。牛被抢走……(中略)……也享受不到五种牛制品了。巴利
Ekādasahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehīti ekādasahi aguṇakoṭṭhāsehi. Gogaṇanti gomaṇḍalaṃ. Pariharitunti pariggahetvā vicarituṃ. Phātiṃ kātunti vaḍḍhiṃ āpādetuṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ loke. Na rūpaññū hotīti gaṇanato vā vaṇṇato vā rūpaṃ na jānāti. Gaṇanato na jānāti nāma attano gunnaṃ sataṃ vā sahassaṃ vāti saṅkhyaṃ na jānāti. So gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā, ajja ettikā na dissantīti dve tīṇi gāmantarāni vā aṭaviṃ vā vicaranto na pariyesati, aññesaṃ gāvīsu attano gogaṇaṃ paviṭṭhāsupi gogaṇaṃ gaṇetvā, ‘‘imā ettikā gāvo na amhāka’’nti yaṭṭhiyā pothetvā na nīharati, tassa naṭṭhā gāviyo naṭṭhāva honti. Paragāviyo gahetvā vicarantaṃ gosāmikā disvā, ‘‘ayaṃ ettakaṃ kālaṃ amhākaṃ dhenuṃ gaṇhātī’’ti tajjetvā attano gāviyo gahetvā gacchanti. Tassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti. Vaṇṇato na jānāti nāma – ‘‘ettikā gāvo setā, ettikā rattā, ettikā kāḷā, ettikā kabarā ettikā nīlā’’ti na jānāti, so gāvīsu haṭāsu vā…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
不精通相,就是说不认得牛身上所做的各种记号,比如弓、枪、矛之类的图案。当牛被抢走或跑丢时,他说今天看不到有某种某种记号的牛……(中略)……他也被排除在五种牛味受用之外。巴利
Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotīti gāvīnaṃ sarīre kataṃ dhanusattisūlādibhedaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ na jānāti , so gāvīsu haṭāsu vā palātāsu vā ajja asukalakkhaṇā ca asukalakkhaṇā ca gāvo na dissanti…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
不把蝇卵去掉:牛被树桩、荆棘等刺伤的地方会生疮。青蝇在那上面产卵,这些卵就叫蝇卵。要用棍子把它们弄掉,再上药。愚笨的牧牛人不这么做,所以说他是不去掉蝇卵的人。他的牛身上的疮就越来越大、越来越深,小虫子钻进肚子里,牛被病痛压垮,既不能尽情吃草,也不能喝水。这样一来,牛的奶就断了,公牛的力气也衰退了,两者都有性命危险。他的牛群就这样衰败下去,也从五种牛乳制品的享用中被排除在外。巴利
Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretāti gunnaṃ khāṇukaṇṭakādīhi pahaṭaṭṭhānesu vaṇo hoti. Tattha nīlamakkhikā aṇḍakāni pātenti, tesaṃ āsāṭikāti nāma. Tāni daṇḍena apanetvā bhesajjaṃ dātabbaṃ hoti. Bālo gopālako tathā na karoti, tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotī’’ti. Tassa gunnaṃ vaṇā vaḍḍhanti, gambhīrā honti, pāṇakā kucchiṃ pavisanti, gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ, na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkonti. Tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati, goṇānaṃ javo hāyati, ubhayesaṃ jīvitantarāyo hoti. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
不把疮覆盖起来:就像前面说的那样,牛身上生了疮,就该给它上药,然后用树皮或破布包扎覆盖起来。愚笨的牧牛人不这么做,于是那些牛的疮口流出脓水,它们互相摩擦,结果其他牛也生了疮。这样一来,牛被疾病折磨,既不能尽情吃草……(中略)……那愚笨的牧牛人就被排除在外了。巴利
Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti gunnaṃ vuttanayeneva sañjāto vaṇo bhesajjaṃ datvā vākena vā cīrakena vā bandhitvā paṭicchādetabbo hoti. Bālo gopālako tathā na karoti, athassa gunnaṃ vaṇehi yūsā paggharanti, tā aññamaññaṃ nighaṃsenti, tena aññesampi vaṇā jāyanti. Evaṃ gāvo gelaññābhibhūtā neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不冒烟:雨季里虻、蚊等猖獗的时候,牛群进了牛栏,就该到处生烟。愚笨的牧牛人不这么做。牛群整夜被虻等叮咬折磨,睡不了觉,第二天就在林中各处树根底下躺下睡觉,既不能尽情吃草……乃至……连五种牛味的享用也被排除在外。巴利
Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti antovasse ḍaṃsamakasādīnaṃ ussannakāle gogaṇe vajaṃ paviṭṭhe tattha tattha dhūmo kātabbo hoti, apaṇḍito gopālako taṃ na karoti. Gogaṇo sabbarattiṃ ḍaṃsādīhi upadduto niddaṃ alabhitvā punadivase araññe tattha tattha rukkhamūlādīsu nipajjitvā niddāyati, neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ…pe… pañcagorasaparibhogatopi paribāhiro hoti.
不知道哪里是合适的渡口:他不知道渡口哪里平坦、哪里险恶、哪里有捕食者、哪里没有捕食者,就把牛群赶下不合适的渡口。牛群踩在险恶渡口的石头等东西上,脚就破碎;一旦走进有鳄鱼等捕食者的深水渡口,就会被抓住。于是他就落到这种地步:“今天丢了这么多头牛,今天又丢了这么多头。”这样一来,他的牛群也渐渐减少,他自己也被排除在五种牛味的享用之外。巴利
Na titthaṃ jānātīti titthaṃ samanti vā visamanti vā sagāhanti vā niggāhanti vā na jānāti, so atitthena gāviyo otāreti. Tāsaṃ visamatitthe pāsāṇādīni akkamantīnaṃ pādā bhijjanti, sagāhaṃ gambhīraṃ titthaṃ otiṇṇā kumbhīlādayo gāhā gaṇhanti. Ajja ettikā gāvo naṭṭhā, ajja ettikāti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
不知道哪些牛喝了水、哪些没喝:他既不知道喝过水的,也不知道没喝过水的。牧牛人本来应该这样知道:这头牛喝了水,这头没喝;这头在饮水的地方占到了位置,这头没占到。可是这个人白天在树林里看守牛群,心里想着我要带它们去喝水,就赶着牛群到河边或湖边去。到了那里,大公牛、小公牛和强壮的母牛用角或胁部把瘦弱的、年老的牛撞开,给自己腾出地方,走进齐大腿深的水里随意喝。剩下的牛占不到地方,只能站在岸边喝混着泥浆的水,或者根本喝不到。然后牧牛人用棍子打它们的背,再把它们赶回树林。在那里,没喝到水的牛被渴折磨得干瘦,没法吃饱草,于是母牛的奶断了,牛的力气也衰退了……他就被排除在外了。巴利
Napītaṃ jānātīti pītampi apītampi na jānāti. Gopālakena hi ‘‘imāya gāviyā pītaṃ, imāya na pītaṃ, imāya pānīyatitthe okāso laddho, imāya na laddho’’ti evaṃ pītāpītaṃ jānitabbaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ pana divasabhāgaṃ araññe gogaṇaṃ rakkhitvā pānīyaṃ pāyessāmīti nadiṃ vā taḷākaṃ vā gahetvā gacchati. Tattha mahāusabhā ca anuusabhā ca balavagāviyo ca dubbalāni ceva mahallakāni ca gorūpāni siṅgehi vā phāsukāhi vā paharitvā attano okāsaṃ katvā ūruppamāṇaṃ udakaṃ pavisitvā yathākāmaṃ pivanti. Avasesā okāsaṃ alabhamānā tīre ṭhatvā kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivanti, apītā eva vā honti. Atha ne gopālako piṭṭhiyaṃ paharitvā puna araññaṃ paveseti, tattha apītagāviyo pipāsāya sukkhamānā yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ na sakkonti, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati, goṇānaṃ javo hāyati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
他不知道路:他不知道“这条路平坦安稳,那条路崎岖、危险可怖”。他避开平坦安稳的路,反而把牛群引上另一条路。在那里,牛群被狮子、老虎等猛兽的气味所慑,或遭盗贼之难,像受惊的鹿一样昂首呆立,既不能尽情吃草,也不能喝水。于是牛乳断绝……他也就被排除在外了。巴利
Na vīthiṃ jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ maggo samo khemo, ayaṃ visamo sāsaṅko sappaṭibhayo’’ti na jānāti. So samaṃ khemaṃ maggaṃ vajjetvā gogaṇaṃ itaraṃ maggaṃ paṭipādeti, tattha gāvo sīhabyagghādīnaṃ gandhena coraparissayena vā abhibhūtā bhantamigasappaṭibhāgā gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā tiṭṭhanti, neva yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādanti, na pānīyaṃ pivanti, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不善于放牧的区域:牧牛人应当懂得放牧的区域,也要知道五日一轮或七日一轮的规矩。在一个方向放牛群吃过草之后,第二天就不该再去那里放。因为一大群牛踩过的地方,就像鼓面一样光秃秃的,草被啃得干干净净,水也被搅浑了。所以,应该等到第五天或第七天再回到那里放牧,这样草才能重新长出来,水也能恢复清澈。可是这个人不懂五日一轮或七日一轮的规矩,天天都守在同一片地方放牛。这样一来,他的牛群吃不到青草,只能啃干草,喝混着泥浆的水,于是牛的奶就断了……他也就被排除在外了。巴利
Na gocarakusalo hotīti gopālakena hi gocarakusalena bhavitabbaṃ, pañcāhikavāro vā sattāhikavāro vā jānitabbo, ekadisāya gogaṇaṃ cāretvā punadivase tattha na cāretabbo. Mahatā hi gogaṇena ciṇṇaṭṭhānaṃ bheritalaṃ viya suddhaṃ hoti nittiṇaṃ, udakampi āluḷīyati. Tasmā pañcame vā sattame vā divase puna tattha cāretuṃ vaṭṭati, ettakena hi tiṇampi paṭiviruhati, udakampi pasīdati. Ayaṃ pana imaṃ pañcāhikavāraṃ vā sattāhikavāraṃ vā na jānāti, divase divase rakkhitaṭṭhāneyeva rakkhati. Athassa gogaṇo haritatiṇaṃ na labhati, sukkhatiṇaṃ khādanto kalalamissakaṃ udakaṃ pivati, tattha gunnaṃ khīraṃ chijjati…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
所谓“挤奶不留剩余”:聪明的牧牛人在小牛犊的血肉还没长结实之前,应该留出一两个乳头不挤,做到挤奶时留一些剩余。可这个人却挤得一滴不剩,什么都没给小牛留下。吃奶的小牛因为渴望母乳而干瘦,站都站不稳,颤抖着倒在母牛面前死去。母牛看到小牛,心想:“我的孩子连自己母亲的一口奶都喝不到啊!”因为丧子之痛,它没法尽情吃草,也喝不下水,乳头里的奶就断了。这样一来,他的牛群也衰败了,他本人也被排除在五种牛乳制品之外。巴利
Anavasesadohī ca hotīti paṇḍitagopālakena yāva vacchakassa maṃsalohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, tāva ekaṃ dve thane ṭhapetvā sāvasesadohinā bhavitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ vacchakassa kiñci anavasesetvā duhati, khīrapako vaccho khīrapipāsāya sukkhati, saṇṭhātuṃ asakkonto kampamāno mātu purato patitvā kālaṅkaroti. Mātā puttakaṃ disvā, ‘‘mayhaṃ puttako attano mātukhīraṃ pātumpi na labhatī’’ti puttasokena na yāvadatthaṃ tiṇāni khādituṃ, na pānīyaṃ pātuṃ sakkoti, thanesu khīraṃ chijjati. Evamassa gogaṇopi parihāyati, pañcagorasatopi paribāhiro hoti.
能为牛群充当父亲般依靠的,就是“牛群之父”。随心所欲地带着牛群走的,就是“牛群向导”。所谓“不加以特别恭敬”:明智的牧牛人确实会对这样的公牛给予特别恭敬——供给上等的牛食,用香和五指印装饰它,给它戴上花环,在牛角上套上金银套子,夜里点亮灯火,让它睡在布幔下面。可是这个人对公牛连一点恭敬都不做。公牛得不到特别的恭敬,就不守护牛群,也不阻挡危险。这样一来,他的牛群就衰败了,他本人也被排除在五种牛乳制品之外。巴利
Gunnaṃ pituṭṭhānaṃ karontīti gopitaro. Gāvo pariṇayanti yathāruciṃ gahetvā gacchantīti gopariṇāyakā. Na atirekapūjāyāti paṇḍito hi gopālako evarūpe usabhe atirekapūjāya pūjeti, paṇītaṃ gobhattaṃ deti, gandhapañcaṅgulikehi maṇḍeti, mālaṃ pilandheti, siṅge suvaṇṇarajatakosake ca dhāreti, rattiṃ dīpaṃ jāletvā celavitānassa heṭṭhā sayāpeti. Ayaṃ pana tato ekasakkārampi na karoti, usabhā atirekapūjaṃ alabhamānā gogaṇaṃ na rakkhanti, parissayaṃ na vārenti. Evamassa gogaṇo parihāyati, pañcagorasato paribāhiro hoti.
347 这里“在此”是指在这样的教法中。“不知色”是指,对所说的色——也就是“四大以及四大所造色”——他不能从两方面了知:不能从数目方面了知,也不能从生起方面了知。从数目方面不了知,就是不知道经典中说的二十五种色聚:眼处、耳处、鼻处、舌处、身处、色处、声处、香处、味处、触处、女根、男根、命根、身表、语表、虚空界、水界、色的轻快性、柔软性、适业性、积集、相续、老性、无常性、段食。就像那个牧牛人不能从数目方面了解牛的色身一样,这位比丘也是如此。他因为不能从数目方面了知色,就无法把握色、无法确定非色、无法把握色与非色、无法观察缘、无法安立特征,也就不能让业处达到圆满。就像那个牧牛人的牛群不增长一样,他在这样的教法中,在戒、定、观、道、果、涅槃上也不增长;又像那个牧牛人被排除在五种牛乳制品之外一样,他也被排除在五种法蕴之外,即无学戒蕴、无学定蕴、无学慧蕴、无学解脱蕴、无学解脱知见蕴。巴利
347.Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Na rūpaññū hotīti, ‘‘cattāri mahābhūtāni catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyarūpa’’nti evaṃ vuttarūpaṃ dvīhākārehi na jānāti gaṇanato vā samuṭṭhānato vā. Gaṇanato na jānāti nāma, ‘‘cakkhāyatanaṃ, sota-ghāna-jivhā-kāyāyatanaṃ, rūpa-sadda-gandha-rasa-phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ, itthindriyaṃ, purisindriyaṃ, jīvitindriyaṃ, kāyaviññatti, vacīviññatti, ākāsadhātu, āpodhātu, rūpassa lahutā, mudutā, kammaññatā, upacayo, santati, jaratā, rūpassa aniccatā, kabaḷīkāro āhāro’’ti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatā pañcavīsati rūpakoṭṭhāsāti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako gaṇanato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So gaṇanato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ vavatthapetvā rūpārūpaṃ pariggahetvā paccayaṃ sallakkhetvā lakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sīlasamādhivipassanāmaggaphalanibbānehi na vaḍḍhati, yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi paribāhiro hoti, evaṃ asekkhena sīlakkhandhena, asekkhena samādhi, paññā, vimutti, vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhenāti pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.
他不了知“从生起方面”是什么意思,也就是不了知:这么多色法是由一种生起,这么多色法是由两种生起,这么多色法是由三种生起,这么多色法是由四种生起,这么多色法不从任何处生起。就像那个牧牛人从颜色上认不出牛的样子,这位比丘也是如此。他因为从生起方面不了知色法,就无法把握色法、无法确定非色法……中略……被排除在外。巴利
Samuṭṭhānato na jānāti nāma, ‘‘ettakaṃ rūpaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ tisamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ catusamuṭṭhānaṃ, ettakaṃ na kutocisamuṭṭhātī’’ti na jānāti. Seyyathāpi so gopālako vaṇṇato gunnaṃ rūpaṃ na jānāti, tathūpamo ayaṃ bhikkhu. So samuṭṭhānato rūpaṃ ajānanto rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ vavatthapetvā…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不善于相,意思是:他不知道“愚者以业为相,贤者以业为相”——也就是说,他不知道如此所说的善业与不善业就是愚者和贤者的标志。因为不知道这一点,他就不远离愚者、不亲近贤者;不远离愚者、不亲近贤者,他就不知道什么是适宜与不适宜、善与不善、有过失与无过失、重与轻、可补救与不可补救、有因与无因;因为不知道这些,他就不能执取业处并使之增长。就像那个牧牛人的牛群不增长一样,在这教法中,他在前面所说的戒等方面也不增长;又像那个牧牛人被排除在五种牛乳制品之外,他也被排除在五种法蕴之外。巴利
Na lakkhaṇakusalo hotīti kammalakkhaṇo bālo, kammalakkhaṇo paṇḍitoti evaṃ vuttaṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ paṇḍitabālalakkhaṇanti na jānāti. So evaṃ ajānanto bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite na sevati, bāle vajjetvā paṇḍite asevanto kappiyākappiyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ sāvajjānavajjaṃ garukalahukaṃ satekicchaatekicchaṃ kāraṇākāraṇaṃ na jānāti; taṃ ajānanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. So yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane yathāvuttehi sīlādīhi na vaḍḍhati, gopālako viya ca pañcahi gorasehi pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhiro hoti.
当被说“不能去除牛虻”时,若有人提出已生起的欲寻等,他不去清除欲寻之类的念头。他没有把这个不善寻当作牛虻去掉,反而被寻牵着走,四处游荡,无法执取业处并让它增长。就像那个牧牛人……中略……被排除在外。巴利
Na āsāṭikaṃ hāretā hotīti uppannaṃ kāmavitakkanti evaṃ vutte kāmavitakkādike na vinodeti, so imaṃ akusalavitakkaṃ āsāṭikaṃ ahāretvā vitakkavasiko hutvā vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti, so yathā tassa gopālakassa…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不隐藏伤口,意思是:以“用眼睛看到色之后成为执取相的人”等的方式,在一切所缘上执取相,正如那个牧牛人不隐藏伤口,他同样不能成就防护。他根门敞开地四处游走,无法执取业处并加以增长……中略……被排除在外。巴利
Na vaṇaṃ paṭicchādetā hotīti cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hotītiādinā nayena sabbārammaṇesu nimittaṃ gaṇhanto yathā so gopālako vaṇaṃ na paṭicchādeti, evaṃ saṃvaraṃ na sampādeti. So vivaṭadvāro vicaranto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
那牧牛人不像烧烟那样制造“说法的烟”——不说法、不诵经、不和人一起讨论、也不作随喜。因此人们不知道他是多闻、有德行的人;因为不知道他有功德还是有过失,就不再用四种生活必需品来护持他。他因为缺少生活必需品而疲惫不堪,没法背诵佛语,没法圆满修行,也没法取业处来修习增长……乃至……被排除在僧团之外。巴利
Na dhūmaṃ kattā hotīti so gopālako dhūmaṃ viya dhammadesanādhūmaṃ na karoti, dhammakathaṃ vā sarabhaññaṃ vā upanisinnakathaṃ vā anumodanaṃ vā na karoti . Tato naṃ manussā bahussuto guṇavāti na jānanti, te guṇāguṇaṃ ajānantā catūhi paccayehi saṅgahaṃ na karonti . So paccayehi kilamamāno buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyaṃ kātuṃ vattapaṭipattiṃ pūretuṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
“不知渡口”是指:他不去亲近那些像渡口一样的多闻比丘;就算去亲近了,也不这样反复追问、仔细请教:“尊者,这段文句该怎么理解?这句话是什么意思?这个地方圣典怎么说?这个地方的义理要表明什么?”不让他们知道,就是这个意思。因为他这样不追问,那些多闻比丘就不会为他打开没有打开的,不会分别开示,不会把晦涩的讲清楚,不会把不明显的弄明白。在种种让人起疑惑的法上,对于种种疑惑,连一个疑惑都不为他消除。因为疑惑本身就是让人起疑惑的法。这里的意思是,连一个疑惑都不去除。他这样不亲近多闻的渡口,自己带着疑惑,就无法取业处并让它增长。就像那个牧牛人不知道渡口一样,这位比丘也不知道法的渡口;因为不知道,就在不对的地方提问:去亲近阿毗达摩师,却问什么是允许什么是不允许;去亲近持律者,却问色与非色的区分。他们被问到不对的地方,答不上来。他自己带着疑惑,就无法取业处并让它增长……中略……成为被排除在外的人。巴利
Na titthaṃ jānātīti titthabhūte bahussutabhikkhū na upasaṅkamati, upasaṅkamanto, ‘‘idaṃ, bhante, byañjanaṃ kathaṃ ropetabbaṃ, imassa bhāsitassa ko attho, imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷi kiṃ vadeti, imasmiṃ ṭhāne attho kiṃ dīpetī’’ti evaṃ na paripucchati na paripañhati, na jānāpetīti attho. Tassa te evaṃ aparipucchato avivaṭañceva na vivaranti, bhājetvā na dassenti, anuttānīkatañca na uttānīkaronti, apākaṭaṃ na pākaṭaṃ karonti. Anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesūti anekavidhāsu kaṅkhāsu ekaṃ kaṅkhampi na paṭivinodenti. Kaṅkhā eva hi kaṅkhāṭhāniyā dhammā nāma. Tattha ekaṃ kaṅkhampi na nīharantīti attho. So evaṃ bahussutatitthaṃ anupasaṅkamitvā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti. Yathā ca so gopālako titthaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ ayampi bhikkhu dhammatitthaṃ na jānāti, ajānanto avisaye pañhaṃ pucchati, abhidhammikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā kappiyākappiyaṃ pucchati, vinayadharaṃ upasaṅkamitvā rūpārūpaparicchedaṃ pucchati. Te avisaye puṭṭhā kathetuṃ na sakkonti, so attanā sakaṅkho kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不知可饮:就像那个牧牛人分不清能喝的和不能喝的,他也不知道、得不到与法相应的欢喜,不能依靠闻法所成的福德善行获得利益,去到法会却不恭敬听法,坐着就打瞌睡、说闲话、心不在焉。这样不恭敬听法,他就无法取业处并令其增长……中略……成为门外汉。巴利
Na pītaṃ jānātīti yathā so gopālako pītāpītaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ dhammūpasañhitaṃ pāmojjaṃ na jānāti na labhati, savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ nissāya ānisaṃsaṃ na vindati, dhammassavanaggaṃ gantvā sakkaccaṃ na suṇāti, nisinno niddāyati, kathaṃ katheti, aññavihitako hoti, so sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ asuṇanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不知道路:就像那个牧牛人分不清路和不是路一样,他不能如实了知“这是世间道,这是出世间道”的圣八支道。因为不了知,他就执著于世间道,无法证得出世间道……中略……成为被排除在外的人。巴利
Na vīthiṃ jānātīti so gopālako maggāmaggaṃ viya, – ‘‘ayaṃ lokiyo ayaṃ lokuttaro’’ti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti. Ajānanto lokiyamagge abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
不善于行境,就是说,就像在五日一轮、七日一轮的放牧中那样,他不能如实了知四念处中“这些是世间的,这些是出世间的”。因为不了知,他就让自己的智慧在微细之处运作,执著于世间念处,无法生起出世间……乃至成为门外汉。巴利
Na gocarakusalo hotīti so gopālako pañcāhikavāre sattāhikavāre viya cattāro satipaṭṭhāne , ‘‘ime lokiyā ime lokuttarā’’ti yathābhūtaṃ na pajānāti. Ajānanto sukhumaṭṭhānesu attano ñāṇaṃ carāpetvā lokiyasatipaṭṭhāne abhinivisitvā lokuttaraṃ nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
他成了“一滴不剩地挤奶的人”,意思是:接受供养时不知道限度,一点不剩地全挤干。而在释义部分说“人们拿来并邀请”,意思是把东西拿来后邀请。这里有两种“拿来”:言语的拿来和资具的拿来。言语的拿来,是人们走到比丘跟前邀请说:“尊者,需要什么就说吧。”资具的拿来,是人们拿着布匹等物品,或者油、糖之类,走到比丘跟前说:“尊者,需要多少就拿多少。”其中,比丘不知道限度,是说比丘对这些资具不知道分寸,没有按照《传车经》所说的方式——“应当了解施主的意愿,应当了解所施之物的意愿,应当了解自己的能力”——把握适当的量,而是别人拿来什么,他就全部收下,这就是这里的意思。人们因此心生懊悔,不再拿来邀请。他因为资具而疲于应付,无法取来业处并使之增长……乃至被排除在外。巴利
Anavasesadohī ca hotīti paṭiggahaṇe mattaṃ ajānanto anavasesaṃ duhati. Niddesavāre panassa abhihaṭṭhuṃ pavārentīti abhiharitvā pavārenti. Ettha dve abhihārā vācābhihāro ca paccayābhihāro ca. Vācābhihāro nāma manussā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘vadeyyātha, bhante, yenattho’’ti pavārenti. Paccayābhihāro nāma vatthādīni vā telaphāṇitādīni vā gahetvā bhikkhussa santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘gaṇhatha, bhante, yāvatakena attho’’ti vadanti. Tatra bhikkhu mattaṃ na jānātīti bhikkhu tesu paccayesu pamāṇaṃ na jānāti, – ‘‘dāyakassa vaso veditabbo, deyyadhammassa vaso veditabbo, attano thāmo veditabbo’’ti rathavinīte vuttanayena pamāṇayuttaṃ aggahetvā yaṃ āharanti, taṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhātīti attho. Manussā vippaṭisārino na puna abhiharitvā pavārenti. So paccayehi kilamanto kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā vaḍḍhetuṃ na sakkoti…pe… paribāhiro hoti.
他们不以额外的供养来礼敬长老。正如牧牛人不以额外供养去礼敬大公牛那样,这些比丘也不以或明或暗的慈、以及身业等所表现的额外供养,来礼敬那些长老比丘。于是长老们心想:“这些比丘对我们既不尊重,也不恭敬。”便不以两种摄受来摄受新学比丘——不以财物摄受,也就是不给衣服、钵、钵中之物或住处;即使新学比丘疲惫憔悴,也不照顾看护;也不教他们学习巴利圣典、注释书、法说结集或密典。新学比丘从长老那里完全得不到这两种摄受,就无法在这教法中站稳脚跟。正如那个牧牛人的牛群不增长,他们的戒等功德也不增长;又像那个牧牛人缺少五种牛味,他们也缺少五种法蕴。白分的内容,应按照与黑分所说相反的方式来理解。巴利
Te na atirekapūjāya pūjetā hotīti so gopālako mahāusabhe viya te there bhikkhū imāya āvi ceva raho ca mettāya kāyakammādikāya atirekapūjāya na pūjeti. Tato therā, – ‘‘ime amhesu garucittīkāraṃ na karontī’’ti navake bhikkhū dvīhi saṅgahehi na saṅgaṇhanti, na āmisasaṅgahena cīvarena vā pattena vā pattapariyāpannena vā vasanaṭṭhānena vā. Kilamante milāyantepi nappaṭijagganti. Pāḷiṃ vā aṭṭhakathaṃ vā dhammakathābandhaṃ vā guyhaganthaṃ vā na sikkhāpenti. Navakā therānaṃ santikā sabbaso ime dve saṅgahe alabhamānā imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā tassa gopālakassa gogaṇo na vaḍḍhati, evaṃ sīlādīni na vaḍḍhanti. Yathā ca so gopālako pañcahi gorasehi paribāhiro hoti, evaṃ pañcahi dhammakkhandhehi paribāhirā honti. Sukkapakkho kaṇhapakkhe vuttavipallāsavasena yojetvā veditabboti.
4. 《小牧牛者经》的注释巴利
4. Cūḷagopālakasuttavaṇṇanā
350 “如是我闻”这一句,是《小牧牛者经》的开头。其中“在乌迦车拉”是指一座叫乌迦车拉的城市。据说,在建造那座城的时候,一天夜里,有一条鱼从恒河的水流中跳到了岸上。人们把布浸在油盆里做成火把,靠这个抓住了那条鱼。城池建成后,在给它取名时,大家说:“我们在选定城址的那天,用布火把抓到了鱼。”于是就把这座城命名为乌迦车拉。
“对比丘们说”:世尊傍晚时坐在恒河岸边一处能清楚望见整条恒河的沙洲上,被大比丘僧团围绕着,望着浩浩荡荡、奔流不息的恒河,心里想:“过去有没有人依靠这条恒河,经历过兴盛和衰败呢?”他观察到,过去有一个愚笨的牧牛人,带着几十万头牛,那些牛因为那个牧牛人而落入恒河的漩涡,最后掉进了大海;而另一个聪明的牧牛人,则让几十万头牛平安无事、兴旺健康。世尊看到这些后,心想:“我就以这件事为因缘,为比丘们说法。”于是对比丘们说了下面的话。巴利
350.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷagopālakasuttaṃ. Tattha ukkacelāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tasmiṃ kira māpiyamāne rattiṃ gaṅgāsotato maccho thalaṃ patto. Manussā celāni telapātiyaṃ temetvā ukkā katvā macchaṃ gaṇhiṃsu. Nagare niṭṭhite tassa nāmaṃ karonte amhehi nagaraṭṭhānassa gahitadivase celukkāhi maccho gahitoti ukkacelā-tvevassa nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Bhikkhū āmantesīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne nisinnassa sabbā gaṅgā pākaṭā hutvā paññāyati, tādise vālikussade gaṅgātitthe sāyanhasamaye mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto nisīditvā mahāgaṅgaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ sandamānaṃ olokento, – ‘‘atthi nu kho imaṃ gaṅgaṃ nissāya koci pubbe vaḍḍhiparihāniṃ patto’’ti āvajjitvā, pubbe ekaṃ bālagopālakaṃ nissāya anekasatasahassā gogaṇā imissā gaṅgāya āvaṭṭe patitvā samuddameva paviṭṭhā, aparaṃ pana paṇḍitagopālakaṃ nissāya anekasatasahassagogaṇassa sotthi jātā vaḍḍhi jātā ārogyaṃ jātanti addasa. Disvā imaṃ kāraṇaṃ nissāya bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ desessāmīti cintetvā bhikkhū āmantesi.
摩揭陀人,就是摩揭陀国的居民。劣慧性,就是没有智慧的本性,迟钝又极其愚笨。未观察,就是不留心、不仔细思量。试图渡,就是开始想让牛群渡过去。向对岸——善毗提诃人的对岸:恒河的此岸是摩揭陀国,彼岸是毗提诃人国,牧牛人想把牛从摩揭陀国带到毗提诃人国去护养,于是试图渡到对岸。针对这件事才说“向对岸——善毗提诃人的对岸”。形成漩涡,就是转成漩涡。遭遇不幸与毁灭,就是没有增长,反而走向毁灭,直接掉进了大海。其实,那个牧牛人赶牛下水时,本该先看清恒河此岸牛群下水的渡口是平坦还是不平,在恒河中间也该留意两三处沙洲,好让牛群歇脚;同样,对岸也该看清三四处的上岸口,心里盘算:从这边渡口上不去的,就会抓住那个渡口;从那个渡口上不去的,就会抓住这个。可是这个愚笨的牧牛人,既没看清此岸牛群下水的渡口是平是险,也没在恒河中间留意两三处沙洲给牛群歇脚,更没观察对岸四五处上岸的地方,就在根本不该渡的地方把牛赶下了水。这时,那头大公牛因为跑得快、力气大,横着冲断了恒河的水流,到了对岸,看见岸壁陡峭、荆棘丛生,知道“这地方很难站稳”,连个落脚的地方都找不到,就折返回来。牛群见大公牛折返,也想“我们也回去吧”,于是都回转了。大群牛回转的地方,水流被截断,在恒河中间形成了漩涡。牛群陷入漩涡,最终掉进了大海。连一头牛也没有安然无恙的。因此说“就在那里遭遇了不幸与毁灭”。巴利
Māgadhakoti magadharaṭṭhavāsī. Duppaññajātikoti nippaññasabhāvo dandho mahājaḷo. Asamavekkhitvāti asallakkhetvā anupadhāretvā. Patāresīti tāretuṃ ārabhi. Uttaraṃ tīraṃ suvidehānanti gaṅgāya orime tīre magadharaṭṭhaṃ, pārime tīre videharaṭṭhaṃ, gāvo magadharaṭṭhato videharaṭṭhaṃ netvā rakkhissāmīti uttaraṃ tīraṃ patāresi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uttaraṃ tīraṃ suvidehāna’’nti. Āmaṇḍalikaṃ karitvāti maṇḍalikaṃ katvā. Anayabyasanaṃ āpajjiṃsūti avaḍḍhiṃ vināsaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, mahāsamuddameva pavisiṃsu. Tena hi gopālakena gāvo otārentena gaṅgāya orimatīre samatitthañca visamatitthañca oloketabbaṃ assa, majjhe gaṅgāya gunnaṃ vissamaṭṭhānatthaṃ dve tīṇi vālikatthalāni sallakkhetabbāni assu. Tathā pārimatīre tīṇi cattāri titthāni, imasmā titthā bhaṭṭhā imaṃ titthaṃ gaṇhissanti, imasmā bhaṭṭhā imanti. Ayaṃ pana bālagopālako orimatīre gunnaṃ otaraṇatitthaṃ samaṃ vā visamaṃ vā anoloketvāva majjhe gaṅgāya gunnaṃ vissamaṭṭhānatthaṃ dve tīṇi vālikatthalānipi asallakkhetvāva paratīre cattāri pañca uttaraṇatitthāni asamavekkhitvāva atittheneva gāvo otāresi. Athassa mahāusabho javanasampannatāya ceva thāmasampannatāya ca tiriyaṃ gaṅgāya sotaṃ chetvā pārimaṃ tīraṃ patvā chinnataṭañceva kaṇṭakagumbagahanañca disvā, ‘‘dubbiniviṭṭhameta’’nti ñatvā dhuragga-patiṭṭhānokāsampi alabhitvā paṭinivatti. Gāvo mahāusabho nivatto mayampi nivattissāmāti nivattā. Mahato gogaṇassa nivattaṭṭhāne udakaṃ chijjitvā majjhe gaṅgāya āvaṭṭaṃ uṭṭhapesi. Gogaṇo āvaṭṭaṃ pavisitvā samuddameva patto. Ekopi goṇo arogo nāma nāhosi. Tenāha – ‘‘tattheva anayabyasanaṃ āpajjiṃsū’’ti.
对这个世界不善巧:在这里,也就是在蕴、界、处当中不善巧、不熟练;对另一个世界也是这样。称为魔罗的领域,是指三地诸法;非魔罗的领域,是指九种出世间法。死王的领域,同样是指三地诸法;非死王的领域,是指九种出世间法。其中,不善巧就是不熟练。从词义来说,魔罗的领域,就是属于魔罗的地方;“领域”是指处所、事物、住所、行境。死王的领域也是同样的道理。“他们”,是指那样的一类沙门、婆罗门;由此可知,这里指的是六师外道。巴利
Akusalā imassa lokassāti idha loke khandhadhātāyatanesu akusalā achekā, paralokepi eseva nayo. Māradheyyaṃ vuccati tebhūmakadhammā. Amāradheyyaṃ nava lokuttaradhammā. Maccudheyyampi tebhūmakadhammāva. Amaccudheyyaṃ nava lokuttaradhammā. Tattha akusalā achekā. Vacanatthato pana mārassa dheyyaṃ māradheyyaṃ. Dheyyanti ṭhānaṃ vatthu nivāso gocaro. Maccudheyyepi eseva nayo. Tesanti tesaṃ evarūpānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ, iminā cha satthāro dassitāti veditabbā.
351 351. 这样把黑暗的部分说完之后,为了显示光明的部分,世尊说了“诸比丘,过去……”等话。其中,“强壮牛”指已经调伏的公牛和母牛。“可调伏牛”指还需要调伏的公牛以及还没生过小牛的母牛。“幼牛”指已经过了牛犊阶段、长得壮实的小牛。“犊子”指还在吃奶的幼小牛犊。“瘦弱无力者”指肉少、血少、力气微弱的牛。“当日初生者”指当天刚出生的小牛。“被母牛的叫声冲荡”:母牛走在前面,发出“吽吽”的声音,像是在显示自己的尊贵并传递信号,同时用胸膛破开河水前进;小牛因为母牛这种显示尊贵的叫声,或者被母牛用胸膛破开的水流推着走,所以叫“被母牛的叫声冲荡”。巴利
351. Evaṃ kaṇhapakkhaṃ niṭṭhapetvā sukkapakkhaṃ dassento bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha balavagāvoti dantagoṇe ceva dhenuyo ca. Dammagāvoti dametabbagoṇe ceva avijātagāvo ca. Vacchatareti vacchabhāvaṃ taritvā ṭhite balavavacche. Vacchaketi dhenupake taruṇavacchake . Kisābalaketi appamaṃsalohite mandathāme. Tāvadeva jātakoti taṃdivase jātako. Mātugoravakena vuyhamānoti mātā purato purato huṃhunti goravaṃ katvā saññaṃ dadamānā urena udakaṃ chindamānā gacchati, vacchako tāya goravasaññāya dhenuyā vā urena chinnodakena gacchamāno ‘‘mātugoravakena vuyhamāno’’ti vuccati.
352 已切断魔罗之流:以阿拉汉道切断魔罗的渴爱之流。已到达彼岸:就像大公牛到达河的对岸一样,到达了轮回的彼岸——涅槃。已至彼岸:那些已经越过恒河水流的三个部分而站住者,看见那些大公牛到达彼岸,就沿着它们走过的路走,也到达了彼岸。将到达彼岸:那些已经断除四道所应断烦恼的三部分而安住的人,现在将以阿拉汉道切断剩余的渴爱之流,就像强壮的牛到达河的对岸一样,将到达轮回的彼岸——涅槃。按照这个方式,在每一句中都应该这样理解。法随行者和信随行者,这两类人是具足第一道的人。巴利
352.Mārassasotaṃ chetvāti arahattamaggena mārassa taṇhāsotaṃ chetvā. Pāraṃ gatāti mahāusabhā nadīpāraṃ viya saṃsārapāraṃ nibbānaṃ gatā. Pāraṃ agamaṃsūti mahāusabhānaṃ pāraṅgatakkhaṇe gaṅgāya sotassa tayo koṭṭhāse atikkamma ṭhitā mahāusabhe pāraṃ patte disvā tesaṃ gatamaggaṃ paṭipajjitvā pāraṃ agamaṃsu. Pāraṃ gamissantīti catumaggavajjhānaṃ kilesānaṃ tayo koṭṭhāse khepetvā ṭhitā idāni arahattamaggena avasesaṃ taṇhāsotaṃ chetvā balavagāvo viya nadīpāraṃ saṃsārapāraṃ nibbānaṃ gamissantīti. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo. Dhammānusārino, saddhānusārinoti ime dve paṭhamamaggasamaṅgino.
“由知者”是指以了知一切法的佛陀来说的。“善开示”就是善巧地宣说。“已开启”就是已经打开。“甘露门”就是圣道,为了证得涅槃而打开。“已除去慢之竹”就是把我慢之竹除掉。“应希求安稳”意思是:应当以想要去做的欲愿之心希求阿拉汉果,应当生起“我要去做”的意愿,应当生起“我要成就”的意愿。也有写成“已得者”的读法,意思是:获得这样的导师后,你们就是所谓已得者。其余各处文义都很明白。世尊就是按照前后脉络,把开示结束的。巴利
Jānatāti sabbadhamme jānantena buddhena. Suppakāsitoti sukathito. Vivaṭanti vivaritaṃ. Amatadvāranti ariyamaggo. Nibbānapattiyāti tadatthāya vivaṭaṃ. Vinaḷīkatanti vigatamānanaḷaṃ kataṃ. Khemaṃ patthethāti kattukamyatāchandena arahattaṃ patthetha, kattukāmā nibbattetukāmā hothāti attho. ‘‘Patta’tthā’’tipi pāṭho. Evarūpaṃ satthāraṃ labhitvā tumhe pattāyeva nāmāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānameva. Bhagavā pana yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesīti.
5. 《小萨恰咖经》的注释巴利
5. Cūḷasaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
353 如是我闻这句,就是《小萨恰咖经》。其中大林重阁讲堂里,大林是指自然生长、没有人工栽种、有明确范围的大森林。但迦毗罗卫附近的那片大林,是和雪山连成一片、没有界限,一直延伸到大海的。这里说的并不是那一种,而是有范围的大森林,所以叫大林。重阁讲堂则应当理解为:在依大林而建的寺院中,以重阁为内含、覆盖着雁颈形瓦、具足一切庄严的世尊香室。巴利
353.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷasaccakasuttaṃ. Tattha mahāvane kūṭāgārasālāyanti mahāvanaṃ nāma sayaṃjātaṃ aropimaṃ saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vanaṃ. Kapilavatthusāmantā pana mahāvanaṃ himavantena saha ekābaddhaṃ aparicchedaṃ hutvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitaṃ. Idaṃ tādisaṃ na hoti. Saparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ vananti mahāvanaṃ. Kūṭāgārasālā pana mahāvanaṃ nissāya kate ārāme kūṭāgāraṃ antokatvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena katā sabbākārasampannā buddhassa bhagavato gandhakuṭi veditabbā.
萨恰咖尼甘塔布达:据说从前有一个尼干陀和一个尼干陀女,各自学了五百个论题,心想“我们要把对方驳倒”,就在赡部洲到处游历,后来在毗舍离碰上了。离车族的王族们看见他们,就问:“你是谁?”
“你又是谁?”尼干陀说:“我游历赡部洲,就是为了驳倒别人。”尼干陀女也这么回答。离车族人们说:“那你们就在这里互相辩论吧。”于是尼干陀女拿自己学过的五百论题来问,尼干陀一一作答;轮到尼干陀问的时候,尼干陀女也一一作答。结果谁也没赢,谁也没输,两人完全不相上下。离车族人们说:“你们俩水平一样,到处跑又能怎样?就住在这儿吧。”于是给了他们房子,还安排了供养。两人住在一起后,生了四个女儿:一个叫真实,一个叫贪爱,一个叫巴塔佳拉,一个叫具行。这几个女儿也都很聪明,把父母各自学的五百论题都学会了。她们长大后,对父母说:“咱们家族里,从来没有女儿家收了金银财宝就嫁到夫家去的。要是有在家人能驳倒她们的论说,她们就给他当奴婢;要是有出家人能驳倒,她们就跟着他出家。你们打算怎么办?”她们说:“我们也这么做。”于是四个女儿都换上出家人的装束,心想“这赡部洲是因赡部树而得名的”,就拿着赡部树枝出发游历。她们每到一个村子,就在村口堆起土堆或沙堆,插上赡部旗,说:“谁能驳倒论说,就来把它踩倒。”然后才进村。就这样一村一村地走,到了舍卫城,照样在城门口插上赡部旗,通知了聚集的人们,然后进了城。巴利
Saccakonigaṇṭhaputtoti pubbe kira eko nigaṇṭho ca nigaṇṭhī ca pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahetvā, vādaṃ āropessāmāti jambudīpe vicarantā vesāliyaṃ samāgatā. Licchavirājāno disvā, – ‘‘tvaṃ ko, tvaṃ kā’’ti pucchiṃsu. Nigaṇṭho – ‘‘ahaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmīti jambudīpe vicarāmī’’ti āha. Nigaṇṭhīpi tathā āha. Licchavino, ‘‘idheva aññamaññaṃ vādaṃ āropethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Nigaṇṭhī attanā uggahitāni pañcavādasatāni pucchi, nigaṇṭho kathesi. Nigaṇṭhena pucchitepi nigaṇṭhī kathesiyeva. Ekassapi na jayo, na parājayo, ubho samasamāva ahesuṃ. Licchavino, – ‘‘tumhe ubhopi samasamā āhiṇḍitvā kiṃ karissatha, idheva vasathā’’ti gehaṃ datvā baliṃ paṭṭhapesuṃ. Tesaṃ saṃvāsamanvāya catasso dhītaro jātā, – ekā saccā nāma, ekā lolā nāma, ekā paṭācārā nāma, ekā ācāravatī nāma. Tāpi paṇḍitāva ahesuṃ, mātāpitūhi uggahitāni pañca pañca vādasatāni uggahesuṃ. Tā vayapattā mātāpitaro avocuṃ – ‘‘amhākaṃ ammā kule dārikā nāma hiraññasuvaṇṇādīni datvā kulagharaṃ pesitapubbā nāma natthi. Yo pana agāriko tāsaṃ vādaṃ maddituṃ sakkoti, tassa pādaparicārikā honti. Yo pabbajito tāsaṃ maddituṃ sakkoti, tassa santike pabbajanti. Tumhe kiṃ karissathā’’ti? Mayampi evameva karissāmāti. Catassopi paribbājikavesaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘ayaṃ jambudīpo nāma jambuyā paññāyatī’’ti jambusākhaṃ gahetvā cārikaṃ pakkamiṃsu. Yaṃ gāmaṃ pāpuṇanti, tassa dvāre paṃsupuñje vā vālikapuñje vā jambudhajaṃ ṭhapetvā, – ‘‘yo vādaṃ āropetuṃ sakkoti, so imaṃ maddatū’’ti vatvā gāmaṃ pavisanti. Evaṃ gāmena gāmaṃ vicarantiyo sāvatthiṃ pāpuṇitvā tatheva gāmadvāre jambudhajaṃ ṭhapetvā sampattamanussānaṃ ārocetvā antonagaraṃ paviṭṭhā.
那时,世尊依止舍卫城,住在祇园精舍。当时,尊者舍利弗既要探望病人,又要照管无人看护的地方,加上自己的事务繁重,就比其他比丘更早进入村庄乞食。他在村口看见那面瞻部旗,便问孩子们:“这是什么?”孩子们把事情的缘由告诉了他。他说:“那就把它踩坏吧。”孩子们说:“尊者,我们不敢,我们害怕。”他说:“孩子们,别怕。如果有人问‘是谁让人踩坏了我们的瞻部旗’,你们就说‘是佛陀的弟子舍利弗长老让人踩坏的。想辩论的人,就到祇园精舍长老那里去。’”孩子们听了长老的话,就踩坏瞻部旗扔掉了。长老乞食完毕后,回到了精舍。女游行者们从村里出来,问道:“是谁让人踩坏了我们的旗?”孩子们把事情经过告诉了她们。女游行者们又进入村庄,一条街一条街地宣布:“听说佛陀有位叫舍利弗的弟子,要和我们辩论。想听的人,都出来吧!”于是大批民众涌了出来,跟着女游行者们一起前往祇园精舍。巴利
Tena samayena bhagavā sāvatthiṃ nissāya jetavane viharati. Athāyasmā sāriputto gilāne pucchanto ajaggitaṭṭhānaṃ jagganto attano kiccamahantatāya aññehi bhikkhūhi divātaraṃ gāmaṃ piṇḍāya pavisanto gāmadvāre jambudhajaṃ disvā, – ‘‘kimida’’nti dārake pucchi. Te tamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Tena hi maddathāti. Na sakkoma, bhante, bhāyāmāti. ‘‘Kumārā mā bhāyatha, ‘kena amhākaṃ jambudhajo maddāpito’ti vutte, buddhasāvakena sāriputtattherena maddāpito, vādaṃ āropetukāmā jetavane therassa santikaṃ gacchathāti vadeyyāthā’’ti āha. Te therassa vacanaṃ sutvā jambudhajaṃ madditvā chaḍḍesuṃ. Thero piṇḍāya caritvā vihāraṃ gato. Paribbājikāpi gāmato nikkhamitvā, ‘‘amhākaṃ dhajo kena maddāpito’’ti pucchiṃsu. Dārakā tamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Paribbājikā puna gāmaṃ pavisitvā ekekaṃ vīthiṃ gahetvā, – ‘‘buddhasāvako kira sāriputto nāma amhehi saddhiṃ vādaṃ karissati, sotukāmā nikkhamathā’’ti ārocesuṃ. Mahājano nikkhami, tena saddhiṃ paribbājikā jetavanaṃ agamiṃsu.
长老心想:“女人来到我们住的地方,实在不方便。”于是他就坐在寺院中央。女游行者们来了以后,问长老:“是您让人打破了我们的旗吗?”长老说:“是的,是我让人打破的。”她们说:“我们要和您辩论。”长老说:“好啊,那就来吧。谁来问,谁来答呢?”长老又说:“按理该由你们问,不过你们是女人,就请你们先问吧。”她们四个人分别站在四个方向,把从父母那里学来的一千个论题都提了出来。长老就像用剑切断睡莲的茎一样,对每一个问题都一一剖析得清清楚楚、毫无纠结地作了回答。说完之后,又说:“请再问吧。”她们说:“尊者,我们就知道这么多而已。”长老说:“你们问了我一千个问题,我都回答了。现在我只问你们一个问题,请你们来说说看。”她们看出长老的境界,不敢说“尊者请问,我们来回答”,只是反复说:“尊者,请说吧,我们知道的话就回答。”巴利
Thero – ‘‘amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne mātugāmassa āgamanaṃ nāma aphāsuka’’nti vihāramajjhe nisīdi. Paribbājikāyo gantvā theraṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘tumhehi amhākaṃ dhajo maddāpito’’ti? Āma, mayā maddāpitoti. Mayaṃ tumhehi saddhiṃ vādaṃ karissāmāti. Sādhu karotha, kassa pucchā kassa vissajjanaṃ hotūti? Pucchā nāma amhākaṃ pattā, tumhe pana mātugāmā nāma paṭhamaṃ pucchathāti āha. Tā catassopi catūsu disāsu ṭhatvā mātāpitūnaṃ santike uggahitaṃ vādasahassaṃ pucchiṃsu. Thero khaggena kumudanāḷaṃ chindanto viya pucchitaṃ pucchitaṃ nijjaṭaṃ niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā kathesi, kathetvā puna pucchathāti āha. Ettakameva, bhante, mayaṃ jānāmāti. Thero āha – ‘‘tumhehi vādasahassaṃ pucchitaṃ mayā kathitaṃ, ahaṃ pana ekaṃ yeva pañhaṃ pucchissāmi, taṃ tumhe kathethā’’ti. Tā therassa visayaṃ disvā, ‘‘pucchatha, bhante, byākarissāmā’’ti vattuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. ‘‘Vada, bhante, jānamānā byākarissāmā’’ti puna āhaṃsu.
长老又说:“对于善男子,出家后首先应该教他什么问题呢?”接着问道:“所谓的‘一’是什么?”她们既找不到头,也看不到边。长老说:“你们说说看。”她们回答:“尊者,我们看不出来。”长老说:“你们问了我一千个问题,我都作了解答,我只问你们一个问题,你们却答不出来。这样的话,谁赢谁输?”她们说:“尊者,是您赢,我们输。”长老问:“那现在你们打算怎么办?”她们把父母说过的话告诉长老,然后说:“我们想在您这里出家。”长老说:“你们是女人,不适合在我这里出家。不过你们可以接受我的教导,然后去比丘尼僧团那里出家。”她们说:“好。”于是接受了长老的教导,去到比丘尼僧团那里出家。出家之后,她们不放逸,精勤努力,不久就证得了阿拉汉果。巴利
Thero ayaṃ pana kulaputte pabbājetvā paṭhamaṃ sikkhāpetabbapañhoti vatvā, – ‘‘ekaṃ nāma ki’’nti pucchi. Tā neva antaṃ, na koṭiṃ addasaṃsu. Thero kathethāti āha. Na passāma, bhanteti. Tumhehi vādasahassaṃ pucchitaṃ mayā kathitaṃ, mayhaṃ tumhe ekaṃ pañhampi kathetuṃ na sakkotha, evaṃ sante kassa jayo kassa parājayoti? Tumhākaṃ, bhante, jayo, amhākaṃ parājayoti. Idāni kiṃ karissathāti? Tā mātāpitūhi vuttavacanaṃ ārocetvā, ‘‘tumhākaṃ santike pabbajissāmā’’ti āhaṃsu. Tumhe mātugāmā nāma amhākaṃ santike pabbajituṃ na vaṭṭati, amhākaṃ pana sāsanaṃ gahetvā bhikkhuniupassayaṃ gantvā pabbajathāti. Tā sādhūti therassa sāsanaṃ gahetvā bhikkhunisaṅghassa santikaṃ gantvā pabbajiṃsu. Pabbajitā ca pana appamattā ātāpiniyo hutvā nacirasseva arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu.
这位萨恰咖是她们四姐妹的弟弟。他的智慧胜过四位姐姐,从父母那里学了一千种论题,又学了更多外道的教义。他没有去别处,就在毗舍离教授王子们的技艺。因为智慧太过充盈,他害怕肚子会裂开,就用铁板裹住腹部行走。就是针对他,才说“萨恰咖尼甘塔布达”。巴利
Ayaṃ saccako tāsaṃ catunnampi kaniṭṭhabhātiko. Tāhi catūhipi uttaritarapañño, mātāpitūnampi santikā vādasahassaṃ, tato bahutarañca bāhirasamayaṃ uggahetvā katthaci agantvā rājadārake sippaṃ sikkhāpento tattheva vesāliyaṃ vasati, paññāya atipūritattā kucchi me bhijjeyyāti bhīto ayapaṭṭena kucchiṃ parikkhipitvā carati, imaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘saccako nigaṇṭhaputto’’ti.
谈论者:所谓“谈论”,就是指说话的方式;他宣说、讲述,所以叫“谈论者”。自称智者:就是宣称“我是智者”这样的说法。众人所敬信:凡是他根据星宿运行所预言的事,大多数都确实应验,因此大众都认为他是获得吉祥的善人。以论破论:就是通过说话的方式,把过失推到对方身上。具寿阿萨吉:是舍利弗长老的老师阿萨吉长老。正在经行往来:指他为了从离车诸王家宅的这家到那家,而这样来回经行。他到具寿阿萨吉那里去:为什么去?为了了解适当的时机。巴利
Bhassappavādakoti bhassaṃ vuccati kathāmaggo, taṃ pavadati kathetīti bhassappavādako. Paṇḍitavādoti ahaṃ paṇḍitoti evaṃ vādo. Sādhusammato bahujanassāti yaṃ yaṃ nakkhattacārena ādisati, taṃ taṃ yebhuyyena tatheva hoti, tasmā ayaṃ sādhuladdhiko bhaddakoti evaṃ sammato mahājanassa. Vādena vādaṃ samāraddhoti kathāmaggena dosaṃ āropito. Āyasmā assajīti sāriputtattherassa ācariyo assajitthero. Jaṅghāvihāraṃ anucaṅkamamānoti tato tato licchavirājagehato taṃ taṃ gehaṃ gamanatthāya anucaṅkamamāno. Yenāyasmā assaji tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Samayajānanatthaṃ.
据说他心里这样想:我到处游走,是想驳倒沙门乔达摩的论说,可是因为不知道他的宗义,一直没能驳倒。只有了解了对方的宗义再提出反驳,才算是真正善巧地驳倒对方。这位看起来是沙门乔达摩的弟子阿萨吉长老,他对自己老师的宗义一定很精通。我先问他,把自己的论旨立稳,然后再去驳倒沙门乔达摩。于是他走上前去。他问的是“教导”——也就是“你怎么教导、怎么训练人?”长老心里想:如果直接说“苦”,就会给对方留下攻击的把柄;道和果在某种意义上也可以说是苦;而这个人如果听到“苦”,就会反问长老:“阿萨吉贤者,你们是为了什么出家的?”如果回答“为了道果”,他就可以指责说:“阿萨吉贤者,你们这套教法可算不上什么好教法,简直像大屠场,是通向地狱的,你们根本没有快乐的指望,只是不停地折磨自己,让苦一天天成熟,到处游荡罢了。”所以,面对来辩论的外道,不应该用间接委婉的说法,而要直截了当,让对方找不到立足点。这样想过之后,长老就只从无常、无我的角度来开示,说“诸比丘,色是无常的”。“恶闻”的意思是:这不适合听闻。巴利
Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ ‘samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’ti āhiṇḍāmi, ‘samayaṃ panassa na jānāmī’ti na āropesiṃ. Parassa hi samayaṃ ñatvā āropito vādo svāropito nāma hoti. Ayaṃ pana samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako paññāyati assajitthero ; so attano satthu samaye kovido, etāhaṃ pucchitvā kathaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti. Tasmā upasaṅkami. Vinetīti kathaṃ vineti, kathaṃ sikkhāpetīti pucchati. Thero pana yasmā dukkhanti vutte upārambhassa okāso hoti, maggaphalānipi pariyāyena dukkhanti āgatāni, ayañca dukkhanti vutte theraṃ puccheyya – ‘‘bho assaji, kimatthaṃ tumhe pabbajitā’’ti. Tato ‘‘maggaphalatthāyā’’ti vutte, – ‘‘nayidaṃ, bho assaji, tumhākaṃ sāsanaṃ nāma, mahāāghātanaṃ nāmetaṃ, nirayussado nāmesa, natthi tumhākaṃ sukhāsā, uṭṭhāyuṭṭhāya dukkhameva jirāpentā āhiṇḍathā’’ti dosaṃ āropeyya, tasmā paravādissa pariyāyakathaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Yathā esa appatiṭṭho hoti, evamassa nippariyāyakathaṃ kathessāmīti cintetvā, ‘‘rūpaṃ, bhikkhave, anicca’’nti imaṃ aniccānattavaseneva kathaṃ katheti. Dussutanti sotuṃ ayuttaṃ.
354 集会堂,就是王族用来宣说教令的集会大厅。他到那些离车族人那里去:据说他心里这样想:“我以前因为不了解时机,没能驳倒沙门乔达摩的论点。现在从他大弟子的话里知道了时机,而且我的五百个离车族弟子也聚集在一起了。我要和他们一起去,驳倒沙门乔达摩的论点。”因此他就去了。以某位著名者:就是在那些有名望、为人熟知的五群比丘长老中,随取其中一位。安立:按照他所安立的那样。他想:如果就这样安立,而他又说出别的什么来,那时我又能怎么办?于是现在就转身背向而说。拉过来:向自己的方向拉过来。推过去:向前推开。来回拖拽:时而拉过来,时而推过去。酒肆的草席:就是酒馆里的草垫。酒馆恶人:就是酒徒。抓住袋耳:为了清洗滤酒袋、去掉渣滓,就抓住两边的袋耳。向下甩:面朝下甩。向上甩:面朝上甩。反复拍打:一再地拍打。所谓麻洗游戏:在这里,人们为了做麻布衣,取来麻皮,扎成一把一把的,放进水里。到第三天,麻把已经充分泡透了。然后人们带上酸粥、酒之类的东西来到那里,抓起麻把,在三块板上——右边一块、左边一块、前面一块——时而拍打右边板,时而拍打左边板,时而拍打前面板,一边吃着、喝着、嚼着酸粥和酒之类的东西,一边洗。场面很热闹。国王的大象看到这场游戏,便潜入深水中,用鼻子吸水,时而喷进前额,时而喷在自己背上,时而喷在两侧,时而喷在两腿之间,这样玩耍。从此以后,这种游戏就叫做麻洗游戏。这里所说的“玩麻洗游戏”就是指这个。那位萨恰咖·尼乾子之子,究竟是以什么身份来驳斥世尊的论点呢?那位萨恰咖·尼乾子之子要驳斥世尊的论点,他究竟是以什么身份?是以夜叉的身份,还是以帝释天神的身份,或者以梵天神的身份来驳斥世尊的论点?因为一个普通人根本不可能驳倒世尊的论点——这就是这里的意趣。巴利
354.Santhāgāreti rājakulānaṃ atthānusāsanasanthāgārasālāyaṃ. Yena te licchavī tenupasaṅkamīti evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ahaṃ pubbe samayaṃ ajānanabhāvena samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ na āropesiṃ, idāni panassa mahāsāvakena kathitaṃ samayaṃ jānāmi, ime ca mama antevāsikā pañcasatā licchavī sannipatitā. Etehi saddhiṃ gantvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ āropessāmī’’ti tasmā upasaṅkami. Ñātaññatarenāti ñātesu abhiññātesu pañcavaggiyattheresu aññatarena. Patiṭṭhitanti yathā tena patiṭṭhitaṃ. Sace evaṃ patiṭṭhissati, atha pana aññadeva vakkhati, tatra mayā kiṃ sakkā kātunti idāneva piṭṭhiṃ parivattento āha. Ākaḍḍheyyāti attano abhimukhaṃ kaḍḍheyya. Parikaḍḍheyyāti purato paṭipaṇāmeyya. Samparikaḍḍheyyāti kālena ākaḍḍheyya, kālena parikaḍḍheyya. Soṇḍikākilañjanti surāghare piṭṭhakilañjaṃ. Soṇḍikādhuttoti surādhutto. Vālaṃ kaṇṇe gahetvāti surāparissāvanatthavikaṃ dhovitukāmo kasaṭanidhunanatthaṃ ubhosu kaṇṇesu gahetvā. Odhuneyyāti adhomukhaṃ katvā dhuneyya. Niddhuneyyāti uddhaṃmukhaṃ katvā dhuneyya. Nipphoṭeyyāti punappunaṃ papphoṭeyya. Sāṇadhovikaṃ nāmāti ettha manussā sāṇasāṭakakaraṇatthaṃ sāṇavāke gahetvā muṭṭhiṃ muṭṭhiṃ bandhitvā udake pakkhipanti. Te tatiyadivase suṭṭhu kilinnā honti. Atha manussā ambilayāgusurādīni ādāya tattha gantvā sāṇamuṭṭhiṃ gahetvā, dakkhiṇato vāmato sammukhā cāti tīsu phalakesu sakiṃ dakkhiṇaphalake, sakiṃ vāmaphalake, sakiṃ sammukhaphalake paharantā ambilayāgusurādīni bhuñjantā pivantā khādantā dhovanti. Mahantā kīḷā hoti. Rañño nāgo taṃ kīḷaṃ disvā gambhīraṃ udakaṃ anupavisitvā soṇḍāya udakaṃ gahetvā sakiṃ kumbhe sakiṃ piṭṭhiyaṃ sakiṃ ubhosu passesu sakiṃ antarasatthiyaṃ pakkhipanto kīḷittha. Tadupādāya taṃ kīḷitajātaṃ sāṇadhovikaṃ nāma vuccati , taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāṇadhovikaṃ nāma kīḷitajātaṃ kīḷatī’’ti. Kiṃ so bhavamāno saccako nigaṇṭhaputto, yo bhagavato vādaṃ āropessatīti yo saccako nigaṇṭhaputto bhagavato vādaṃ āropessati, so kiṃ bhavamāno kiṃ yakkho bhavamāno udāhu indo, udāhu brahmā bhavamāno bhagavato vādaṃ āropessati? Na hi sakkā pakatimanussena bhagavato vādaṃ āropetunti ayamettha adhippāyo.
355 “那时”说的是萨恰咖进入僧园的那个时候。那他是在什么时候进去的呢?正午时分。可他们为什么偏偏在那个时间经行呢?是为了消除吃了精美食物的缘故而生起的昏沉和睡眠。或者,他们本来就是白天精勤修行的人。像这样的人,午后经行、沐浴,让身体适应气候,然后坐下来修习沙门法,心就能专一。所谓“到那些比丘那里”:据说他到处打听“沙门乔达摩在哪里?”,从一个院落走到另一个院落,问来问去,想进去见他。他看见那些穿粪扫衣的比丘,像森林里的大象一样在经行处走来走去,就朝他们走过去。就是针对这个情形,才说“到那些比丘那里”等等。“在哪里,尊者?”意思是“在哪一处住所或哪个厅堂?”
“阿吉韦萨那,那位就是世尊。”据说那时,世尊在清晨入大悲定,把一切知智之网遍满一万个世界,观察应当受教化的众生,看见:“明天萨恰咖·尼乾陀子会带着一大群离车族人前来,想要驳倒我的主张。”所以他一大早就料理好身体,由比丘僧团围绕,进入毗舍离城乞食。乞食回来,心想:“我该到一个方便大众就坐的舒适地方坐下。”于是没有进香室,而是来到大森林中,在某棵树下作白天的安坐。那些比丘对世尊尽了义务后回来,被萨恰咖一问,就指着远处坐着的世尊说:“阿吉韦萨那,那位就是世尊。”巴利
355.Tena kho pana samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye saccako ārāmaṃ pāvisi, tasmiṃ. Kismiṃ pana samaye pāvisīti? Mahāmajjhanhikasamaye. Kasmā pana tasmiṃ samaye caṅkamantīti? Paṇītabhojanapaccayassa thinamiddhassa vinodanatthaṃ. Divāpadhānikā vā te. Tādisānañhi pacchābhattaṃ caṅkamitvā nhatvā sarīraṃ utuṃ gaṇhāpetvā nisajja samaṇadhammaṃ karontānaṃ cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Yena te bhikkhūti so kira kuhiṃ samaṇo gotamoti pariveṇato pariveṇaṃ gantvā pucchitvā pavisissāmīti vilokento araññe hatthī viya caṅkame caṅkamamāne paṃsukūlikabhikkhū disvā tesaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘yena te bhikkhū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kahaṃnu kho, bhoti katarasmiṃ āvāse vā maṇḍape vāti attho. Esa, aggivessana, bhagavāti tadā kira bhagavā paccūsakāle mahākaruṇā samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā dasasahassacakkavāḷe sabbaññutaññāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā bodhaneyyasattaṃ olokento addasa – ‘‘sve saccako nigaṇṭhaputto mahatiṃ licchaviparisaṃ gahetvā mama vādaṃ āropetukāmo āgamissatī’’ti. Tasmā pātova sarīrapaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro vesāliyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto mahāparisāya nisīdituṃ sukhaṭṭhāne nisīdissāmīti gandhakuṭiṃ apavisitvā mahāvane aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdi. Te bhikkhū bhagavato vattaṃ dassetvā āgatā, saccakena puṭṭhā dūre nisinnaṃ bhagavantaṃ dassentā, ‘‘esa aggivessana bhagavā’’ti āhaṃsu.
“与庞大的离车族大众一起”:这就是下面所说的“被大约五百位离车族青年围绕着”。这些人正是他的弟子。不过,在毗舍离城里,萨恰咖带了大约五百位离车王族,众人听说“他是为了辩论才去见世尊的”,都想“我们要听两位智者的对话”,于是大多数人就都出来了,因此那人群变得极其庞大,数量无法计算。这段话就是针对这个情况说的。“合掌致敬之后”:这些人是两边倒的,他们心里这样想:“如果邪见者来质问我们:‘你们为什么礼敬沙门乔达摩?’我们就回答:‘只是合掌一下,怎么就算礼敬了?’如果正见者来质问我们:‘你们为什么不礼敬世尊?’我们就回答:‘难道非得用头撞地才算礼敬吗?合掌本身不就是礼敬吗?’”“名与姓”:有人来通报名字说:“乔达摩尊者,我是某某人的儿子,名叫达多,名叫密多,我到这里来了。”这就是在通报名字。有人通报姓氏说:“乔达摩尊者,我是瓦西塔,我是迦旃延,我到这里来了。”这就是在通报姓氏。据说这些都是贫穷衰败人家的子弟,他们想在众人中间靠名字和姓氏让自己显眼,才这么做的。至于那些默默坐着的人,则是狡诈者和愚痴者。其中的狡诈者心想:“跟人说上一两句话就会变得熟络,一旦熟络了,不给一两钵饭就说不过去。”为了免掉这个负担,他们就默默坐着。愚痴者则因为无知,就像被扔掉的泥团一样,随便往哪儿一坐,默默不出声。巴利
Mahatiyā licchaviparisāya saddhinti heṭṭhā pañcamattehi licchavisatehi parivutoti vuttaṃ. Te etassa antevāsikāyeva, antovesāliyaṃ pana saccako pañcamattāni licchavirājasatāni gahetvā, ‘‘vādatthiko bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamanto’’ti sutvā dvinnaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ sossāmāti yebhuyyena manussā nikkhantā, evaṃ sā parisā mahatī aparicchinnagaṇanā ahosi. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Añjaliṃ paṇāmetvāti ete ubhatopakkhikā, te evaṃ cintesuṃ – ‘‘sace no micchādiṭṭhikā codessanti, ‘kasmā tumhe samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vanditthā’ti, tesaṃ, ‘kiṃ añjalimattakaraṇenapi vanditaṃ hotī’ti vakkhāma. Sace no sammādiṭṭhikā codessanti, ‘kasmā bhagavantaṃ na vanditthā’ti, ‘kiṃ sīsena bhūmiṃ paharanteneva vanditaṃ hoti, nanu añjalikammampi vandanā evā’ti vakkhāmā’’ti. Nāma gottanti, bho gotama, ahaṃ asukassa putto datto nāma mitto nāma idha āgatoti vadantā nāmaṃ sāventi nāma. Bho gotama, ahaṃ vāsiṭṭho nāma kaccāno nāma idha āgatoti vadantā gottaṃ sāventi nāma. Ete kira daliddā jiṇṇakulaputtā parisamajjhe nāmagottavasena pākaṭā bhavissāmāti evaṃ akaṃsu. Ye pana tuṇhībhūtā nisīdiṃsu, te kerāṭikā ceva andhabālā ca. Tattha kerāṭikā, ‘‘ekaṃ dve kathāsallāpe karonto vissāsiko hoti, atha vissāse sati ekaṃ dve bhikkhā adātuṃ na yutta’’nti tato attānaṃ mocentā tuṇhī nisīdanti. Andhabālā aññāṇatāyeva avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍo viya yattha katthaci tuṇhībhūtā nisīdanti.
356 萨遮迦只是稍微让出一点余地,给出一点理由,于是世尊为了激起他提问的勇气,说道:“阿吉韦萨那,你想问什么就问吧。”这句话的意思是:“你想问就问,我解答问题没有任何负担。”或者也可以理解为:“你想问什么就问,我会为你解答一切。”世尊就这样作了一个只有佛陀才能给出的“一切知者之邀请”,这是独觉佛、上首弟子和大弟子们所不具备的。因为他们不会说“你想问什么就问”,而是说“我们听了之后就会明白”。但诸佛则会说:“贤友,你想问什么就问吧。”或者说:“大王,你想问什么就问吧。”巴利
356.Kiñcideva desanti kañci okāsaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ, athassa bhagavā pañhapucchane ussāhaṃ janento āha – puccha, aggivessana, yadākaṅkhasīti. Tassattho – ‘‘puccha yadi ākaṅkhasi, na me pañhavissajjane bhāro atthi’’. Atha vā ‘‘puccha yaṃ ākaṅkhasi, sabbaṃ te vissajjessāmī’’ti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi asādhāraṇaṃ paccekabuddhaaggasāvamahāsāvakehi. Te hi yadākaṅkhasīti na vadanti, sutvā vedissāmāti vadanti. Buddhā pana ‘‘pucchāvuso, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.237) vā, ‘‘puccha, mahārāja, yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.162) vā,
帝释天神,你想问什么就问吧,无论你心里想问哪个问题。
无论你问哪个问题,我都为你把它彻底解决。巴利
‘‘Puccha vāsava maṃ pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ iti. (dī. ni. 2.356) vā,
那就这样,比丘,你坐在自己的座位上,想问什么就问吧。巴利
‘‘Tena hi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sake āsane nisīditvā puccha yadākaṅkhasī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.85) vā,
巴瓦利的、你的,或所有人的一切疑惑,
你们已经得到机会,心里有什么疑问就问吧。
萨比亚,你心里想问什么,就问我吧。
我会对你提出的每一个问题都给出最终答案。巴利
‘‘Bāvarissa ca tuyhaṃ vā, sabbesaṃ sabbasaṃsayaṃ; Katāvakāsā pucchavho, yaṃ kiñci manasicchathā’’ti. (su. ni. 1036) vā, ‘‘Puccha maṃ sabhiya pañhaṃ, yaṃ kiñci manasicchasi; Tassa tasseva pañhassa, ahaṃ antaṃ karomi te’’ iti. (su. ni. 517) vā –
他们向那些夜叉、人王、天神、沙门、婆罗门、游方者发出全知者的邀请。世尊证得佛地之后发出这样的邀请,这并不稀奇。即便还处在菩萨阶段、安住于部分智的人……巴利
Tesaṃ tesaṃ yakkhanarindadevasamaṇabrāhmaṇaparibbājakānaṃ sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavārenti. Anacchariyañcetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavā buddhabhūmiṃ patvā etaṃ pavāraṇaṃ pavāreyya. Yo bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ padesañāṇepi ṭhito
“ 孔丹尼亚,请你把这些问题解答清楚。
那些相貌端正的仙人们向你恳求;
孔丹尼亚,这就是人间之法。
凡是落到老人身上的,这就是重担。”巴利
‘‘Koṇḍañña pañhāni viyākarohi, Yācanti taṃ isayo sādhurūpā; Koṇḍañña eso manujesu dhammo, Yaṃ vuddhamāgacchati esa bhāro’’ti. (jā. 2.17.60) –
就这样,为了帝释天神等(天众)的利益,仙人们向他祈请。巴利
Evaṃ sakkādīnaṃ atthāya isīhi yācito
“ 尊敬的诸位,你们已得机会,请问吧。
无论心里想要问什么问题,
我会亲自为你们一一解答。
自己亲自了知了这个世界和另一个世界。”巴利
‘‘Katāvakāsā pucchantu bhonto, Yaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ manasābhipatthitaṃ; Ahañhi taṃ taṃ vo viyākarissaṃ, Ñatvā sayaṃ lokamimaṃ parañcā’’ti. (jā. 2.17.61);
就这样,在萨拉班嘎时代和桑跋瓦本生中,他三次游遍整个赡部洲,也没找到能解答问题的人。过了很久,一位婆罗门来问他问题,得到允许后,当时才七岁的孩子正在街上玩泥巴,便盘腿结跏趺坐,就那样坐在路中间——巴利
Evaṃ sarabhaṅgakāle, sambhavajātake ca sakalajambudīpaṃ tikkhattuṃ vicaritvā pañhānaṃ antakaraṃ adisvā suciratena brāhmaṇena pañhaṃ puṭṭho okāse kārite, jātiyā sattavasso rathikāyaṃ paṃsuṃ kīḷanto pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā antaravīthiyaṃ nisinnova –
“ 我确实要为你讲说,就像善巧之人那样;
国王确实知道那件事,他是否会去做还是不去做。”巴利
‘‘Taggha te ahamakkhissaṃ, yathāpi kusalo tathā; Rājā ca kho taṃ jānāti, yadi kāhati vā na vā’’ti. (jā. 1.16.172) –
他发出了“一切知者”的邀请。巴利
Sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi.
世尊这样发出一切知者的邀请之后,他满心欢喜地提问,说道:“那么,乔达摩贤者,如何……”等等。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavatā sabbaññupavāraṇāya pavāritāya attamano pañhaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bho gotamā’’tiādimāha.
这时,世尊心想:“你们看,贤者们,弟子说的是一套,导师说的又是另一套。我不是早就说过了吗:‘如果他按照弟子所确立的方式来立论,我就会把论争指向他。’可是现在他说的完全不一样,对此我还能怎么办呢?”世尊为了让尼干陀没有插话的机会,就按照先前阿萨吉长老所说的方式来说,于是说道:“阿吉韦萨那,我是这样……”等等。
尼干陀说:“乔达摩尊者,我想到一个譬喻。”意思是说:“乔达摩尊者,我心中浮现出一个譬喻,我把它提出来。”世尊说:“阿吉韦萨那,那就让你的譬喻浮现出来吧!阿吉韦萨那,让它浮现出来吧!放心说出你的譬喻。”
“需要靠力气做的事”,是指靠臂力来做的农耕、经商之类的工作。“以色为自我的人”,是指执取“色就是我”而安住的人。“立足于色”,是指立足于那个被执取为“我”的色。“产生福或非福”,就是获得善或不善。对受等其余诸蕴,也是同样的解释。
这说明了什么呢?这五蕴就像大地一样,是这些众生的立足处;众生依止这五蕴,造作善业和不善业。你们明明有“我”存在,却否定它,宣称五蕴无我——他这样提出譬喻,是极有道理的。
而且,这位尼干陀所提出的譬喻是决定性的,除了全知的佛陀之外,确实没有别人能切断他的论说并指出其中的过失。因为人有两种:一种是由佛陀调伏的,一种是由弟子调伏的。对于应由弟子调伏的人,弟子和佛陀都能调伏;但对于应由佛陀调伏的人,弟子们无法调伏,只有佛陀才能调伏。这位尼干陀也是应由佛陀调伏的,所以除了佛陀之外,没有人能切断他的论说并指出过失。因此,世尊为了亲自指出他论说中的过失,便说道:“阿吉韦萨那,难道你不是……”等等。巴利
Athassa bhagavā, ‘‘passatha, bho, aññaṃ sāvakena kathitaṃ, aññaṃ satthā katheti, nanu mayā paṭikacceva vuttaṃ, ‘sace tathā patiṭṭhissati, yathāssa sāvakena patiṭṭhitaṃ, evāhaṃ vādaṃ āropessāmī’ti. Ayaṃ pana aññameva katheti, tattha kiṃ mayā sakkā kātu’’nti evaṃ nigaṇṭhassa vacanokāso mā hotūti heṭṭhā assajittherena kathitaniyāmeneva kathento, evaṃ kho ahaṃ, aggivessanātiādimāha. Upamā maṃ, bho gotama, paṭibhātīti, bho gotama, mayhaṃ ekā upamā upaṭṭhāti, āharāmi taṃ upamanti vadati. Paṭibhātu taṃ, aggivessanāti upaṭṭhātu te, aggivessana, āhara taṃ upamaṃ visatthoti bhagavā avoca. Balakaraṇīyāti bāhubalena kattabbā kasivāṇijjādikā kammantā. Rūpattāyaṃ purisapuggaloti rūpaṃ attā assāti rūpattā, rūpaṃ attāti gahetvā ṭhitapuggalaṃ dīpeti. Rūpe patiṭṭhāyāti tasmiṃ attāti gahitarūpe patiṭṭhahitvā. Puññaṃ vā apuññaṃ vā pasavatīti kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā paṭilabhati. Vedanattādīsupi eseva nayo. Iminā kiṃ dīpeti? Ime pañcakkhandhā imesaṃ sattānaṃ pathavī viya patiṭṭhā, te imesu pañcasu khandhesu patiṭṭhāya kusalākusalakammaṃ nāma āyūhanti. Tumhe evarūpaṃ vijjamānameva attānaṃ paṭisedhento pañcakkhandhā anattāti dīpethāti ativiya sakāraṇaṃ katvā upamaṃ āhari. Iminā ca nigaṇṭhena āhaṭaopammaṃ niyatameva , sabbaññubuddhato añño tassa kathaṃ chinditvā vāde dosaṃ dātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Duvidhā hi puggalā buddhaveneyyā ca sāvakaveneyyā ca. Sāvakaveneyye sāvakāpi vinenti buddhāpi. Buddhaveneyye pana sāvakā vinetuṃ na sakkonti, buddhāva vinenti. Ayampi nigaṇṭho buddhaveneyyo, tasmā etassa vādaṃ chinditvā añño dosaṃ dātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Tenassa bhagavā sayameva vāde dosadassanatthaṃ nanu tvaṃ, aggivessanātiādimāha.
这时,尼干陀心想:“沙门乔达摩这是在极力把我的论点锁定下来。如果以后出了什么漏洞,他只会驳倒我一个人。不如我把这个论点推到大众头上去。”于是他说:“乔达摩贤者,我也这样说:色是我……识是我,而且这一大群人也这么认为。”可是,世尊在论辩上比尼干陀殊胜百倍、千倍、十万倍,所以世尊心想:“这个尼干陀想让自己脱身,把论点扣到大众头上。我不会让他脱身。我要把矛头从大众那里收回来,只驳倒他一个人。”于是世尊对他说:“阿吉韦萨那,那又有什么用呢?”等等。这话的意思是:“这群人不是来向我提出论点的,是你一个人跑遍整个毗舍离,来向我提出论点。所以你自己去解决自己的论点吧,不要把它推到大众头上。”尼干陀承认说:“乔达摩贤者,确实是我……”等等。巴利
Atha nigaṇṭho cintesi – ‘‘ativiya samaṇo gotamo mama vādaṃ patiṭṭhapeti, sace upari koci doso bhavissati, mamaṃ ekakaṃyeva niggaṇhissati. Handāhaṃ imaṃ vādaṃ mahājanassāpi matthake pakkhipāmī’’ti, tasmā evamāha – ahampi, bho gotama, evaṃ vadāmi rūpaṃ me attā…pe… viññāṇaṃ me attāti, ayañca mahatī janatāti. Bhagavā pana nigaṇṭhato sataguṇenapi sahassaguṇenapi satasahassaguṇenapi vādīvarataro, tasmā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ nigaṇṭho attānaṃ mocetvā mahājanassa matthake vādaṃ pakkhipati, nāssa attānaṃ mocetuṃ dassāmi, mahājanato nivattetvā ekakaṃyeva naṃ niggaṇhissāmī’’ti. Atha naṃ kiñhi te, aggivessanātiādimāha. Tassattho – nāyaṃ janatā mama vādaṃ āropetuṃ āgatā, tvaṃyeva sakalaṃ vesāliṃ saṃvaṭṭitvā mama vādaṃ āropetuṃ āgato, tasmā tvaṃ sakameva vādaṃ niveṭhehi, mā mahājanassa matthake pakkhipasīti. So paṭijānanto ahañhi, bho gotamātiādimāha.
357 世尊就这样先确立了尼干陀的主张,然后开口问道:“那么,阿吉韦萨那……”这里“那么”是表示原因的虚词,意思是:因为你承认五蕴就是我,所以我才这样问。“在自己统辖的领土内”,就是在自己治理的国境之内。“该杀的就杀,或教人杀”,是指对罪该处死、应当被杀的人,加以杀害或命人杀害。“该罚没财产的就罚没,或教人罚没”,是指对罪该没收财产、应当被罚没的人,没收其财产、令他倾家荡产。“该驱逐的就驱逐,或教人驱逐”,是指对应当从本国驱逐出境、应予流放的人,加以驱逐、把他赶走。“他也确实有权这样施行”,是说他的确正在这样施行,并且有权这样做,这是在表明他拥有这种权力。就这样,尼干陀像个愚人一样,为了摧毁自己的主张,反而把对方递来的论据加以发挥,就好像为了杀死自己而把刀磨得更锋利一样。“愿我的色是这样”:愿我的色成为这样,即端正、美丽、装饰完备,犹如金制的门楼,又像精心布置的彩绘,令人看了欢喜。“愿我的色不要是这样”:愿我的色不要成为这样,即丑陋、形貌不佳,布满皱纹、白发,斑点杂陈。巴利
357. Iti bhagavā nigaṇṭhassa vādaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā, tena hi, aggivessanāti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tattha tena hīti kāraṇatthe nipāto. Yasmā tvaṃ pañcakkhandhe attato paṭijānāsi, tasmāti attho. Sakasmiṃ vijiteti attano raṭṭhe. Ghātetāyaṃ vā ghātetunti ghātārahaṃ ghātetabbayuttakaṃ ghātetuṃ . Jāpetāyaṃ vā jāpetunti dhanajānirahaṃ jāpetabbayuttaṃ jāpetuṃ jiṇṇadhanaṃ kātuṃ. Pabbājetāyaṃ vā pabbājetunti sakaraṭṭhato pabbājanārahaṃ pabbājetuṃ, nīharituṃ. Vattituñca arahatīti vattati ceva vattituñca arahati. Vattituṃ yuttoti dīpeti. Iti nigaṇṭho attano vādabhedanatthaṃ āhaṭakāraṇameva attano māraṇatthāya āvudhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ karonto viya visesetvā dīpeti, yathā taṃ bālo. Evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotūti mama rūpaṃ evaṃvidhaṃ hotu, pāsādikaṃ abhirūpaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya susajjitacittapaṭo viya ca manāpadassananti. Evaṃ me rūpaṃmā ahosīti mama rūpaṃ evaṃvidhaṃ mā hotu, dubbaṇṇaṃ dussaṇṭhitaṃ valitapalitaṃ tilakasamākiṇṇanti.
他沉默了。尼干陀这时知道自己在这个节骨眼上已经输了,心想:沙门乔达摩为了攻破我的主张,提出了一个论据,我却因为愚笨,反而把它特别发挥了一通,现在我已经彻底败了。如果我说“有主宰权”,这些国王就会站起来说:“阿吉韦萨那,你说你对你的色身有主宰权。如果你对色身真有主宰权,为什么你不能像这些离车族的王族那样,以如同三十三天神一般的身形,光彩照人、端正俊美呢?”如果我说“没有主宰权”,沙门乔达摩就会站起来说:“阿吉韦萨那,你先前说你对色身有主宰权,现在又否认了。”他就会这样把论辩的过失推到我身上。所以,说“有”也有过失,说“没有”也有过失。于是他沉默了。世尊第二次问他,他第二次沉默。然而,如果世尊问到第三次而他不回答,他的头就会裂成七瓣。而诸佛为了众生的利益,历经四不可数劫又十万大劫圆满种种巴拉密,对众生怀有强烈的悲悯。因此,世尊没有问到第三次,接着就对萨恰咖尼甘塔布达说了这番话——也就是说了“现在你回答吧”等话。巴利
Tuṇhī ahosīti nigaṇṭho imasmiṃ ṭhāne viraddhabhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo mama vādaṃ bhindanatthāya kāraṇaṃ āhari, ahaṃ bālatāya tameva visesetvā dīpesiṃ, idāni naṭṭhomhi, sace vattatīti vakkhāmi, ime rājāno uṭṭhahitvā, ‘aggivessana, tvaṃ mama rūpe vaso vattatīti vadasi, yadi te rūpe vaso vattati, kasmā tvaṃ yathā ime licchavirājāno tāvatiṃsadevasadisehi attabhāvehi virocanti abhirūpā pāsādikā, evaṃ na virocasī’ti. Sace na vattatīti vakkhāmi, samaṇo gotamo uṭṭhahitvā, ‘aggivessana, tvaṃ pubbe vattati me rūpasmiṃ vasoti vatvā idāni paṭikkhipasī’ti vādaṃ āropessati. Iti vattatīti vuttepi eko doso, na vattatīti vuttepi eko doso’’ti tuṇhī ahosi. Dutiyampi bhagavā pucchi, dutiyampi tuṇhī ahosi. Yasmā pana yāvatatiyaṃ bhagavatā pucchite abyākarontassa sattadhā muddhā phalati, buddhā ca nāma sattānaṃyeva atthāya kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramīnaṃ pūritattā sattesu balavaanuddayā honti. Tasmā yāvatatiyaṃ apucchitvā atha kho bhagavā saccakaṃ nigaṇṭhaputtaṃ etadavoca – etaṃ ‘‘byākarohī dānī’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
这里,“如法”是指有原因、有根据的。手中握着金刚杵,所以叫金刚手。所谓“夜叉”,并不是随便哪个夜叉,应当知道他就是帝释天神——众神之王。“燃烧的”,是像火焰一样的颜色。“猛烈燃烧的”,是烧得非常旺盛。“化作一团光焰”,是周身一片光明,意思是变成了一团火焰。“站立着”,是说化现出巨大的头颅、像芭蕉花苞一样的獠牙、恐怖的眼睛和鼻子等等,现出这样怪异可怕的形相,站在那里。那么他为什么来到这里呢?是为了让他舍弃邪见。另外还有一个原因:当初世尊心里生起这样的念头——“如果只有我来说法,别人却不能理解我”,于是对说法提不起劲头。那时帝释天神和大梵天王一起来到世尊面前,立下承诺说:“世尊,请您说法吧!对于那些不听从您教令的人,我们会让他们听从。转法轮是您的事,转教令之轮交给我们。”正因为有这个承诺,他今天才特地前来,恐吓萨恰咖,让他回答问题。巴利
Tattha sahadhammikanti sahetukaṃ sakāraṇaṃ. Vajiraṃ pāṇimhi assāti vajirapāṇi. Yakkhoti na yo vā so vā yakkho, sakko devarājāti veditabbo. Ādittanti aggivaṇṇaṃ. Sampajjalitanti suṭṭhu pajjalitaṃ. Sajotibhūtanti samantato jotibhūtaṃ, ekaggijālabhūtanti attho. Ṭhito hotīti mahantaṃ sīsaṃ, kandalamakulasadisā dāṭhā, bhayānakāni akkhināsādīnīti evaṃ virūparūpaṃ māpetvā ṭhito. Kasmā panesa āgatoti? Diṭṭhivissajjāpanatthaṃ. Apica, ‘‘ahañceva kho pana dhammaṃ deseyyaṃ, pare ca me na ājāneyyu’’nti evaṃ dhammadesanāya appossukkabhāvaṃ āpanne bhagavati sakko mahābrahmunā saddhiṃ āgantvā, ‘‘bhagavā dhammaṃ desetha, tumhākaṃ āṇāya avattamāne mayaṃ vattāpessāma, tumhākaṃ dhammacakkaṃ hotu, amhākaṃ āṇācakka’’nti paṭiññamakāsi. Tasmā ‘‘ajja saccakaṃ tāsetvā pañhaṃ vissajjāpessāmī’’ti āgato.
只有世尊和萨恰咖尼甘塔布达能看见。因为如果其他人也能看见那个夜叉,倒也没什么妨碍,但他们可能会这样说:“沙门乔达摩知道萨恰咖不肯进入自己的论点,就召来夜叉给他看,萨恰咖是因为害怕才开口的。”所以只有世尊和萨恰咖看得见。萨恰咖一看到那个夜叉,全身立刻冒出汗水,肚子里翻来覆去,发出巨大的响声。他四处张望,想看有没有别人也看见了,结果发现没有一个人哪怕竖起一根毫毛。于是他心想:“这种恐怖只发生在我一个人身上。如果我说有夜叉,他们一定会说:‘难道只有你长了眼睛?只有你一个人看见夜叉?你之前没看见夜叉的时候,不就已经被沙门乔达摩在论辩中逼得无话可说了吗?现在怎么倒看见夜叉了?’”他想到这里,又觉得:“如今在这里,除了沙门乔达摩,我再没有别的依靠了。”于是,萨恰咖尼甘塔布达……对世尊说了这样的话。“寻求救护”:就是寻找保护。“救护”的意思是保护、守护。“寻求庇护”:就是寻找藏身之处。“庇护”是人们躲藏的地方。“寻求皈依”:就是寻找皈依处。“皈依”就是能伤害、摧毁恐惧,这就是其含义。巴利
Bhagavāceva passati, saccako ca nigaṇṭhaputtoti yadi hi taṃ aññepi passeyyuṃ. Taṃ kāraṇaṃ agaru assa, ‘‘samaṇo gotamo saccakaṃ attano vāde anotarantaṃ ñatvā yakkhaṃ āvāhetvā dassesi, tato saccako bhayena kathesī’’ti vadeyyuṃ. Tasmā bhagavā ceva passati saccako ca. Tassa taṃ disvāva sakalasarīrato sedā mucciṃsu, antokucchi viparivattamānā mahāravaṃ ravi. So ‘‘aññepi nu kho passantī’’ti olokento kassaci lomahaṃsamattampi na addasa. Tato – ‘‘idaṃ bhayaṃ mameva uppannaṃ. Sacāhaṃ yakkhoti vakkhāmi, ‘kiṃ tuyhameva akkhīni atthi, tvameva yakkhaṃ passasi, paṭhamaṃ yakkhaṃ adisvā samaṇena gotamena vādasaṅghāṭe khittova yakkhaṃ passasī’ti vadeyyu’’nti cintetvā – ‘‘na dāni me idha aññaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ atthi, aññatra samaṇā gotamā’’ti maññamāno, atha kho saccako nigaṇṭhaputto…pe… bhagavantaṃ etadavoca. Tāṇaṃ gavesīti tāṇanti gavesamāno. Leṇaṃ gavesīti leṇanti gavesamāno. Saraṇaṃ gavesīti saraṇanti gavesamāno. Ettha ca tāyati rakkhatīti tāṇaṃ. Nilīyanti etthāti leṇaṃ. Saratīti saraṇaṃ, bhayaṃ hiṃsati viddhaṃsetīti attho.
358 “作意”是指把这件事放在心上,反复观察、思量、确认。“愿我的受是这样”——也就是愿它只是善的、只是乐的。“愿我的想是这样”——也就是愿它只是善的、只是乐的、只与喜悦相应。对行和识也是同样的道理。而“愿不要成为这样”这一句,在这里应当按相反的意思来理解。“是否妥当呢”——就是问“合不合道理”。“能被视为”——是以“这是我的、我就是这个、这是我的我”这样的渴爱、我慢和邪见来看待。“不,乔达摩尊,并非如此”——意思是“这不合道理,乔达摩尊”。就这样,世尊好比一位善巧的捕蛇人,用同一条蛇让那个曾被蛇咬过、身中蛇毒的人再次被同一条蛇咬,从而把毒拔除。同样地,世尊就在那大众之中,让萨恰咖尼甘塔布达亲口说出五蕴是无常、是苦、是无我。“执著于苦”——就是以渴爱和邪见执著于这五蕴之苦。“已进入、已执取”——也应当按渴爱和邪见的作用来理解。“这是我的苦”等句中,意思是以渴爱、我慢和邪见来看待五蕴之苦。“应遍知”——应以无常、苦、无我的方式,通过审察遍知而彻底了知。“已周遍包围”——就是将其导向灭尽、衰亡、不再生起。巴利
358.Manasi karitvāti manamhi katvā paccavekkhitvā upadhāretvā. Evaṃ me vedanā hotūti kusalāva hotu, sukhāva hotu. Evaṃ me saññā hotūti kusalāva hotu, sukhāva hotu, somanassasampayuttāva hotūti. Saṅkhāraviññāṇesupi eseva nayo. Mā ahosīti ettha pana vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Kallaṃ nūti yuttaṃ nu. Samanupassitunti ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attā’’ti evaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena passituṃ. No hidaṃ, bho gotamāti na yuttametaṃ, bho gotama. Iti bhagavā yathā nāma cheko ahituṇḍiko sappadaṭṭhavisaṃ teneva sappena puna ḍaṃsāpetvā ubbāheyya, evaṃ tassaṃyeva parisati saccakaṃ nigaṇṭhaputtaṃ teneva mukhena pañcakkhandhā aniccā dukkhā anattāti vadāpesi. Dukkhaṃ allīnoti imaṃ pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhīhi allīno. Upagato ajjhositotipi taṇhādiṭṭhivaseneva veditabbo. Dukkhaṃ etaṃ mamātiādīsu pañcakkhandhadukkhaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena samanupassatīti attho. Parijāneyyāti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tīraṇapariññāya parito jāneyya. Parikkhepetvāti khayaṃ vayaṃ anuppādaṃ upanetvā.
359 “嫩”就是幼嫩。所谓“没有虫瘿结成的”,是说在开花的时候,里面会长出一根拇指大小的硬茎,而它没有这根硬茎,就是这个意思。“空心的”就是内部空虚无实。因为空心,所以是空的。“失败了”就是被打败了。“可是你刚才已经说过……了呀”,这是世尊为了揭露他多嘴的毛病、折服他而说的。据说这个人以前曾去拜访富楼那等六位外道师,向他们提问。那些人都答不上来。于是他在那些人的会众当中,大大羞辱了他们一番,然后起身,宣称自己获胜,扬长而去。他也抱着同样的想法:“我也要照样去刁难正自觉者。”于是就前来,说了那些话。巴利
359.Navanti taruṇaṃ. Akukkukajātanti pupphaggahaṇakāle anto aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo eko ghanadaṇḍako nibbattati, tena virahitanti attho. Rittoti suñño antosāravirahito. Rittattāva tuccho. Aparaddhoti parājito. Bhāsitā kho pana teti idaṃ bhagavā tassa mukharabhāvaṃ pakāsetvā niggaṇhanto āha. So kira pubbe pūraṇādayo cha satthāro upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchati. Te vissajjetuṃ na sakkonti. Atha nesaṃ parisamajjhe mahantaṃ vippakāraṃ āropetvā uṭṭhāya jayaṃ pavedento gacchati. So sammāsambuddhampi tatheva viheṭhessāmīti saññāya upasaṅkamitvā –
“ 喂,这棵叶子湿润、长满刺的树,到底叫什么名字?
就在那里,只一下,头就被劈开了。”巴利
‘‘Ambho ko nāma yaṃ rukkho, sinnapatto sakaṇṭako; Yattha ekappahārena, uttamaṅgaṃ vibhijjita’’nti.
他就像一只软嘴鸟,去啄坚硬的金合欢树,结果喙嘴都碎裂了;同样,他触及一切知智的坚实核心,智慧之嘴因此折断,这才知道一切知智是何等坚不可摧。他在大众当中把这件事揭示出来,于是说出了“可是你刚才已经说过……”等话。
“现在没有”——不能说已执取之身从来就没有汗,而是说“现在这一刻”没有汗。
“显露金色之身”——并不是把整个身体都露出来。诸佛向来是系好衣纽、覆盖身体,在会众中说法。那时,世尊只是在喉颈正对面的位置,把衣料提起来,往下拉开大约四指宽的一小块。就在拉开的那一刹那,金色的光芒一团一团地从那里放射出来,就像从金瓶里流出的红金色液流,又像从赤色云层中射出的闪电,环绕着如同金鼓一般宽厚的肩身,又绕着最尊贵的头顶向右旋绕,然后跃入虚空。
世尊为什么要这样做呢?是为了消除大众的疑惑。因为大众会想:“沙门乔达摩说自己没有汗,可尼甘塔布达萨恰咖的汗却像被榨油机压出来一样往下淌;而沙门乔达摩裹着厚密的双层衣坐着,他体内到底有没有汗,怎么能知道呢?”为了消除他们的这种疑惑,世尊才这样做。
“沮丧”——就是失去了威势。“垂肩”——就是肩膀低垂。“无言以对”——就是再也想不出更多话来说。他“坐下”——就是用脚趾刮着地面坐了下来。巴利
Ayaṃ khadiraṃ āhacca asārakarukkhaparicito mudutuṇḍasakuṇo viya sabbaññutaññāṇasāraṃ āhacca ñāṇatuṇḍabhedaṃ patto sabbaññutaññāṇassa thaddhabhāvaṃ aññāsi. Tadassa parisamajjhe pakāsento bhāsitā kho pana tetiādimāha. Natthi etarahīti upādinnakasarīre sedo nāma natthīti na vattabbaṃ, etarahi pana natthīti vadati. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ kāyaṃ vivarīti na sabbaṃ kāyaṃ vivari. Buddhā nāma gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā paṭicchannasarīrā parisati dhammaṃ desenti. Atha bhagavā galavāṭakasammukhaṭṭhāne cīvaraṃ gahetvā caturaṅgulamattaṃ otāresi. Otāritamatte pana tasmiṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo puñjapuñjā hutvā suvaṇṇaghaṭato rattasuvaṇṇarasadhārā viya, rattavaṇṇavalāhakato vijjulatā viya ca nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇamurajasadisaṃ mahākhandhaṃ uttamasiraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ kurumānā ākāse pakkhandiṃsu. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamakāsīti? Mahājanassa kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ. Mahājano hi samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ sedo natthīti vadati, saccakassa tāva nigaṇṭhaputtassa yantāruḷhassa viya sedā paggharanti. Samaṇo pana gotamo ghanadupaṭṭacīvaraṃ pārupitvā nisinno, anto sedassa atthitā vā natthitā vā kathaṃ sakkā ñātunti kaṅkhaṃ kareyya, tassa kaṅkhāvinodanatthaṃ evamakāsi. Maṅkubhūtoti nittejabhūto. Pattakkhandhoti patitakkhandho. Appaṭibhānoti uttari appassanto. Nisīdīti pādaṅguṭṭhakena bhūmiṃ kasamāno nisīdi.
360 “丑面”并不是说他面容丑陋,他其实相貌端正、令人欢喜,这只是他的名字。“不能再进入那个池塘”,是说所有莲藕的茎都已被折断,去路断绝,所以不能再进入,只能就留在那里,成为乌鸦、鹞鹰等的食物,以此来说明。所谓“邪曲”,是指见解上的歪曲。“游移”,是指见解上的四处游走。“挣扎”,是指见解上的动荡。“也就是以论诤为目的”这里,“也就是”只是一个语助词;意思是,他不可能抱着“我要把论诤强加给他”的意图去接近,而是为了听闻正法才前去,以此来说明。“对丑面离车族之子说了这些话”:为什么要对他说呢?据说,当丑面正在举譬喻的时候,其余那些离车族青年也在想:“这个尼干陀以前在我们学技艺的地方,长久以来都轻视我们,现在正是看这个敌人受挫的时候。我们也要每人各举一个譬喻,就像用杵在臼里捣打掉落的谷粒一样对付他,让他从此再也不能在众人中间抬起头来。”于是他们各自想好了譬喻,坐在那里等着丑面把话说完。萨恰咖知道了他们的心思,心想:“这些家伙全都伸长了脖子、嘴唇颤抖地站着;要是让他们各自有机会去举譬喻,那我就再也不能在众人中间抬起头来了。不如我现在先把丑面贬斥下去,让别人没有开口的机会,就这样截断话头,然后向沙门乔达摩提问。”因此他才说了那番话。其中“且住”的意思是:停下,别再说了。巴利
360.Dummukhoti na virūpamukho, abhirūpo hi so pāsādiko. Nāmaṃ panassa etaṃ. Abhabbo taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ puna otaritunti sabbesaṃ aḷānaṃ bhaggattā pacchinnagamano otarituṃ abhabbo, tattheva kākakulalādīnaṃ bhattaṃ hotīti dasseti. Visūkāyikānīti diṭṭhivisūkāni. Visevitānīti diṭṭhisañcaritāni. Vipphanditānīti diṭṭhivipphanditāni. Yadidaṃ vādādhippāyoti ettha yadidanti nipātamattaṃ; vādādhippāyo hutvā vādaṃ āropessāmīti ajjhāsayena upasaṅkamituṃ abhabbo; dhammassavanāya pana upasaṅkameyyāti dasseti. Dummukhaṃ licchaviputtaṃ etadavocāti kasmā avoca ? Dummukhassa kirassa upamāharaṇakāle sesa licchavikumārāpi cintesuṃ – ‘‘iminā nigaṇṭhena amhākaṃ sippuggahaṇaṭṭhāne ciraṃ avamāno kato, ayaṃ dāni amittassa piṭṭhiṃ passituṃ kālo. Mayampi ekekaṃ upamaṃ āharitvā pāṇippahārena patitaṃ muggarena pothento viya tathā naṃ karissāma, yathā na puna parisamajjhe sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ sakkhissatī’’ti, te opammāni karitvā dummukhassa kathāpariyosānaṃ āgamayamānā nisīdiṃsu. Saccako tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ ñatvā, ime sabbeva gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā oṭṭhehi calamānehi ṭhitā; sace paccekā upamā harituṃ labhissanti, puna mayā parisamajjhe sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkā bhavissati, handāhaṃ dummukhaṃ apasādetvā yathā aññassa okāso na hoti, evaṃ kathāvāraṃ pacchinditvā samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pañhaṃ pucchissāmīti tasmā etadavoca. Tattha āgamehīti tiṭṭha, mā puna bhaṇāhīti attho.
361 “让这话先放一边吧,乔达摩贤者”的意思是:乔达摩贤者啊,我们以及其他众多沙门婆罗门所说的这句话,就先放一边吧。“把胡言乱语当作胡言乱语”——因为这话就像胡言乱语一样,意思只是胡乱说说罢了。或者,在理解“让这话先放一边吧”时,应当把“谈论”这个词补进去来理解。而“把言语的胡言乱语当作胡言乱语”这里的意思则是:我认为这种言语的发出,就仅仅是言语罢了。巴利
361.Tiṭṭhatesā, bho gotamāti, bho gotama, esā amhākañceva aññesañca puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ vācā tiṭṭhatu. Vilāpaṃ vilapitaṃ maññeti etañhi vacanaṃ vilapitaṃ viya hoti, vippalapitamattaṃ hotīti attho. Atha vā tiṭṭhatesāti ettha kathāti āharitvā vattabbā. Vācāvilāpaṃ vilapitaṃ maññeti ettha panidaṃ vācānicchāraṇaṃ vilapitamattaṃ maññe hotīti attho.
现在,为了提问,他说出了“做到怎样”等话。其中,“达到自信”是指已证得智慧。“不依他人”是指不依赖他人。“接着,世尊在解答他的问题时,说出了‘在此,阿吉韦萨那居士’等话,这些内容意思很浅显。然而,因为这里说了‘他看见’,所以显示的是有学地。因此,为了进一步询问无学地,他又问了第二个问题,世尊也为他作了解答。其中,在‘见无上’等说法里,‘见无上’是指世间与出世间的慧;‘行道无上’是指世间与出世间的道;‘解脱无上’是指世间与出世间的解脱。或者,只取纯粹的出世间来说:‘见无上’是阿拉汉道的正见;‘行道无上’是其余的道支;‘解脱无上’是最胜果的解脱。或者,应当知道,诸漏尽者对涅槃的观见,称为‘见无上’;道支是‘行道无上’;最胜果是‘解脱无上’。‘那位世尊是佛陀’是说,那位世尊自己也已觉悟四圣谛。‘为了觉悟’是说,为了让他人也觉悟四圣谛而说法。在‘调伏’等说法中,‘调伏’是指没有粗暴。‘为了调伏’是指为了没有粗暴。‘寂静’是指通过一切烦恼的止息而寂静。‘为了寂静’是指为了烦恼的止息。‘已渡’是指已渡过四种暴流。‘为了渡过’是指为了渡过四种暴流。‘般涅槃’是指通过烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃。‘为了般涅槃’是指为了烦恼的般涅槃。”巴利
Idāni pañhaṃ pucchanto kittāvatātiādimāha. Tattha vesārajjapattoti ñāṇapatto. Aparappaccayoti aparappattiyo. Athassa bhagavā pañhaṃ vissajjento idha, aggivessanātiādimāha, taṃ uttānatthameva. Yasmā panettha passatīti vuttattā sekkhabhūmi dassitā. Tasmā uttari asekkhabhūmiṃ pucchanto dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi, tampissa bhagavā byākāsi . Tattha dassanānuttariyenātiādīsu dassanānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā paññā. Paṭipadānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā paṭipadā. Vimuttānuttariyanti lokiyalokuttarā vimutti. Suddhalokuttarameva vā gahetvā dassanānuttariyanti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Paṭipadānuttariyanti sesāni maggaṅgāni. Vimuttānuttariyanti aggaphalavimutti. Khīṇāsavassa vā nibbānadassanaṃ dassanānuttariyaṃ nāma. Maggaṅgāni paṭipadānuttariyaṃ. Aggaphalaṃ vimuttānuttariyanti veditabbaṃ. Buddho so bhagavāti so bhagavā sayampi cattāri saccāni buddho. Bodhāyāti paresampi catusaccabodhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Dantotiādīsu dantoti nibbisevano. Damathāyāti nibbisevanatthāya. Santoti sabbakilesavūpasamena santo. Samathāyāti kilesavūpasamāya. Tiṇṇoti caturoghatiṇṇo. Taraṇāyāti caturoghataraṇāya. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto. Parinibbānāyāti kilesaparinibbānatthāya.
362 “毁坏者”是指毁坏功德的人。“鲁莽者”是指说话鲁莽的人。“可被触恼”是指可以被触怒、冒犯。“触恼之后”是指冒犯、冲撞之后。“又怎能不冒犯乔达摩尊者呢”这句话表明:冒犯了乔达摩尊者之后,谁也没有能力带着自己那套未被驳倒的完整言论离开。因为世尊不会像大象之类那样去危害任何人的性命。然而这位尼乾陀举出这三个譬喻,并不是为了赞叹世尊,而是为了赞叹他自己。就好比一位国王处死了某个敌人之后,又称赞那个敌人说“这样英勇、这样有力量的人必定是英雄吧”,表面上是在称赞敌人,实际上是在称赞自己。同样,他也是这样:他说“乔达摩尊者啊,可能会有发情的大象……”等等,表面上像是在赞叹世尊,说“我们这些勇敢的人、有智慧的人、多闻的人,就像面对发情的大象、燃烧的火堆、竖起颈部的毒蛇一样,为了辩论而来到正自觉者面前”,但实际上全是在赞叹自己。这样赞叹自己之后,他邀请世尊时说了“请接受”等话。其中,“请接受”的意思是请应允。“为了明日”的意思是:我若为你们做事,明日将会产生的福德与喜悦、满足,就是为了这个。“世尊以沉默应允了”:世尊不动身行、不动语行,内心安忍而持,以沉默的方式接受了。这是说,为了摄受萨恰咖,世尊仅以心意便已应允。巴利
362.Dhaṃsīti guṇadhaṃsakā. Pagabbāti vācāpāgabbiyena samannāgatā. Āsādetabbanti ghaṭṭetabbaṃ. Āsajjāti ghaṭṭetvā. Natveva bhavantaṃ gotamanti bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ āsajja kassaci attano vādaṃ anupahataṃ sakalaṃ ādāya pakkamituṃ thāmo natthīti dasseti. Na hi bhagavā hatthiādayo viya kassaci jīvitantarāyaṃ karoti. Ayaṃ pana nigaṇṭho imā tisso upamā na bhagavato ukkaṃsanatthaṃ āhari, attukkaṃsanatthameva āhari. Yathā hi rājā kañci paccatthikaṃ ghātetvā evaṃ nāma sūro evaṃ thāmasampanno puriso bhavissatīti paccatthikaṃ thomentopi attānameva thometi. Evameva sopi siyā hi, bho gotama, hatthiṃ pabhinnantiādīhi bhagavantaṃ ukkaṃsentopi mayameva sūrā mayaṃ paṇḍitā mayaṃ bahussutāyeva evaṃ pabhinnahatthiṃ viya, jalitaaggikkhandhaṃ viya, phaṇakataāsīvisaṃ viya ca vādatthikā sammāsambuddhaṃ upasaṅkamimhāti attānaṃyeva ukkaṃseti. Evaṃ attānaṃ ukkaṃsetvā bhagavantaṃ nimantayamāno adhivāsetu metiādimāha. Tattha adhivāsetūti sampaṭicchatu. Svātanāyāti yaṃ me tumhesu kāraṃ karoto sve bhavissati puññañca pītipāmojjañca, tadatthāya. Adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenāti bhagavā kāyaṅgaṃ vā vācaṅgaṃ vā acopetvā abbhantareyeva khantiṃ dhārento tuṇhībhāvena adhivāsesi. Saccakassa anuggahakaraṇatthaṃ manasāva sampaṭicchīti vuttaṃ hoti.
363 “你们认为什么合适,就拿来吧”——据说,那些离车族人每天固定供养他五百锅饭。他就是针对这件事说:明天,你们觉得什么对沙门乔达摩合适、是他允许的,就拿那些来供养;毕竟你们是沙门乔达摩的侍从,知道什么合规矩、什么不合规矩,什么恰当、什么不恰当。他们送来了食物供养,意思是他们把该供养的食物送来了。以殊胜的,就是用最好的。亲手,就是用自己的手。令饱足,就是让他吃得很好、很满足,完全吃饱,随他需要。请辞,就是好好请他表态够了、不用了,用手势让他拒绝。食讫,就是已经吃完了。钵已离手,就是手已经从钵上移开,也就是说手已经放下了。另有一种读法是“onittapattapāṇi”,意思是:钵已经洗净,从手中离开,也就是洗净了手和钵,把钵放在一边后坐下。坐在一边,就是知道世尊已经这样了,便在一个地方坐下。福德,就是这次布施中所生的福德,也就是未来的果报蕴。福德大地,就是果报蕴的随从。愿那福德给施主们带来安乐,就是愿它给这些离车族人带来安乐。据说他心想:我既然已经出家,出家人不该把布施回向给自己,于是就把布施回向给他们,这样说了。然后,离车族人供养的对象是萨恰咖,而不是世尊;萨恰咖供养的对象才是世尊。为了说明这个道理,世尊就说了“阿耆毗萨那,凡是……”等话。就这样,世尊未经尼乾陀同意,就把自己得到的供养回向给了尼乾陀,而这将成为他未来的习气。巴利
363.Yamassa patirūpaṃ maññeyyāthāti te kira licchavī tassa pañcathālipākasatāni niccabhattaṃ āharanti . Tadeva sandhāya esa sve tumhe yaṃ assa samaṇassa gotamassa patirūpaṃ kappiyanti maññeyyātha, taṃ āhareyyātha; samaṇassa hi gotamassa tumhe paricārakā kappiyākappiyaṃ yuttāyuttaṃ jānāthāti vadati. Bhattābhihāraṃ abhihariṃsūti abhiharitabbaṃ bhattaṃ abhihariṃsu. Paṇītenāti uttamena. Sahatthāti sahatthena. Santappetvāti suṭṭhu tappetvā, paripuṇṇaṃ suhitaṃ yāvadatthaṃ katvā. Sampavāretvāti suṭṭhu pavāretvā, alaṃ alanti hatthasaññāya paṭikkhipāpetvā. Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ. Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho, onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇī. Taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamante pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Ekamantaṃ nisīdīti bhagavantaṃ evaṃbhūtaṃ ñatvā ekasmiṃ okāse nisīdīti attho. Puññañcāti yaṃ imasmiṃ dāne puññaṃ, āyatiṃ vipākakkhandhāti attho. Puññamahīti vipākakkhandhānaṃyeva parivāro. Taṃ dāyakānaṃ sukhāya hotūti taṃ imesaṃ licchavīnaṃ sukhatthāya hotu. Idaṃ kira so ahaṃ pabbajito nāma, pabbajitena ca na yuttaṃ attano dānaṃ niyyātetunti tesaṃ niyyātento evamāha. Atha bhagavā yasmā licchavīhi saccakassa dinnaṃ, na bhagavato. Saccakena pana bhagavato dinnaṃ, tasmā tamatthaṃ dīpento yaṃ kho, aggivessanātiādimāha. Iti bhagavā nigaṇṭhassa matena vināyeva attano dinnaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ nigaṇṭhassa niyyātesi, sā cassa anāgate vāsanā bhavissatīti.
《大萨恰咖经》注释巴利
6. Mahāsaccakasuttavaṇṇanā
364 “如是我闻”这句,说的就是《大萨恰咖经》。其中“一时”“尔时”“上午”这三处,讲的其实是同一个时间。比丘们做完该做的事,洗了脸,拿上钵和衣,礼敬了塔庙,站在思虑处,心里想着“我们该进哪个村子呢”——这个时候,就是这里说的那个时间。世尊在这样的时刻,穿上双层下衣,系好腰带,把粪扫衣偏袒右肩披好,从香室出来,被比丘僧团围绕着,站在香室门前。就是针对这个情形,才说“一时”“尔时”“上午”。“想要进入”:已经生起了“我要进村乞食”的决定。“前往靠近”:为什么前往靠近呢?是出于想提出论议的意图。据说他心里这样想:“我以前因为愚痴,带着整个毗舍离的会众去到沙门乔达摩那里,在大众中感到羞愧。现在我不那样做,独自一人前去,提出论议。如果我能战胜沙门乔达摩,就阐明自己的主张而获得胜利。如果沙门乔达摩获胜,就像在黑暗中跳舞一样,没有人会知道。”他带着这样的“睡眠问题”,以这种论议的意图前往靠近。巴利
364.Evaṃme sutanti mahāsaccakasuttaṃ. Tattha ekaṃ samayanti ca tena kho pana samayenāti ca pubbaṇhasamayanti ca tīhi padehi ekova samayo vutto. Bhikkhūnañhi vattapaṭipattiṃ katvā mukhaṃ dhovitvā pattacīvaramādāya cetiyaṃ vanditvā kataraṃ gāmaṃ pavisissāmāti vitakkamāḷake ṭhitakālo nāma hoti. Bhagavā evarūpe samaye rattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ ekaṃsaṃ pārupitvā gandhakuṭito nikkhamma bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gandhakuṭipamukhe aṭṭhāsi. Taṃ sandhāya, – ‘‘ekaṃ samayanti ca tena kho pana samayenāti ca pubbaṇhasamaya’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Pavisitukāmoti piṇḍāya pavisissāmīti evaṃ katasanniṭṭhāno. Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkamīti? Vādāropanajjhāsayena. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘pubbepāhaṃ apaṇḍitatāya sakalaṃ vesāliparisaṃ gahetvā samaṇassa gotamassa santikaṃ gantvā parisamajjhe maṅku jāto. Idāni tathā akatvā ekakova gantvā vādaṃ āropessāmi. Yadi samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ parājetuṃ sakkhissāmi, attano laddhiṃ dīpetvā jayaṃ karissāmi. Yadi samaṇassa gotamassa jayo bhavissati, andhakāre naccaṃ viya na koci jānissatī’’ti niddāpañhaṃ nāma gahetvā iminā vādajjhāsayena upasaṅkami.
“出于悲愍”,是指出于对尼甘塔布达萨恰咖的悲愍。据说阿难长老那时心里这样想:“只要世尊稍坐片刻,他就能得到见佛和闻法的机会,这会给他带来长远的利益和安乐。”所以他请求世尊之后,把粪扫衣叠成四层铺好,说:“请世尊坐。”世尊察觉到“阿难这么说是有原因的”,就在铺好的座位上坐下。“他对世尊这样说”——他把那个问题当作压轴利器带来,却先搁在一边,暂且避开,说出了“沙门乔达摩,有这样一种寂静……”那番话。巴利
Anukampaṃ upādāyāti saccakassa nigaṇṭhaputtassa anukampaṃ paṭicca. Therassa kirassa evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘bhagavati muhuttaṃ nisinne buddhadassanaṃ dhammassavanañca labhissati. Tadassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya saṃvattissatī’’ti. Tasmā bhagavantaṃ yācitvā paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ catugguṇaṃ paññapetvā nisīdatu bhagavāti āha. ‘‘Kāraṇaṃ ānando vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti yaṃ pana pañhaṃ ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ādāya āgato taṃ ṭhapetvā passena tāva pariharanto etaṃ santi, bho gotamātiādivacanaṃ avoca.
365 “乔达摩贤者,他们确实在体验”——意思是那些沙门婆罗门在体验、领受、感受身体内生起的身受苦受。“大腿僵直”,就是大腿变得像柱子一样,也就是大腿僵硬。这里是因为感叹而用了未来式的说法“将会发生”。“随逐于身”,就是跟随身体、被身体所控制。而这里说的“身修习”,其实指的是观;修观的人不可能达到心散乱。所以尼干陀说的都是不存在的、虚假的、根本没有的事。所谓“心修习”,指的是止;一个与定相应的人,根本不会有大腿僵直这类现象。所以尼干陀说的又是不实之事。注疏里还说:“就像他先说了‘过去曾发生过’,接着又说‘乃至大腿僵硬也会发生’之类的话,这既不符合未来之事,于义理也说不通,纯粹是在讲不存在的、虚假的、根本没有的事。”巴利
365.Phusanti hi te, bho gotamāti te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sarīre uppannaṃ sārīrikaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ phusanti labhanti, anubhavantīti attho. Ūrukkhambhoti khambhakataūrubhāvo, ūruthaddhatāti attho. Vimhayatthavasena panettha bhavissatīti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. Kāyanvayaṃ hotīti kāyānugataṃ hoti kāyassa vasavatti. Kāyabhāvanāti pana vipassanā vuccati, tāya cittavikkhepaṃ pāpuṇanto nāma natthi, iti nigaṇṭho asantaṃ abhūtaṃ yaṃ natthi, tadevāha. Cittabhāvanātipi samatho vuccati, samādhiyuttassa ca puggalassa ūrukkhambhādayo nāma natthi, iti nigaṇṭho idaṃ abhūtameva āha. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vuttaṃ – ‘‘yatheva ‘bhūtapubbanti vatvā ūrukkhambhopi nāma bhavissatī’tiādīni vadato anāgatarūpaṃ na sameti, tathā atthopi na sameti, asantaṃ abhūtaṃ yaṃ natthi, taṃ kathetī’’ti.
“没有身修习”这句话,是针对五火炙身这类自我折磨的苦行而说的。因为在那些人看来,这种苦行就叫作“身修习”。那么,他到底是看到了什么才这样说呢?据说,他在白天来到精舍,而那个时候,比丘们已经收拾好钵和衣,各自回到自己的夜间住处或白天住处,进入独处禅修。他看到比丘们在那里独处禅修,就以为:“这些人只是在修心而已,他们根本没有身修习。”于是说出了那番话。巴利
No kāyabhāvananti pañcātapatappanādiṃ attakilamathānuyogaṃ sandhāyāha. Ayañhi tesaṃ kāyabhāvanā nāma. Kiṃ pana so disvā evamāha? So kira divādivassa vihāraṃ āgacchati, tasmiṃ kho pana samaye bhikkhū pattacīvaraṃ paṭisāmetvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānesu paṭisallānaṃ upagacchanti. So te paṭisallīne disvā cittabhāvanāmattaṃ ete anuyuñjanti, kāyabhāvanā panetesaṃ natthīti maññamāno evamāha.
366 这时,世尊追问他说:“阿吉韦萨那,你听说的身修习又是怎样的呢?”他于是详细说明,说了“难陀婆阇”等话。其中,“难陀”是他的名字,“婆阇”是他的姓;“基娑”是名字,“僧柯阇”是姓;玛卡离·果萨拉在前面已经提到过了。“这些人”就是指这三个人,据说他们在染污的苦行上达到了顶点。“粗大又粗大”就是殊胜又殊胜。“令人执取”就是让人获得力量。“令增长”就是使之增广。“令生脂肪”就是使人长胖。“舍弃前一种”就是舍弃先前那种难行苦行。“然后积累”就是后来以精美食物等滋养、增补。“有积集与损减”就是指有增长与减少,也就是说,这个身体的增长有时、损减有时,只是增长与损减被了知,而身修习却不被了知。这样阐明之后,为了询问心修习,他说:“阿吉韦萨那,你听说的心修习又是怎样的呢?”“不能成功”就是不能成办而说,正如那愚痴凡夫一样。巴利
366. Atha naṃ bhagavā anuyuñjanto kinti pana te, aggivessana, kāyabhāvanā sutāti āha. So taṃ vitthārento seyyathidaṃ, nando vacchotiādimāha. Tattha nandoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vacchoti gottaṃ. Kisoti nāmaṃ. Saṃkiccoti gottaṃ. Makkhaligosālo heṭṭhā āgatova. Eteti ete tayo janā, te kira kiliṭṭhatapānaṃ matthakapattā ahesuṃ. Uḷārāni uḷārānīti paṇītāni paṇītāni. Gāhenti nāmāti balaṃ gaṇhāpenti nāma. Brūhentīti vaḍḍhenti. Medentīti jātamedaṃ karonti. Purimaṃ pahāyāti purimaṃ dukkarakāraṃ pahāya. Pacchā upacinantīti pacchā uḷārakhādanīyādīhi santappenti, vaḍḍhenti. Ācayāpacayo hotīti vaḍḍhi ca avaḍḍhi ca hoti, iti imassa kāyassa kālena vaḍḍhi, kālena parihānīti vaḍḍhiparihānimattameva paññāyati, kāyabhāvanā pana na paññāyatīti dīpetvā cittabhāvanaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘kinti pana te, aggivessana, cittabhāvanā sutā’’ti āha. Na sampāyāsīti sampādetvā kathetuṃ nāsakkhi, yathā taṃ bālaputhujjano.
367 “你又怎么能……”意思是:你连这样粗重、微弱的身修习都不了解,又怎么能了解那微细、精细的心修习呢?在这个地方,执责长老说:“这句话根本不像佛说的话。”就放下扇子,准备起身离开。这时玛哈斯瓦长老对他说:“诸比丘,可以看见这个由四大种构成的身体,有积集、有损减、有执取、有舍弃。”他听了之后便认定:“当以粗的身体为所缘时,由此生起的观,称为‘粗’,是说得通的。”巴利
367.Kutopana tvanti yo tvaṃ evaṃ oḷārikaṃ dubbalaṃ kāyabhāvanaṃ na jānāsi? So tvaṃ kuto saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ cittabhāvanaṃ jānissasīti. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne codanālayatthero, ‘‘abuddhavacanaṃ nāmetaṃ pada’’nti bījaniṃ ṭhapetvā pakkamituṃ ārabhi. Atha naṃ mahāsīvatthero āha – ‘‘dissati, bhikkhave, imassa cātumahābhūtikassa kāyassa ācayopi apacayopi ādānampi nikkhepanampī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.62). Taṃ sutvā sallakkhesi – ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyaṃ pariggaṇhantassa uppannavipassanā oḷārikāti vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
368 “贪着乐”是指具足对乐的贪染。“从乐受的灭,生起苦受”——这并不是说乐受一灭,苦受就立刻无间地生起,因为在《发趣论》中,乐与苦之间并没有无间缘的关系。不过,由于乐还没有灭时,苦就不会生起,所以这里才这样说。“遍取而住立”是指耗尽、执取之后而住立。“两方的”是指乐是一方,苦是另一方,这样成为相对的两方。巴利
368.Sukhasārāgīti sukhasārāgena samannāgato. Sukhāya vedanāya nirodhā uppajjati dukkhā vedanāti na anantarāva uppajjati, sukhadukkhānañhi anantarapaccayatā paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.2.45-46) paṭisiddhā. Yasmā pana sukhe aniruddhe dukkhaṃ nuppajjati, tasmā idha evaṃ vuttaṃ. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti khepetvā gaṇhitvā tiṭṭhati. Ubhatopakkhanti sukhaṃ ekaṃ pakkhaṃ dukkhaṃ ekaṃ pakkhanti evaṃ ubhatopakkhaṃ hutvā.
369 已经生起的乐受不会缠住心、占据心而持续存在,因为身体已经修习成熟;已经生起的苦受也不会缠住心、占据心而持续存在,因为心已经修习成熟。这里,身修习就是观,心修习就是定。观是乐的对立面,却靠近苦;定是苦的对立面,却靠近乐。为什么?因为安住于观而坐的人,时间一久,身体各处就像起火一样,腋下流汗,头顶仿佛有热气冒出来,心被打击、被折磨、躁动不安。这样看来,观确实是乐的对立面,靠近苦。可是,当身体上或心理上的苦已经生起时,进入等至把它压伏住,在等至那一刹那,苦就远远离开了,广大的乐随之进入。这样看来,定确实是苦的对立面,靠近乐。观是乐的对立面、靠近苦,定却不是这样;定是苦的对立面、靠近乐,观也不是这样。因此说:已经生起的乐受不会缠住心、占据心而持续存在,因为身体已经修习成熟;已经生起的苦受也不会缠住心、占据心而持续存在,因为心已经修习成熟。巴利
369.Uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassa. Uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassāti ettha kāyabhāvanā vipassanā, cittabhāvanā samādhi. Vipassanā ca sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā. Samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno. Kathaṃ? Vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnassa hi addhāne gacchante gacchante tattha tattha aggiuṭṭhānaṃ viya hoti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, matthakato usumavaṭṭiuṭṭhānaṃ viya hotīti cittaṃ haññati vihaññati vipphandati. Evaṃ tāva vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā. Uppanne pana kāyike vā cetasike vā dukkhe taṃ dukkhaṃ vikkhambhetvā samāpattiṃ samāpannassa samāpattikkhaṇe dukkhaṃ dūrāpagataṃ hoti, anappakaṃ sukhaṃ okkamati. Evaṃ samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno. Yathā vipassanā sukhassa paccanīkā, dukkhassa āsannā, na tathā samādhi. Yathā samādhi dukkhassa paccanīko, sukhassa āsanno, na ca tathā vipassanāti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘uppannāpi sukhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā kāyassa. Uppannāpi dukkhā vedanā cittaṃ na pariyādāya tiṭṭhati, bhāvitattā cittassā’’ti.
370 触恼般不善地,意思是先碰触诸功德,再将其引导过来。那确实是我的,意思是那确实就是我的心。巴利
370.Āsajjaupanīyāti guṇe ghaṭṭetvā ceva upanetvā ca. Taṃ vata meti taṃ vata mama cittaṃ.
371 “怎么会没有呢,阿吉韦萨那?”阿吉韦萨那,怎么会不存在呢?一定会存在。你不要这样想。我确实生起了乐受,也生起了苦受,但对于已经生起的受,我不让心被它控制而停留。现在为了阐明这个道理,世尊想要宣说能带来净信的法教,于是从最初开始讲述大出离。其中,“阿吉韦萨那,在我尚未成正觉之前……我就在那里坐下,这足以精勤了”这一段,应当完全按照前面《陷阱堆经》所说的方式来理解。不过这里有一点不同:在那部经里说的是坐在菩提座上,而这里说的是修苦行。巴利
371.Kiñhi no siyā, aggivessanāti, aggivessana, kiṃ na bhavissati, bhavissateva, mā evaṃ saññī hohi, uppajjiyeva me sukhāpi dukkhāpi vedanā, uppannāya panassā ahaṃ cittaṃ pariyādāya ṭhātuṃ na demi. Idānissa tamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ upari pasādāvahaṃ dhammadesanaṃ desetukāmo mūlato paṭṭhāya mahābhinikkhamanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha idha me, aggivessana, pubbeva sambodhā…pe… tattheva nisīdiṃ, alamidaṃ padhānāyāti idaṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā pāsarāsisutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso, tattha bodhipallaṅke nisajjā, idha dukkarakārikā.
374 “湿木”是指湿润的乌敦跋罗木。“有树脂”是指带有树汁的。“诸欲”是指事欲。“未远离”是指没有离开。在“欲贪”等词中,只是烦恼欲,因生起欲求的作用而称为“欲”,因生起润泽的作用而称为“爱”,因生起迷醉的作用而称为“迷醉”,因生起焦渴的作用而称为“渴”,因持续燃烧的作用而应知为“热恼”。“精勤所生”是指由努力所产生的。“为了智、为了见、为了无上的正觉”:这一切都只是出世间道的同义词。巴利
374.Allakaṭṭhanti allaṃ udumbarakaṭṭhaṃ. Sasnehanti sakhīraṃ. Kāmehīti vatthukāmehi. Avūpakaṭṭhāti anapagatā. Kāmacchandotiādīsu kilesakāmova chandakaraṇavasena chando. Sinehakaraṇavasena sneho. Mucchākaraṇavasena mucchā. Pipāsākaraṇavasena pipāsā. Anudahanavasena pariḷāhoti veditabbo. Opakkamikāti upakkamanibbattā. Ñāṇāya dassanāya anuttarāya sambodhāyāti sabbaṃ lokuttaramaggavevacanameva.
这里把譬喻和所喻对应起来看:湿的、带树脂的榕树木,就像那些由于烦恼欲而尚未从事欲中脱离的人。被烦恼欲浸透,就像被放进水里;即使摩擦也生不出火,就像由于烦恼欲而尚未从事欲中脱离的人,纵然有精勤修行所产生的种种感受,也仍然无法证得出世间道。连摩擦都不做,同样生不出火,就像这些人即使没有那些精勤修行所产生的感受,也一样无法证得出世间道。第二个譬喻也应当按这个方式来理解。不过这里有一处差别:前一个譬喻说的是带着妻儿一起出家的情况,后一个譬喻说的是在婆罗门法家中出家的情况。巴利
Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – allaṃ sakhīraṃ udumbarakaṭṭhaṃ viya hi kilesakāmena vatthukāmato anissaṭapuggalā. Udake pakkhittabhāvo viya kilesakāmena tintatā; manthanenāpi aggino anabhinibbattanaṃ viya kilesakāmena vatthukāmato anissaṭānaṃ opakkamikāhi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa anadhigamo. Amanthanenāpi aggino anabhinibbattanaṃ viya tesaṃ puggalānaṃ vināpi opakkamikāhi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa anadhigamo. Dutiyaupamāpi imināva nayena veditabbā. Ayaṃ pana viseso, purimā saputtabhariyapabbajjāya upamā; pacchimā brāhmaṇadhammikapabbajjāya.
376 376. 在第三个譬喻中,“koḷāpa”指的是已经断除树脂、没有湿润的木头。“Thale nikkhitta”指的是放在山坡或平地上。这里的譬喻对应关系是这样的:就像干枯无湿润的木头一样,是从烦恼欲和事欲中出离的人;就像放在远离水的高地上一样,是依烦恼欲而未被浸透。即使摩擦也能生火,就像已经依烦恼欲从事欲中出离的人,通过露地住、常坐不卧等苦行方式,即使依靠精勤所产生的感受,也能证得出世间道。而仅仅用另一棵树的干枝摩擦就能生火,就像即使没有精勤所产生的感受,单凭乐行道也能证得出世间道。这个譬喻是世尊为了说明自身的情况而举出的。巴利
376. Tatiyaupamāya koḷāpanti chinnasinehaṃ nirāpaṃ. Thale nikkhittanti pabbatathale vā bhūmithale vā nikkhittaṃ. Etthāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – sukkhakoḷāpakaṭṭhaṃ viya hi kilesakāmena vatthukāmato nissaṭapuggalā, ārakā udakā thale nikkhittabhāvo viya kilesakāmena atintatā. Manthanenāpi aggino abhinibbattanaṃ viya kilesakāmena vatthukāmato nissaṭānaṃ abbhokāsikanesajjikādivasena opakkamikāhipi vedanāhi lokuttaramaggassa adhigamo. Aññassa rukkhassa sukkhasākhāya saddhiṃ ghaṃsanamatteneva aggino abhinibbattanaṃ viya vināpi opakkamikāhi vedanāhi sukhāyeva paṭipadāya lokuttaramaggassa adhigamoti. Ayaṃ upamā bhagavatā attano atthāya āhaṭā.
377 377. 现在,为了显示自己修过的难行苦行,世尊说出“tassa mayhaṃ”等话。那么,世尊不修苦行就不能成佛吗?无论修不修苦行,他都能成佛。那他又为什么修呢?因为世尊想:“我要向包括天在内的世间展示自己的精进力,这份精进力会让我生起极大的欢喜。”就像一位刹帝利虽然坐在宫殿里继承了世代相传的王位,也不会像他率领军队、在战场上经过两三次交锋、击破敌人而夺得王位时那样欢喜。因为当他享受夺得王位后的荣华、环顾四周众人时,回想起自己当初的奋斗,心里想:“我在某个地方做了那些事,这样射穿了某个敌人,那样打击了某个敌人,才得到今天这份王位荣华。”这样想时,心中就会生起强烈的喜悦。同样,世尊也想:“我要向包括天在内的世间展示自己的精进力,这份精进力会让我极其欢喜,令喜悦生起。”所以他修了难行苦行。巴利
377. Idāni attano dukkarakārikaṃ dassento, tassa mayhantiādimāha. Kiṃ pana bhagavā dukkaraṃ akatvā buddho bhavituṃ na samatthoti? Katvāpi akatvāpi samatthova. Atha kasmā akāsīti? Sadevakassa lokassa attano parakkamaṃ dassessāmi. So ca maṃ vīriyanimmathanaguṇo hāsessatīti. Pāsāde nisinnoyeva hi paveṇiāgataṃ rajjaṃ labhitvāpi khattiyo na tathāpamudito hoti, yathā balakāyaṃ gahetvā saṅgāme dve tayo sampahāre datvā amittamathanaṃ katvā pattarajjo. Evaṃ pattarajjassa hi rajjasiriṃ anubhavantassa parisaṃ oloketvā attano parakkamaṃ anussaritvā, ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne asukakammaṃ katvā asukañca asukañca amittaṃ evaṃ vijjhitvā evaṃ paharitvā imaṃ rajjasiriṃ pattosmī’’ti cintayato balavasomanassaṃ uppajjati. Evamevaṃ bhagavāpi sadevakassa lokassa parakkamaṃ dassessāmi, so hi maṃ parakkamo ativiya hāsessati, somanassaṃ uppādessatīti dukkaramakāsi.
而且,他这样做也是出于对后世众生的怜悯。因为后世众生会想:正自觉者圆满了百千劫再加四阿僧祇的巴拉密,尚且还要精勤修行才证得一切知智,何况是我们呢?这样一想,他们就会认为自己也该精勤修行,从而很快终结生老病死。正是出于对后世众生的怜悯,他才这样做了。巴利
Apica pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamānopi akāsiyeva, pacchimā hi janatā sammāsambuddho kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvāpi padhānaṃ padahitvāva sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ patto, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayanti padhānavīriyaṃ kattabbaṃ maññissati; evaṃ sante khippameva jātijarāmaraṇassa antaṃ karissatīti pacchimaṃ janataṃ anukampamāno akāsiyeva.
把上齿放在下齿上,就是“齿与齿相合”。以善心对抗不善心,就是“以心制心”。“应当制伏”就是应当压制、降伏。“应当压制”就是应当压伏、抑制。“应当令其热恼”就是让它热恼、痛苦,也就是以精进之力去磨炼它。“有热恼的”就是带有不安、烦热。“被精进所逼的”就是被精勤之力所逼迫、贯穿的心。巴利
Dantebhidantamādhāyāti heṭṭhādante uparidantaṃ ṭhapetvā. Cetasā cittanti kusalacittena akusalacittaṃ. Abhiniggaṇheyyanti niggaṇheyyaṃ. Abhinippīḷeyyanti nippīḷeyyaṃ. Abhisantāpeyyanti tāpetvā vīriyanimmathanaṃ kareyyaṃ. Sāraddhoti sadaratho. Padhānābhitunnassāti padhānena abhitunnassa, viddhassa satoti attho.
378 “没有呼吸的”就是没有气息。“铁匠的风箱管”是指铁匠用来鼓风的管子。所谓“头痛生起”,是说体内的风无处排出,于是引发强烈的头痛。“应当给予头部包扎”就是应当用布把头缠裹起来。“天神”是指住在菩萨经行道尽头以及叶屋附近一带的天神。巴利
378.Appāṇakanti nirassāsakaṃ. Kammāragaggariyāti kammārassa gaggaranāḷiyā. Sīsavedanā hontīti kutoci nikkhamituṃ alabhamānehi vātehi samuṭṭhāpitā balavatiyo sīsavedanā honti. Sīsaveṭhaṃ dadeyyāti sīsaveṭhanaṃ dadeyya. Devatāti bodhisattassa caṅkamanakoṭiyaṃ paṇṇasālapariveṇasāmantā ca adhivatthā devatā.
那时据说,菩萨身上生起了极其强烈的灼热感,随即昏厥过去。他就坐在经行处倒了下去。天神们看到这一幕,有的这样说:“这不过是阿拉汉安住时的威仪罢了。”他们是抱着“所谓阿拉汉,就是像这样如同死人一般”的见解才这么说的。其中,那些说“他死了”的天神,就跑去禀告苏托达那大王说:“您的儿子死了。”大王问:“我的儿子是成佛之后死的,还是没成佛就死了?”他们回答:“他没能成佛,就在精进修行的地方倒下死了。”大王说:“我不信。我的儿子还没证得菩提就死去,这种事绝不可能有。”巴利
Tadā kira bodhisattassa adhimatte kāyadāhe uppanne mucchā udapādi. So caṅkameva nisinno hutvā papati. Taṃ disvā devatā evamāhaṃsu – ‘‘vihārotveva so arahato’’ti, ‘‘arahanto nāma evarūpā honti matakasadisā’’ti laddhiyā vadanti. Tattha yā devatā ‘‘kālaṅkato’’ti āhaṃsu, tā gantvā suddhodanamahārājassa ārocesuṃ – ‘‘tumhākaṃ putto kālaṅkato’’ti. Mama putto buddho hutvā kālaṅkato, no ahutvāti? Buddho bhavituṃ nāsakkhi, padhānabhūmiyaṃyeva patitvā kālaṅkatoti. Nāhaṃ saddahāmi, mama puttassa bodhiṃ apatvā kālaṅkiriyā nāma natthīti.
后来,正自觉者转法轮之后,次第游行到了王舍城,又回到迦毗罗卫。苏托达那大王接过世尊的钵,迎请到宫殿里,供养了粥和点心。在两次用斋之间的休息时间,大王把这件事告诉了世尊:“世尊,您精勤修行的时候,有天神跑来对我说:‘大王,您的儿子死了。’”世尊问:“大王,您相信吗?”
“世尊,我不信。”世尊说:“大王,如今您从接受梦兆开始,就一直看到种种稀有之事,怎么会相信呢?我也成了佛陀,您也成了佛陀的父亲。可是从前我智慧还没成熟、还在行菩萨道的时候,也就是做为大护法王子的那一世,我外出学习技艺,有人拿来山羊的骨头给您看,说:‘您的儿子大护法王子死了,这是他的骨头。’那时您也说过:‘我的儿子绝不可能中途夭折,我不信。’大王啊。”世尊就以这件事为因缘,讲说了《大护法本生》。巴利
Aparabhāge sammāsambuddhassa dhammacakkaṃ pavattetvā anupubbena rājagahaṃ gantvā kapilavatthuṃ anuppattassa suddhodanamahārājā pattaṃ gahetvā pāsādaṃ āropetvā yāgukhajjakaṃ datvā antarābhattasamaye etamatthaṃ ārocesi – tumhākaṃ bhagavā padhānakaraṇakāle devatā āgantvā, ‘‘putto te, mahārāja, kālaṅkato’’ti āhaṃsūti. Kiṃ saddahasi mahārājāti? Na bhagavā saddahinti. Idāni, mahārāja, supinappaṭiggahaṇato paṭṭhāya acchariyāni passanto kiṃ saddahissasi? Ahampi buddho jāto, tvampi buddhapitā jāto, pubbe pana mayhaṃ aparipakke ñāṇe bodhicariyaṃ carantassa dhammapālakumārakālepi sippaṃ uggahetuṃ gatassa, ‘‘tumhākaṃ putto dhammapālakumāro kālaṅkato, idamassa aṭṭhī’’ti eḷakaṭṭhiṃ āharitvā dassesuṃ, tadāpi tumhe, ‘‘mama puttassa antarāmaraṇaṃ nāma natthi, nāhaṃ saddahāmī’’ti avocuttha, mahārājāti imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā bhagavā mahādhammapālajātakaṃ kathesi.
379 “亲爱的,别这样。”他们这样说是出于亲爱之情。据说,天神们表达亲爱、可意的称呼,就是“亲爱的”。“不可食用的”是指不能吃的东西。“我说够了”,意思是“停下来吧”,就是说“够了,别再这样做了,我会维持下去的”,这是在表示拒绝、制止。巴利
379.Mākho tvaṃ mārisāti sampiyāyamānā āhaṃsu. Devatānaṃ kirāyaṃ piyamanāpavohāro, yadidaṃ mārisāti. Ajajjitanti abhojanaṃ. Halanti vadāmīti alanti vadāmi, alaṃ iminā evaṃ mā karittha, yāpessāmahanti evaṃ paṭisedhemīti attho.
380-1 “像鲶鱼一样的肤色”,就是像鲶鱼皮那样的肤色。“这就是极限”,意思是:对那些受来说,这就是它们的极限、最高、衡量的标准。在父亲净饭王的耕作处……中略……成就初禅而住:据说,国王举行播种吉祥日那天,会准备各种嚼食和饭食。他们让人清扫城里的街道,摆上满水罐,竖起旗帜、幡幢等,把整座城市装饰得像天宫一样。所有奴隶、仆役、工人等都穿上新衣,用香、花鬘等装饰好,聚集到王宫来。国王的耕作处要套上十万张犁。但那天他们只套了少一张的八百张犁。所有犁连同牛轭和缰绳,都像生闻婆罗门的马车一样用白银镶边。国王手扶的那张犁用红金镶边。牛角、缰绳和刺棒也都用黄金镶边。国王在大批随从簇拥下出发,也带着儿子一同前去。巴利
380-1.Maṅguracchavīti maṅguramacchacchavi. Etāva paramanti tāsampi vedanānametaṃyeva paramaṃ, uttamaṃ pamāṇaṃ. Pitu sakkassa kammante…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharitāti rañño kira vappamaṅgaladivaso nāma hoti, tadā anekappakāraṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādenti. Nagaravīthiyo sodhāpetvā puṇṇaghaṭe ṭhapāpetvā dhajapaṭākādayo ussāpetvā sakalanagaraṃ devavimānaṃ viya alaṅkaronti. Sabbe dāsakammakarādayo ahatavatthanivatthā gandhamālādipaṭimaṇḍitā rājakule sannipatanti. Rañño kammante naṅgalasatasahassaṃ yojīyati. Tasmiṃ pana divase ekena ūnaṃ aṭṭhasataṃ yojenti. Sabbanaṅgalāni saddhiṃ balibaddarasmiyottehi jāṇussoṇissa ratho viya rajataparikkhittāni honti. Rañño ālambananaṅgalaṃ rattasuvaṇṇaparikkhittaṃ hoti. Balibaddānaṃ siṅgānipi rasmipatodāpi suvaṇṇaparikkhittā honti. Rājā mahāparivārena nikkhamanto puttaṃ gahetvā agamāsi.
在耕作的地方,有一棵阎浮树,枝叶茂密,树荫浓密。人们在树下给王子铺好卧具,在上面挂起绣有金星的华盖,用布幔围起来作屏障,又安排了守卫。国王佩戴好全套装饰,被大臣们簇拥着,前往犁田的地方。到了那里,国王拿起金犁,大臣们则拿起少一的八百具银犁,四处犁地。国王从田的这边犁到那边,或者从那边犁回这边。这个地方场面极为盛大。原本围着菩萨坐的保姆们心想“我们也去看看国王那边的盛况吧”,就从布幔里走了出去。菩萨环顾四周,没看到任何人,便迅速起身,盘腿而坐,摄持入出息念,证入初禅。保姆们流连于各种吃的喝的东西之间,稍微耽搁了一会儿。这时,其他树的树影都移走了,唯独这棵阎浮树的树影保持着完整的圆形,停在那里不动。保姆们这才想起“少主还独自一人呢”,赶忙掀起布幔进去,看到菩萨在床上盘腿坐着,又看到这个神变,便跑去报告国王:“王上,王子这样坐着,其他树的树影都移走了,只有阎浮树的树影还呈圆形停在那里。”国王急忙赶来,亲眼看到这个神变后,向儿子礼敬说:“孩子,这是我对你的第二次顶礼。”就是针对这件事才说:“在父亲净饭王的耕作处……乃至……证入初禅而住。”那么,这会不会是通向觉悟的道路呢?这入出息念初禅,会不会是觉悟之道呢?所谓“随念而起的识”,这并不是通向觉悟之道,而入出息念初禅才是。这样,在一两次生起的正念之后紧接着生起的识,就叫做“随念而起的识”。所谓“那种乐”,就是指入出息念初禅的乐。巴利
Kammantaṭṭhāne eko jamburukkho bahalapattapalāso sandacchāyo ahosi. Tassa heṭṭhā kumārassa sayanaṃ paññapetvā upari suvaṇṇatārakakhacitaṃ vitānaṃ bandhāpetvā sāṇipākārena parikkhipāpetvā ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā rājā sabbālaṅkāraṃ alaṅkaritvā amaccagaṇaparivuto naṅgalakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Tattha rājā suvaṇṇanaṅgalaṃ gaṇhāti. Amaccā ekenūnaaṭṭhasatarajatanaṅgalāni gahetvā ito cito ca kasanti. Rājā pana orato pāraṃ gacchati, pārato vā oraṃ gacchati. Etasmiṃ ṭhāne mahāsampatti hoti, bodhisattaṃ parivāretvā nisinnā dhātiyo rañño sampattiṃ passissāmāti antosāṇito bahi nikkhantā. Bodhisatto ito cito ca olokento kañci adisvā vegena uṭṭhāya pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ānāpāne pariggahetvā paṭhamajjhānaṃ nibbattesi. Dhātiyo khajjabhojjantare vicaramānā thokaṃ cirāyiṃsu, sesarukkhānaṃ chāyā nivattā, tassa pana rukkhassa parimaṇḍalā hutvā aṭṭhāsi. Dhātiyo ayyaputto ekakoti vegena sāṇiṃ ukkhipitvā anto pavisamānā bodhisattaṃ sayane pallaṅkena nisinnaṃ tañca pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā gantvā rañño ārocayiṃsu – ‘‘kumāro deva, evaṃ nisinno aññesaṃ rukkhānaṃ chāyā nivattā, jamburukkhassa parimaṇḍalā ṭhitā’’ti. Rājā vegenāgantvā pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā, ‘‘idaṃ te, tāta, dutiyaṃ vandana’’nti puttaṃ vandi. Idametaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘pitu sakkassa kammante…pe… paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharitā’’ti. Siyā nu kho eso maggo bodhāyāti bhaveyya nu kho etaṃ ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānaṃ bujjhanatthāya maggoti. Satānusāriviññāṇanti nayidaṃ bodhāya maggo bhavissati, ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānaṃ pana bhavissatīti evaṃ ekaṃ dve vāre uppannasatiyā anantaraṃ uppannaviññāṇaṃ satānusāriviññāṇaṃ nāma. Yaṃ taṃ sukhanti yaṃ taṃ ānāpānassatipaṭhamajjhānasukhaṃ.
382 他们“现前侍奉”,是指通过打扫叶屋、清扫周边等日常事务来服侍。“追求丰足”是指在资具方面贪求丰裕。“回转于丰足”,是指他们变成贪着美味的人,为了得到精致的团食等供养而回转于丰足。他们“厌离而离去”,是指他们感到厌烦、不乐,便顺着法性离去。这其实是为了在菩萨证悟正觉时,给他提供身远离的机会,他们才随法性而去。他们离开时并没有去别的地方,而是直接去了波罗奈。他们离去后,菩萨获得了半个月的身远离,得以在菩提座那不可征服的金刚座上坐下,证悟了一切知智。巴利
382.Paccupaṭṭhitā hontīti paṇṇasālapariveṇasammajjanādivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhitā honti. Bāhullikoti paccayabāhulliko. Āvatto bāhullāyāti rasagiddho hutvā paṇītapiṇḍapātādīnaṃ atthāya āvatto. Nibbijja pakkamiṃsūti ukkaṇṭhitvā dhammaniyāmeneva pakkantā bodhisattassa sambodhiṃ pattakāle kāyavivekassa okāsadānatthaṃ dhammatāya gatā. Gacchantā ca aññaṭṭhānaṃ agantvā bārāṇasimeva agamaṃsu. Bodhisatto tesu gatesu addhamāsaṃ kāyavivekaṃ labhitvā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisīditvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ paṭivijjhi.
383 “已离诸欲……”等句,应当依照《怖畏经》里所说的方式去理解。巴利
383.Vivicceva kāmehītiādi bhayabherave vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
387 “我确实还记得”——这是一个单独的连结。据说,尼乾子当时这样想:“我向沙门乔达摩问了一个问题,沙门乔达摩却只是说‘阿吉韦萨那,还有别的吗?阿吉韦萨那,还有别的吗?’始终不给个结论,只顾说个不停。他是不是生气了?”于是,世尊为了说明“阿吉韦萨那,当如来向成百上千的大众说法时,没有一个人会说‘沙门乔达摩生气了’;如来说法,纯粹是为了让别人觉悟、让别人证悟”,而开始了这段法谈。这里的“开始”,指的就是这个连结。“只为此”,是对目的、作用和范围的限定与确认。这段话的意思是:让别人了知,正是如来说法的目的。所以,他不是只为一个人说,只要有多少能了知的人,他就为所有人说。那么,“于那先前”又说明了什么呢?据说,萨恰咖当时这样想:“沙门乔达摩相貌端严、令人信服,牙齿齐密,舌头柔软,言语甜美,大概是为了讨大众欢心才四处游化吧,其实他内心并没有真正的专注统一。”于是,世尊为了说明“阿吉韦萨那,如来并不是为了讨大众欢心才四处游化;即使面对遍满整个轮围世界的大众,如来说法时也毫不怯弱、毫无染着,独自安住,专注于空果等至”,才这样说了。巴利
387.Abhijānāmi kho panāhanti ayaṃ pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Nigaṇṭho kira cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ ekaṃ pañhaṃ pucchiṃ. Samaṇo gotamo ‘aparāpi maṃ, aggivessana, aparāpi maṃ, aggivessanā’ti pariyosānaṃ adassento kathetiyeva. Kupito nu kho’’ti? Atha bhagavā, aggivessana , tathāgate anekasatāya parisāya dhammaṃ desente kupito samaṇo gotamoti ekopi vattā natthi, paresaṃ bodhanatthāya paṭivijjhanatthāya eva tathāgato dhammaṃ desetīti dassento imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha ārabbhāti sandhāya. Yāvadevāti payojanavidhi paricchedaniyamanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – paresaṃ viññāpanameva tathāgatassa dhammadesanāya payojanaṃ, tasmā na ekasseva deseti, yattakā viññātāro atthi, sabbesaṃ desetīti. Tasmiṃyeva purimasminti iminā kiṃ dassetīti? Saccako kira cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo abhirūpo pāsādiko suphusitaṃ dantāvaraṇaṃ, jivhā mudukā, madhuraṃ vākkaraṇaṃ, parisaṃ rañjento maññe vicarati, anto panassa cittekaggatā natthī’’ti. Atha bhagavā, aggivessana, na tathāgato parisaṃ rañjento vicarati, cakkavāḷapariyantāyapi parisāya tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, asallīno anupalitto ettakaṃ ekavihārī, suññataphalasamāpattiṃ anuyuttoti dassetuṃ evamāha.
内心,就是指所缘境本身。我让它平息,就是使它安静下来。因为当大众发出赞叹声的那一刻,如来就以先前的决意划定范围,进入果等至;就在赞叹声还没有中断的时候,他已经从等至中出来,从原来站的位置开始说法。诸佛的有分心流转非常迅速,所以在入息和出息之间也能进入等至。以此恒常安住,是说:我以那个空的果定恒常安住,我把心安置在那个定的所缘相上,使它专注入定。巴利
Ajjhattamevāti gocarajjhattameva. Sannisādemīti sannisīdāpemi, tathāgato hi yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ deti, tasmiṃ khaṇe pubbābhogena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, sādhukārasaddassa nigghose avicchinneyeva samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti, buddhānañhi bhavaṅgaparivāso lahuko hotīti assāsavāre passāsavāre samāpattiṃ samāpajjanti. Yena sudaṃ niccakappanti yena suññena phalasamādhinā niccakālaṃ viharāmi, tasmiṃ samādhinimitte cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi samādahāmīti dasseti.
可信就是值得相信。他这样接受了世尊的心一境性之后,现在把自己那套固执的见解当作核心,带来一个问题来问,于是说道:“乔达摩尊者确实记得白天睡觉的事。”就像一只狗,即使被人用不掺水的牛奶粥加酥油喂得肚子滚圆,一看到粪便,就没法不吃就走开;它即使不吃,闻一闻也会走过去;据说要是连闻都不闻就走,它的头就会痛。同样,这位导师从出家一直到漏尽,都在宣说像不掺水牛奶粥那样令人净信的法,这个人听了这样殊胜的法之后,对导师连一点点净信都没生起。所以他放不下那套固执的见解,没法不问那个带来的问题就走,于是这样说了。这里要说的是:昏沉睡眠确实是被阿拉汉道断尽的,一切漏尽者都是如此;但身体的疲劳,不管是有执受的身体还是无执受的身体,都会有。就像莲花、睡莲等,有时绽放,有时含苞;傍晚时有些树的叶子也会合拢,清晨又舒展开来。同样,有执受身体的疲劳本身,以及因疲劳而起的有分流,在这里被意指为“睡眠”,这种情况在漏尽者身上也会出现。世尊就是针对这一点,才说“我确实记得”等话。他们所说的“在痴住中”,就是指他们称之为痴住。巴利
Okappaniyametanti saddahaniyametaṃ. Evaṃ bhagavato ekaggacittataṃ sampaṭicchitvā idāni attano ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ānītapañhaṃ pucchanto abhijānāti kho pana bhavaṃ gotamo divā supitāti āha. Yathā hi sunakho nāma asambhinnakhīrapakkapāyasaṃ sappinā yojetvā udarapūraṃ bhojitopi gūthaṃ disvā akhāditvā gantuṃ na sakkā, akhādamāno ghāyitvāpi gacchati, aghāyitvāva gatassa kirassa sīsaṃ rujjati; evamevaṃ imassapi satthā asambhinnakhīrapakkapāyasasadisaṃ abhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya yāva āsavakkhayā pasādanīyaṃ dhammadesanaṃ deseti. Etassa pana evarūpaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā satthari pasādamattampi na uppannaṃ, tasmā ovaṭṭikasāraṃ katvā ānītapañhaṃ apucchitvā gantuṃ asakkonto evamāha. Tattha yasmā thinamiddhaṃ sabbakhīṇāsavānaṃ arahattamaggeneva pahīyati, kāyadaratho pana upādinnakepi hoti anupādinnakepi. Tathā hi kamaluppalādīni ekasmiṃ kāle vikasanti, ekasmiṃ makulāni honti, sāyaṃ kesañci rukkhānampi pattāni patilīyanti, pāto vipphārikāni honti. Evaṃ upādinnakassa kāyassa darathoyeva darathavasena bhavaṅgasotañca idha niddāti adhippetaṃ, taṃ khīṇāsavānampi hoti. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘abhijānāmaha’’ntiādimāha. Sammohavihārasmiṃ vadantīti sammohavihāroti vadanti.
389 “碰触、碰触”就是反复地碰、反复地撞。“带着所说的”就是带着那些话来说。“以言语”就是用言辞。“欢喜之后又随喜”:心里以“够了”的想法接受,就是欢喜;又用言语称赞,就是随喜。世尊为这位尼干陀讲了两部经。前一部经有一个诵分,这一部有一个半诵分。这样,他听了足足两个半诵分,可这位尼干陀既没有证得现观,也没有出家,更没有皈依三宝。那么,世尊为什么还为他说法呢?是为了给未来种下熏习。因为世尊看到:“这个人现在还没有证悟的助缘,但在我般涅槃后两百多年,教法会在铜掌岛建立起来。那时,他会投生在一户良善人家,到了适当的时机出家,学通全部三藏佛语,增长观智,最终证得与无碍解俱的阿拉汉果,成为一位名叫黑佛护的大漏尽者。”世尊正是看到了这一点,为了给未来种下熏习而为他说法。巴利
389.Āsajja āsajjāti ghaṭṭetvā ghaṭṭetvā. Upanītehīti upanetvā kathitehi. Vacanappathehīti vacanehi. Abhinanditvā anumoditvāti alanti cittena sampaṭicchanto abhinanditvā vācāyapi pasaṃsanto anumoditvā. Bhagavatā imassa nigaṇṭhassa dve suttāni kathitāni. Purimasuttaṃ eko bhāṇavāro, idaṃ diyaḍḍho, iti aḍḍhatiye bhāṇavāre sutvāpi ayaṃ nigaṇṭho neva abhisamayaṃ patto, na pabbajito, na saraṇesu patiṭṭhito. Kasmā etassa bhagavā dhammaṃ desesīti? Anāgate vāsanatthāya. Passati hi bhagavā, ‘‘imassa idāni upanissayo natthi, mayhaṃ pana parinibbānato samadhikānaṃ dvinnaṃ vassasatānaṃ accayena tambapaṇṇidīpe sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhahissati. Tatrāyaṃ kulaghare nibbattitvā sampatte kāle pabbajitvā tīṇi piṭakāni uggahetvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā kāḷabuddharakkhito nāma mahākhīṇāsavo bhavissatī’’ti. Idaṃ disvā anāgate vāsanatthāya dhammaṃ desesi.
他后来也是这样:就在铜掌岛,教法已经建立的时候,他从天界命终,投生到南山寺乞食村里一户大臣家中。到了能出家的年纪,他出家了,学通了全部三藏佛语,带着徒众,被大比丘僧团围绕着,去拜见亲教师。这时亲教师想:我要警策一下这位共住弟子。可是看见他学通三藏后来到自己跟前,却连一句话也没说。他在天亮时分起身,走到长老面前问:尊者,我学完了那些著作之后来见您,您却连一句话也没跟我说,我有什么过错吗?长老说:贤友佛护,你就凭这么一点程度,就觉得自己出家的任务已经到顶了吗?他说:尊者,那我该怎么做?你要把徒众遣散,斩断那些戏论,去支提山寺,好好修沙门法。他听从亲教师的教诫,最终证得与无碍解俱的阿拉汉果,成为有大福德的人,受到国王恭敬供养,被大比丘僧团围绕着,住在支提山寺。巴利
Sopi tattheva tambapaṇṇidīpamhi sāsane patiṭṭhite devalokato cavitvā dakkhiṇagirivihārassa bhikkhācāragāme ekasmiṃ amaccakule nibbatto pabbajjāsamatthayobbane pabbajitvā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā gaṇaṃ pariharanto mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto upajjhāyaṃ passituṃ agamāsi. Athassa upajjhāyo saddhivihārikaṃ codessāmīti tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā āgatena tena saddhiṃ mukhaṃ datvā kathāmattampi na akāsi. So paccūsasamaye vuṭṭhāya therassa santikaṃ gantvā, – ‘‘tumhe, bhante, mayi ganthakammaṃ katvā tumhākaṃ santikaṃ āgate mukhaṃ datvā kathāmattampi na karittha, ko mayhaṃ doso’’ti pucchi. Thero āha – ‘‘tvaṃ, āvuso, buddharakkhita ettakeneva ‘pabbajjākiccaṃ me matthakaṃ patta’nti saññaṃ karosī’’ti. Kiṃ karomi, bhanteti? Gaṇaṃ vinodetvā tvaṃ papañcaṃ chinditvā cetiyapabbatavihāraṃ gantvā samaṇadhammaṃ karohīti. So upajjhāyassa ovāde ṭhatvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ patvā puññavā rājapūjito hutvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro cetiyapabbatavihāre vasi.
那时,提萨大王正在举行伍波萨他仪式,住在支提山的王洞里。他事先跟那位长老的侍者比丘说好:“当我的尊者为我解答问题,或者说法的时候,你就给我一个信号。”有一天闻法日,那位长老被比丘僧团围绕着,登上迦塔卡支提的庭院,礼敬了支提塔之后,站在一棵黑昙布鲁树下。这时,一位常行乞食的长老比丘就《黑园经》里的一个问题向他请教。长老说:“贤友,今天不是闻法日吗?”
“是的,尊者,今天是闻法日。”
“那就拿个凳子来,我们就在这里坐下闻法吧。”于是大家在那棵树下为他铺好座位。长老先诵了开头的偈颂,然后开始讲《黑园经》。他那位年少的侍者就去给国王报了信。国王在开头偈颂还没诵完的时候就赶到了。到了之后,他以不为人识的装束,站在人群外围,就这样站了整整三更,通宵听法。当长老说到“这是世尊所说”的时候,他喊了一声“萨度”表示随喜。长老察觉后,问道:“大王,您是什么时候来的?”
“就在您开始诵开头偈颂的时候,尊者。”
“大王,您能做到这样,真不容易啊。”
“尊者,这不算难。我在此立誓:如果从尊者开始说法那一刻起,我哪怕有一个字走神了,就让我连刺棒尖所刺那么大的地方都不要有主权。”巴利
Tasmiñhi kāle tissamahārājā uposathakammaṃ karonto cetiyapabbate rājaleṇe vasati. So therassa upaṭṭhākabhikkhuno saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘yadā mayhaṃ ayyo pañhaṃ vissajjeti, dhammaṃ vā katheti, tadā me saññaṃ dadeyyāthā’’ti. Theropi ekasmiṃ dhammassavanadivase bhikkhusaṅghaparivāro kaṇṭakacetiyaṅgaṇaṃ āruyha cetiyaṃ vanditvā kāḷatimbarurukkhamūle aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ eko piṇḍapātikatthero kāḷakārāmasuttante pañhaṃ pucchi. Thero nanu, āvuso, ajja dhammassavanadivasoti āha. Āma, bhante, dhammassavanadivasoti. Tena hi pīṭhakaṃ ānetha, idheva nisinnā dhammassavanaṃ karissāmāti. Athassa rukkhamūle āsanaṃ paññapetvā adaṃsu. Thero pubbagāthā vatvā kāḷakārāmasuttaṃ ārabhi. Sopissa upaṭṭhākadaharo rañño saññaṃ dāpesi. Rājā pubbagāthāsu aniṭṭhitāsuyeva pāpuṇi. Patvā ca aññātakaveseneva parisante ṭhatvā tiyāmarattiṃ ṭhitakova dhammaṃ sutvā therassa, idamavoca bhagavāti vacanakāle sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Thero ñatvā, kadā āgatosi, mahārājāti pucchi. Pubbagāthā osāraṇakāleyeva, bhanteti. Dukkaraṃ te mahārāja, katanti. Nayidaṃ, bhante, dukkaraṃ, yadi pana me ayyassa dhammakathaṃ āraddhakālato paṭṭhāya ekapadepi aññavihitabhāvo ahosi, tambapaṇṇidīpassa patodayaṭṭhinitudanamattepi ṭhāne sāmibhāvo nāma me mā hotūti sapathamakāsi.
在那部经里,佛陀的功德被详细说明了,所以国王问道:“尊者,佛陀的功德就只有这些吗?还是另有其他?”我所说的,大王,比起未说的,只是极少一部分,未说的才是无量无数。“尊者,请打个比方吧。”
“大王,譬如在一片能播一千担种子的稻田里,从一个稻穗上得到的谷粒,比起其余所有稻穗上的谷粒,其余的谷粒要多得数不清;同样地,我所说的功德很少,其余未说的却非常多。”
“尊者,请再打个比方。”
“大王,又譬如恒河暴涨、水势汹涌,如果有人把针孔对着水流,从针孔穿过的水很少,剩下的水却极多;同样地,我所说的功德很少,其余未说的却非常多。”
“尊者,请再打个比方。”
“大王,这世上有一种叫遮陀迦的鸟,它们在天空中嬉戏飞翔。这种鸟体型很小,那么,这只鸟在天空中展开翅膀所占的地方大,还是剩下的虚空大?”
“尊者,您说什么呢?它展开翅膀所占的地方当然极小,剩下的虚空才是广大无边。”
“正是如此,大王,我所说的佛陀功德只是很少一点,其余未说的功德无量、无边、不可计量。”
“尊者,说得太好了!无边的佛陀功德,用无边的虚空来比喻,真是恰当。我们对尊者生起了信心,可是我们无法献上相称的供养。我这个穷苦的礼物——在这铜色大陆上,这片三百由旬的国土,我们献给尊者。”大王,你们已经表达了自己的信心,而我们把你们献出的国土还给你们,请大王依法公平地治理国家。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana sutte buddhaguṇā paridīpitā, tasmā rājā pucchi – ‘‘ettakāva, bhante, buddhaguṇā, udāhu aññepi atthī’’ti. Mayā kathitato, mahārāja, akathitameva bahu appamāṇanti. Upamaṃ, bhante, karothāti. Yathā, mahārāja , karīsasahassamatte sālikkhette ekasālisīsato avasesasālīyeva bahū, evaṃ mayā kathitaguṇā appā, avasesā bahūti. Aparampi, bhante, upamaṃ karothāti. Yathā, mahārāja, mahāgaṅgāya oghapuṇṇāya sūcipāsaṃ sammukhaṃ kareyya, sūcipāsena gataudakaṃ appaṃ, sesaṃ bahu, evameva mayā kathitaguṇā appā, avasesā bahūti. Aparampi, bhante, upamaṃ karothāti. Idha, mahārāja, cātakasakuṇā nāma ākāse kīḷantā vicaranti. Khuddakā sā sakuṇajāti, kiṃ nu kho tassa sakuṇassa ākāse pakkhapasāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ bahu, avaseso ākāso appoti? Kiṃ, bhante, vadatha, appo tassa pakkhapasāraṇokāso, avasesova bahūti. Evameva, mahārāja, appakā mayā buddhaguṇā kathitā, avasesā bahū anantā appameyyāti. Sukathitaṃ, bhante, anantā buddhaguṇā ananteneva ākāsena upamitā. Pasannā mayaṃ ayyassa, anucchavikaṃ pana kātuṃ na sakkoma. Ayaṃ me duggatapaṇṇākāro imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe imaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ rajjaṃ ayyassa demāti. Tumhehi, mahārāja, attano pasannākāro kato, mayaṃ pana amhākaṃ dinnaṃ rajjaṃ tumhākaṃyeva dema, dhammena samena rajjaṃ kārehi mahārājāti.
《小渴爱灭尽经》的注释巴利
7. Cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
390 如是我闻这句,说的是《小渴爱灭尽经》。其中,在东园鹿子母讲堂是指在名叫东园的寺院里,鹿子母的那座讲堂。这里有一段次第叙述:过去十万劫前,有一位近事女邀请莲华上佛,向以佛陀为首的比丘僧团供养了十万份布施,然后伏在佛足前发愿:“愿我未来能成为像您这样的佛陀的最上女侍者。”她在十万劫中于天界和人间轮转,到了我们这位世尊出世的时候,投生在跋迪亚城,在门达咖财主之子达那阇耶财主家中,于善慧夫人胎中结生。出生时,她被取名为毗舍佉。当世尊前往跋迪亚城时,她与五百名少女一同出迎,初次见面就证得入流果。后来,她嫁到舍卫城,进入鹿财主之子圆满增长王子的家。在那里,鹿财主把她放在母亲的位置上,因此她被称为鹿子母。巴利
390.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ. Tattha pubbārāme migāramātupāsādeti pubbārāmasaṅkhāte vihāre migāramātuyā pāsāde. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbīkathāatīte satasahassakappamatthake ekā upāsikā padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa satasahassaṃ dānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā, ‘‘anāgate tumhādisassa buddhassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā homī’’ti patthanamakāsi. Sā kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ceva manussesu ca saṃsaritvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle bhaddiyanagare meṇḍakaseṭṭhiputtassa dhanañjayassa seṭṭhino gahe sumanadeviyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātakāle cassā visākhāti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Sā yadā bhagavā bhaddiyanagaraṃ agamāsi, tadā pañcahi dārikāsatehi saddhiṃ bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ katvā paṭhamadassanamhiyeva sotāpannā ahosi. Aparabhāge sāvatthiyaṃ migāraseṭṭhiputtassa puṇṇavaḍḍhanakumārassa gehaṃ gatā, tattha naṃ migāraseṭṭhi mātiṭṭhāne ṭhapesi, tasmā migāramātāti vuccati.
毗舍佉要出嫁去夫家时,她的父亲为她打造了一件名叫“大藤蔓”的饰品。这件饰品用了四管金刚石、十一管珍珠、二十二管珊瑚、三十三管宝石,再加上其他七种宝物才做成。它戴在头上,一直垂到脚背;要五头大象的力气才抬得动,可这位女子却能把它戴在身上。后来她成了十力佛陀身边最亲近的侍者,便舍掉了那件饰品,拿出九千万钱财为世尊建寺院,在只有一迦梨沙那么大的地基上盖起了一座殿宇。这座殿宇上层有五百个房间,下层也有五百个,总共一千个房间,装饰得很庄严。她想:“只有一座殿宇,看起来还不够气派。”于是又在它周围建了五百座双顶屋、五百座小殿宇、五百座长厅。寺院的落成庆典花了四个月才办完。巴利
Patikulaṃ gacchantiyā cassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo upayogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷānaṃ dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo, iti etehi ca aññehi ca sattavaṇṇehi ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati, pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva naṃ itthī dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Sā aparabhāge dasabalassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā hutvā taṃ pasādhanaṃ vissajjetvā navahi koṭīhi bhagavato vihāraṃ kārayamānā karīsamatte bhūmibhāge pāsādaṃ kāresi. Tassa uparibhūmiyaṃ pañca gabbhasatāni honti, heṭṭhābhūmiyaṃ pañcāti gabbhasahassappaṭimaṇḍito ahosi. Sā ‘‘suddhapāsādova na sobhatī’’ti taṃ parivāretvā pañca dvikūṭagehasatāni, pañca cūḷapāsādasatāni, pañca dīghasālasatāni ca kārāpesi. Vihāramaho catūhi māsehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi.
像毗舍佉这样身为女人,在佛陀的教法中没有别的女人能像她那样舍弃财物;像给孤独长者这样身为男人,在佛陀的教法中也同样没有别的男人能像他那样舍弃财物。给孤独长者花了五亿四千万,在舍卫城南方一个类似阿努拉德普勒城大寺的地方,建了一座叫祇园大精舍的寺院。毗舍佉则在舍卫城东方一个类似最胜天妃寺的地方,建了一座叫东园的寺院。世尊为了怜悯这两个家族,依舍卫城而住,在这两座寺院里轮流常驻:一个雨安居住在祇园,一个雨安居住在东园。而这个时候,世尊正住在东园。因此经文说“在东园鹿子母讲堂”。巴利
Mātugāmattabhāve ṭhitāya visākhāya viya aññissā buddhasāsane dhanapariccāgo nāma natthi, purisattabhāve ṭhitassa ca anāthapiṇḍikassa viya aññassa buddhasāsane dhanapariccāgo nāma natthi. So hi catupaññāsakoṭiyo vissajjetvā sāvatthiyā dakkhiṇabhāge anurādhapurassa mahāvihārasadise ṭhāne jetavanamahāvihāraṃ nāma kāresi. Visākhā, sāvatthiyā pācīnabhāge uttamadevīvihārasadise ṭhāne pubbārāmaṃ nāma kāresi. Bhagavā imesaṃ dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ anukampāya sāvatthiṃ nissāya viharanto imesu dvīsu vihāresu nibaddhavāsaṃ vasi. Ekaṃ antovassaṃ jetavane vasati, ekaṃ pubbārāme, etasmiṃ pana samaye bhagavā pubbārāme viharati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde’’ti.
“尊者,到底要到什么程度呢?”意思是:“尊者,究竟是以怎样的程度呢?”所谓“简要地说,成为渴爱灭尽而解脱者”,是指在渴爱灭尽——也就是涅槃——上取涅槃为所缘,以心得解脱,因此名为“渴爱灭尽而解脱者”。那么,简要地说,他到底怎样才成为这样的人呢?他是在问:请为我简要地开示那位漏尽比丘在此之前所修的行道,依靠这种行道,他成为渴爱灭尽而解脱者。
“究竟终点者”:因为超越了被称为坏灭、消逝的终点,所以称为“究竟的”;此人有究竟的终点,所以称为“究竟终点者”,义即决定终点者、恒常终点者。“究竟离轭安稳者”,也就是恒常离轭安稳者;“究竟梵行者”,也就是恒常梵行者;以先前同样的方式,“究竟终结者”即“此人有究竟之终结”之义。所谓“天与人中最胜者”,就是天与人类之中最胜、最上者。这样的比丘,要到什么程度才算呢?他请求世尊:“请尽快为他简要地开示行道。”为什么这位天王如此急切呢?因为他想享受游乐。巴利
Kittāvatānu kho, bhanteti kittakena nu kho, bhante. Saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hotīti taṇhāsaṅkhaye nibbāne taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā vimuttacittatāya taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto nāma saṃkhittena kittāvatā hoti? Yāya paṭipattiyā taṇhāsaṅkhayavimutto hoti, taṃ me khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ saṃkhittena desethāti pucchati. Accantaniṭṭhoti khayavayasaṅkhātaṃ antaṃ atītāti accantā. Accantā niṭṭhā assāti accantaniṭṭho, ekantaniṭṭho satataniṭṭhoti attho. Accantaṃ yogakkhemīti accantayogakkhemī, niccayogakkhemīti attho. Accantaṃ brahmacārīti accantabrahmacārī, niccabrahmacārīti attho. Accantaṃ pariyosānamassāti purimanayeneva accantapariyosāno. Seṭṭho devamanussānanti devānañca manussānañca seṭṭho uttamo. Evarūpo bhikkhu kittāvatā hoti, khippametassa saṅkhepeneva paṭipattiṃ kathethāti bhagavantaṃ yācati. Kasmā panesa evaṃ vegāyatīti? Kīḷaṃ anubhavitukāmatāya.
据说,这位天王先下令安排好游园娱乐,又让四大天王在四方守卫,然后在两重天界的天众簇拥下,带着两千五百万乐舞天女,骑上埃拉瓦纳白象,站在游园门口,仔细琢磨这个问题:“那位渴爱灭尽而解脱的漏尽者,简要来说,趣入之前的前行道到底是怎样的?”这时他心里想:“这个问题实在太殊胜了。如果我还没弄明白就进园子,被六门的各种所缘一搅,就再也不会去琢磨它了。游园娱乐先放一放吧,我先去大师那里请教这个问题,弄懂了之后再到园子里玩。”这么想完,他就从象背上消失,出现在世尊面前。那四大天王还守在原来安排的位置上,侍从天众、乐舞天女和龙王埃拉瓦纳也都还站在游园门口。就这样,他因为急着想去享乐,才说出了这番话。巴利
Ayaṃ kira uyyānakīḷaṃ āṇāpetvā catūhi mahārājūhi catūsu disāsu ārakkhaṃ gāhāpetvā dvīsu devalokesu devasaṅghena parivuto aḍḍhatiyāhi nāṭakakoṭīhi saddhiṃ erāvaṇaṃ āruyha uyyānadvāre ṭhito imaṃ pañhaṃ sallakkhesi – ‘‘kittakena nu kho taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttassa khīṇāsavassa saṅkhepato āgamaniyapubbabhāgapaṭipadā hotī’’ti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ pañho ativiya sassiriko, sacāhaṃ imaṃ pañhaṃ anuggaṇhitvāva uyyānaṃ pavisissāmi, chadvārikehi ārammaṇehi nimmathito na puna imaṃ pañhaṃ sallakkhessāmi , tiṭṭhatu tāva uyyānakīḷā, satthu santikaṃ gantvā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchitvā uggahitapañho uyyāne kīḷissāmī’’ti hatthikkhandhe antarahito bhagavato santike pāturahosi. Tepi cattāro mahārājāno ārakkhaṃ gahetvā ṭhitaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhitā, paricārikadevasaṅghāpi nāṭakānipi erāvaṇopi nāgarājā tattheva uyyānadvāre aṭṭhāsi, evamesa kīḷaṃ anubhavitukāmatāya vegāyanto evamāha.
“一切法都不足以执取”这句话里,“一切法”指的是五蕴、十二处、十八界。这一切,无论是以渴爱还是以邪见的方式去执取,都不够格、不胜任、不相应。为什么呢?因为它们不会按照被执取的样子保持下去。它们即使被执取为常,也终究会显现为无常;即使被执取为乐,也终究会显现为苦;即使被执取为我,也终究会显现为无我。所以,它们不足以执取。“胜知”,就是通过知遍知而了知无常、苦、无我。“遍知”,同样是通过度遍知而遍知。“任何受”,是指哪怕与五种识相应的、极其微细的任何感受。世尊以此说明:帝释天王是从受的角度出发,进而执取非色法。如果受的业处前面没有讲过,那就应该在这里讲。但前面已经讲过了,所以应当按照《念处经》里所说的方式来理解。“观无常者”这里,应当了知无常,应当了知无常随观,应当了知观无常者。其中,“无常”指五蕴,因为它们以生灭为特征,所以是无常。“无常随观”指以坏灭、消散的角度观见五蕴的智。“观无常者”指具备这种智的人。因此,“观无常者而住”的意思就是:以无常随观而住。这就是这里的含义。巴利
Sabbe dhammā nālaṃ abhinivesāyāti ettha sabbe dhammā nāma pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo. Te sabbepi taṇhādiṭṭhivasena abhinivesāya nālaṃ na pariyattā na samatthā na yuttā, kasmā? Gahitākārena atiṭṭhanato. Te hi niccāti gahitāpi aniccāva sampajjanti, sukhāti gahitāpi dukkhāva sampajjanti, attāti gahitāpi anattāva sampajjanti, tasmā nālaṃ abhinivesāya. Abhijānātīti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti ñātapariññāya abhijānāti. Parijānātīti tatheva tīraṇapariññāya parijānāti. Yaṃkiñci vedananti antamaso pañcaviññāṇasampayuttampi yaṃkiñci appamattakampi vedanaṃ anubhavati. Iminā bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa vedanāvasena nibbattetvā arūpapariggahaṃ dasseti. Sace pana vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ heṭṭhā na kathitaṃ bhaveyya, imasmiṃ ṭhāne kathetabbaṃ siyā. Heṭṭhā pana kathitaṃ, tasmā satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aniccānupassīti ettha aniccaṃ veditabbaṃ, aniccānupassanā veditabbā, aniccānupassī veditabbo. Tattha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā, te hi uppādavayaṭṭhena aniccā. Aniccānupassanāti pañcakkhandhānaṃ khayato vayato dassanañāṇaṃ. Aniccānupassīti tena ñāṇena samannāgato puggalo . Tasmā ‘‘aniccānupassī viharatī’’ti aniccato anupassanto viharatīti ayamettha attho.
“离贪随观”:这里的“离贪”有两种——灭尽离贪与究竟离贪。其中,依诸行的灭尽与坏灭而随观,属于离贪随观;以道智将究竟离贪的涅槃作为离贪来观见,也属于离贪随观。具足这两种的人,名为“离贪随观者”;针对他而说“离贪随观”,意思就是以离贪来随观。“灭随观”也应如此理解,因为灭也有两种:灭尽灭与究竟灭。
“舍遣随观”:这里“舍遣”指放舍,放舍有两种:遍舍放舍与趣入放舍。其中,遍舍放舍指观,因为它以彼分断的方式舍弃烦恼与蕴;趣入放舍指道,因为它以涅槃为所缘而趣入。或者,依两种理由都只是放舍:以正断的方式舍弃诸蕴与烦恼,以及趣入涅槃。因此,舍弃烦恼与蕴,就是遍舍放舍;在灭中,心趣入涅槃界,就是趣入放舍。这两者在道上都相应。具足这两者的人,因为具备这舍遣随观,就叫作“舍遣随观者”;针对这个人而说“舍遣随观”。不执取世间任何事物,就是不执取、不抓取、不执著任何一行法为渴爱所使。不执取则不战栗,不抓取者不以渴爱而战栗。唯就自身而般涅槃,就是自己以烦恼般涅槃而般涅槃。以“生已尽”等语,则显示了他的省察。如是,世尊被帝释天王简要询问漏尽比丘的前行道后,使其轻松,便简要快速地开示了。巴利
Virāgānupassīti ettha dve virāgā khayavirāgo ca accantavirāgo ca. Tattha saṅkhārānaṃ khayavayato anupassanāpi, accantavirāgaṃ nibbānaṃ virāgato dassanamaggañāṇampi virāgānupassanā. Tadubhayasamāṅgīpuggalo virāgānupassī nāma, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘virāgānupassī’’ti, virāgato anupassantoti attho. Nirodhānupassimhipi eseva nayo, nirodhopi hi khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cāti duvidhoyeva. Paṭinissaggānupassīti ettha paṭinissaggo vuccati vossaggo, so ca pariccāgavossaggo pakkhandanavossaggoti duvidho hoti . Tattha pariccāgavossaggoti vipassanā, sā hi tadaṅgavasena kilese ca khandhe ca vossajjati. Pakkhandanavossaggoti maggo, so hi nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇato pakkhandati. Dvīhipi vā kāraṇehi vossaggoyeva, samucchedavasena khandhānaṃ kilesānañca vossajjanato, nibbānañca pakkhandanato. Tasmā kilese ca khandhe ca pariccajatīti pariccāgavossaggo, nirodhe nibbānadhātuyā cittaṃ pakkhandatīti pakkhandanavossaggoti ubhayampetaṃ magge sameti. Tadubhayasamaṅgīpuggalo imāya paṭinissaggānupassanāya samannāgatattā paṭinissaggānupassī nāma hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaggānupassī’’ti. Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti kiñci ekampi saṅkhāragataṃ taṇhāvasena na upādiyati na gaṇhāti na parāmasati. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti aggaṇhanto taṇhāparitassanāya na paritassati. Paccattaññeva parinibbāyatīti sayameva kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati. Khīṇā jātītiādinā panassa paccavekkhaṇāva dassitā. Iti bhagavā sakkassa devānamindassa saṃkhittena khīṇāsavassa pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ pucchito sallahukaṃ katvā saṃkhitteneva khippaṃ kathesi.
391 坐在不远处:就是坐在紧挨着的尖顶屋里。已通达:就是以智慧到达、了知,意思是已经知道。这里说的是:他到底是知道了才随喜,还是不知道就随喜呢?那他为什么会有这样的想法?据说,长老并没有听到世尊回答问题的声音,只听到帝释天王随喜的声音:“世尊确实是这样,善逝确实是这样!”据说帝释天王是大声随喜的。那为什么没听到世尊的声音呢?因为佛陀说法是随应听众各自所能理解的范围。诸佛说法时,声音能传到以整个轮围为边界那么大的听众范围,但不会超出这个边界哪怕一指节远。为什么呢?是为了让这样甜美的说法不至于白白散失。那时,世尊坐在鹿子母讲堂七宝尖顶屋内的宝室中,舍利弗长老住的尖顶屋在世尊右边,大目犍连的尖顶屋在左边,中间连一条缝隙都没有,所以长老没听到世尊的声音,只听到了帝释天神的声音。巴利
391.Avidūre nisinno hotīti anantare kūṭāgāre nisinno hoti. Abhisameccāti ñāṇena abhisamāgantvā, jānitvāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kiṃ nu kho esa jānitvā anumodi, udāhu ajānitvā vāti. Kasmā panassa evamahosīti? Thero kira na bhagavato pañhavissajjanasaddaṃ assosi, sakkassa pana devarañño, ‘‘evametaṃ bhagavā evametaṃ sugatā’’ti anumodanasaddaṃ assosi. Sakko kira devarājā mahatā saddena anumodi. Atha kasmā na bhagavato saddaṃ assosīti? Yathāparisaviññāpakattā. Buddhānañhi dhammaṃ kathentānaṃ ekābaddhāya cakkavāḷapariyantāyapi parisāya saddo suyyati, pariyantaṃ pana muñcitvā aṅgulimattampi bahiddhā na niccharati. Kasmā? Evarūpā madhurakathā mā niratthakā agamāsīti. Tadā bhagavā migāramātupāsāde sattaratanamaye kūṭāgāre sirigabbhamhi nisinno hoti, tassa dakkhiṇapasse sāriputtattherassa vasanakūṭāgāraṃ, vāmapasse mahāmoggallānassa, antare chiddavivarokāso natthi, tasmā thero na bhagavato saddaṃ assosi, sakkasseva assosīti.
“五百件乐器”是指五种乐器的五百件。所谓“五种乐器”,就是具备这五种组成部分的乐器:单面鼓、双面鼓、单双面鼓、吹孔乐器、打击乐器。其中,“单面鼓”是指蒙着皮革的鼓等只有一面鼓皮的乐器;“双面鼓”是两面都有鼓皮的;“单双面鼓”是绑着弦的帕纳瓦鼓等;“吹孔乐器”是竹笛等;“打击乐器”是铜钹等。“具足”就是拥有、具备。“成为具足者”是同一个意思的另一种说法。“享受”是指享受那种成就,在种种对象上放任感官活动。这里说的是:被五百件乐器围绕着演奏时,他具备这些乐器,享受天界的成就。“令退下”就是撤去,意思是让它们安静下来。就像现在有信心的国王们见到应受尊重的比丘时,会制止歌舞表演说:“某位尊者来了,孩子们,别唱了,别奏了,别跳了。”帝释天神见到长老时也这样做了。“朋友目犍连,你过了这么久才来啊”——这是世间人自然流露的亲切话语。世间人见到久别而来的人,即使对方以前从未来过,只要看起来令人欢喜,就会说:“您从哪儿来?您这么久才来啊?您怎么认得来这里的路?是不是迷路了?”等等。而这位长老因为以前来过,所以才那样说。长老确实时常去天界游历。那里的“你才来啊”就是“你才来一趟”。“你过了这么久才来这一趟”——意思是,尊者,你隔了这么久才来这一趟。“这个座位已经准备好了”——他让人铺好了一张一由旬大的宝石座,然后这样说道。巴利
Pañcahitūriyasatehīti pañcaṅgikānaṃ tūriyānaṃ pañcahi satehi. Pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ nāma ātataṃ vitataṃ ātatavitataṃ susiraṃ ghananti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Tattha ātataṃ nāma cammapariyonaddhesu bheriādīsu ekatalatūriyaṃ. Vitataṃ nāma ubhayatalaṃ. Ātatavitataṃ nāma tantibaddhapaṇavādi. Susiraṃ vaṃsādi. Ghanaṃ sammādi. Samappitoti upagato. Samaṅgībhūtoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paricāretīti taṃ sampattiṃ anubhavanto tato tato indriyāni cāreti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – parivāretvā vajjamānehi pañcahi tūriyasatehi samannāgato hutvā dibbasampattiṃ anubhavatī. Paṭipaṇāmetvāti apanetvā, nissaddāni kārāpetvāti attho. Yatheva hi idāni saddhā rājāno garubhāvaniyaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā – ‘‘asuko nāma ayyo āgacchati, mā, tātā, gāyatha, mā vādetha, mā naccathā’’ti nāṭakāni paṭivinenti, sakkopi theraṃ disvā evamakāsi. Cirassaṃ kho, mārisa moggallāna, imaṃ pariyāyamakāsīti evarūpaṃ loke pakatiyā piyasamudāhāravacanaṃ hoti, lokiyā hi cirassaṃ āgatampi anāgatapubbampi manāpajātiyaṃ āgataṃ disvā, – ‘‘kuto bhavaṃ āgato, cirassaṃ bhavaṃ āgato, kathaṃ te idhāgamanamaggo ñāto maggamūḷhosī’’tiādīni vadanti. Ayaṃ pana āgatapubbattāyeva evamāha. Thero hi kālena kālaṃ devacārikaṃ gacchatiyeva. Tattha pariyāyamakāsīti vāramakāsi. Yadidaṃ idhāgamanāyāti yo ayaṃ idhāgamanāya vāro, taṃ, bhante, cirassamakāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idamāsanaṃ paññattanti yojanikaṃ maṇipallaṅkaṃ paññapāpetvā evamāha.
392 “多事”和“多务”:这里,凡是事务繁多的人,就叫“多事”。“多务”只是同一个意思的另一种说法。“若以自己所应作的事”:其实自己应做的事很少、很微小,并不算多;但天神的事务却很多。从地面开始,为了如意树、天女等的事,诉讼一直闹到帝释天神面前。因此,他限定说:“尤其是,光是三十三天神的事务就已经够多了。”因为天神的女儿和儿子是生在膝上的,做足部侍奉的女子是生在床榻上的;为她们梳妆打扮的天女,是围绕着床榻出生的;做仆役服侍的,则生在宫殿里面。为了这些人,根本不会有诉讼。可是,那些出生在边界地区的天神,没办法判定“这是我的还是你的”,就吵起来,跑去问帝释天神。帝释天神就说:谁的宫殿更近,就归谁。如果两处位置一样近,就说:谁出生时是站着能看见宫殿的,就归谁。如果连一个都没在看,他为了平息双方的争执,就把那东西判归自己。针对这件事,他说:“尤其是,光是三十三天神的事务就已经够多了。”而且,像这样的娱乐活动,也算得上是他们该办的事。巴利
392.Bahukiccā bahukaraṇīyāti ettha yesaṃ bahūni kiccāni, te bahukiccā. Bahukaraṇīyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Appeva sakena karaṇīyenāti sakaraṇīyameva appaṃ mandaṃ, na bahu, devānaṃ karaṇīyaṃ pana bahu, pathavito paṭṭhāya hi kapparukkhamātugāmādīnaṃ atthāya aṭṭā sakkassa santike chijjanti, tasmā niyamento āha – apica devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyenāti. Devānañhi dhītā ca puttā ca aṅke nibbattanti, pādaparicārikā itthiyo sayane nibbattanti, tāsaṃ maṇḍanapasādhanakārikā devadhītā sayanaṃ parivāretvā nibbattanti, veyyāvaccakarā antovimāne nibbattanti, etesaṃ atthāya aṭṭakaraṇaṃ natthi. Ye pana sīmantare nibbattanti, te ‘‘mama santakā tava santakā’’ti nicchetuṃ asakkontā aṭṭaṃ karonti, sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ pucchanti, so yassa vimānaṃ āsannataraṃ, tassa santakoti vadati. Sace dvepi samaṭṭhāne honti, yassa vimānaṃ olokento ṭhito, tassa santakoti vadati. Sace ekampi na oloketi, taṃ ubhinnaṃ kalahupacchedanatthaṃ attano santakaṃ karoti. Taṃ sandhāya, ‘‘devānaṃyeva tāvatiṃsānaṃ karaṇīyenā’’ti āha. Apicassa evarūpaṃ kīḷākiccampi karaṇīyameva.
“为我们迅速消失”:也就是对我们来说,像黑暗中的色法一样迅速看不见了。这句话表明:“尊者,我没能记住那个问题的解答。”长老思惟:“为什么这个夜叉显出没记住的样子?他是在以侧边回避吗?”随后了知:“天神们确实极为愚痴。被六门的所缘不断搅扰时,连自己吃过没吃过、喝过没喝过都不知道,在这里所做的东西忘掉又有什么奇怪?”然而有些论师说:“长老对他来说是令人敬畏的,所以他害怕长老会责备:‘你刚从世间最殊胜者那里学得问题,现在就进入了歌舞伎乐之中’,因为害怕才这样说。”但这叫做欺诳,圣弟子不会有这样的欺诳。因此应知,他纯粹是因为愚痴才没有记住。那后来为什么又记住了呢?因为长老激发了他的喜悦与悚惧,为他除去了黑暗,所以他记住了。巴利
Yaṃno khippameva antaradhāyatīti yaṃ amhākaṃ sīghameva andhakāre rūpagataṃ viya na dissati. Iminā – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, taṃ pañhavissajjanaṃ na sallakkhemī’’ti dīpeti. Thero – ‘‘kasmā nu kho ayaṃ yakkho asallakkhaṇabhāvaṃ dīpeti, passena pariharatī’’ti āvajjanto – ‘‘devā nāma mahāmūḷhā honti. Chadvārikehi ārammaṇehi nimmathīyamānā attano bhuttābhuttabhāvampi pītāpītabhāvampi na jānanti, idha katamettha pamussantī’’ti aññāsi. Keci panāhu – ‘‘thero etassa garu bhāvaniyo, tasmā ‘idāneva loke aggapuggalassa santike pañhaṃ uggahetvā āgato, idāneva nāṭakānaṃ antaraṃ paviṭṭhoti evaṃ maṃ thero tajjeyyā’ti bhayena evamāhā’’ti. Etaṃ pana kohaññaṃ nāma hoti, na ariyasāvakassa evarūpaṃ kohaññaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā mūḷhabhāveneva na sallakkhesīti veditabbaṃ. Upari kasmā sallakkhesīti? Thero tassa somanassasaṃvegaṃ janayitvā tamaṃ nīhari, tasmā sallakkhesīti.
现在,帝释天神为了向长老讲述自己过去亲身经历的事,就说了“过去曾经……”这一段。其中,“聚集”是指集合起来、聚成一大堆。“阿修罗败了”是指阿修罗吃了败仗。那他们是什么时候败的呢?是在帝释天神投生的时候。据说,帝释天神在紧挨着的前一世,出生在摩揭陀国的玛卡拉村,是个名叫摩伽的青年。他聪明能干,行事就像菩萨的修行一样。他带着三十三个人一起行善。有一天,他自己用智慧观察后,把村子中央大家聚集处的垃圾从两边清走,把那地方弄得非常好看。接着又在那里盖了凉亭,后来随着时间推移,又盖了大堂。他还带着同伴们走出村子,走遍一由旬、半由旬、三由旬乃至一由旬的地方,把不平的地方弄平。他们所有人同心协力,在该架桥的地方架桥,在适合建凉亭、大堂、莲池、花环、树木等的地方就建凉亭等等,做了很多功德。摩伽圆满了七种誓戒后,身体坏灭时,和同伴们一起投生到了三十三天。巴利
Idāni sakko pubbe attano evaṃ bhūtakāraṇaṃ therassa ārocetuṃ bhūtapubbantiādimāha. Tattha samupabyūḷhoti sannipatito rāsibhūto. Asurā parājiniṃsūti asurā parājayaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Kadā panete parājitāti? Sakkassa nibbattakāle. Sakko kira anantare attabhāve magadharaṭṭhe macalagāme magho nāma māṇavo ahosi, paṇḍito byatto, bodhisattacariyā viyassa cariyā ahosi. So tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇamakāsi. Ekadivasaṃ attanova paññāya upaparikkhitvā gāmamajjhe mahājanassa sannipatitaṭṭhāne kacavaraṃ ubhayato apabbahitvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ atiramaṇīyamakāsi, puna tattheva maṇḍapaṃ kāresi, puna gacchante kāle sālaṃ kāresi. Gāmato ca nikkhamitvā gāvutampi aḍḍhayojanampi tigāvutampi yojanampi vicaritvā tehi sahāyehi saddhiṃ visamaṃ samaṃ akāsi. Te sabbepi ekacchandā tattha tattha setuyuttaṭṭhānesu setuṃ, maṇḍapasālāpokkharaṇīmālāgaccharopanādīnaṃ yuttaṭṭhānesu maṇḍapādīni karontā bahuṃ puññamakaṃsu . Magho satta vatapadāni pūretvā kāyassa bhedā saddhiṃ sahāyehi tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti.
那时,阿修罗众住在三十三天。他们和天人们寿命一样、容貌也一样。他们看见帝释天神和他的随从,以为这些是刚投生来的新天子,就备下了大量美酒。帝释天神对天子们示意说:“我们行善积德,并没有和这些人共同做过。你们不要喝这毒酒,只做个喝的样子就行。”他们照办了。那些愚笨的阿修罗喝了毒酒,醉倒后沉沉睡去。帝释天神吩咐天人们抓住他们的脚,把他们扔到须弥山脚下。须弥山下方有一个叫阿修罗居处的地方,大小和三十三天一样。阿修罗就住在那里。那里也有一棵叫心帕咤梨的树。当那棵树开花时,他们就知道:“这里不是三十三天,我们被帝释天神骗了。”他们喊着“抓住他们”,绕着须弥山往上爬,就像下雨时蚂蚁从蚁冢底部涌出来一样。在那里,有时是天人赢,有时是阿修罗赢。天人赢的时候,会把阿修罗一直追到海面;阿修罗赢的时候,会把天人一直追到栏楯脚下。不过在那场战斗中,是天人赢了,天人们把阿修罗一直追到海面。帝释天神把阿修罗赶跑后,在五个地方设了守卫。这样设好守卫后,又在栏楯脚下立了手持金刚杵的帝释天神像。阿修罗们时不时起来,看见那些像,心想“帝释天神正警醒地守着”,就从那里退回去了。从那里退回,就是从战败的地方退回。随从们,就是做花环、香等工作的侍女们。巴利
Tasmiṃ kāle asuragaṇā tāvatiṃsadevaloke paṭivasanti. Sabbe te devānaṃ samānāyukā samānavaṇṇā ca honti, te sakkaṃ saparisaṃ disvā adhunā nibbattā navakadevaputtā āgatāti mahāpānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko devaputtānaṃ saññaṃ adāsi – ‘‘amhehi kusalaṃ karontehi na parehi saddhiṃ sādhāraṇaṃ kataṃ, tumhe gaṇḍapānaṃ mā pivittha pītamattameva karothā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Bālaasurā gaṇḍapānaṃ pivitvā mattā niddaṃ okkamiṃsu. Sakko devānaṃ saññaṃ datvā te pādesu gāhāpetvā sinerupāde khipāpesi, sinerussa heṭṭhimatale asurabhavanaṃ nāma atthi, tāvatiṃsadevalokappamāṇameva. Tattha asurā vasanti. Tesampi cittapāṭali nāma rukkho atthi. Te tassa pupphanakāle jānanti – ‘‘nāyaṃ tāvatiṃsā, sakkena vañcitā maya’’nti. Te gaṇhatha nanti vatvā sineruṃ pariharamānā deve vuṭṭhe vammikapādato vammikamakkhikā viya abhiruhiṃsu. Tattha kālena devā jinanti, kālena asurā. Yadā devānaṃ jayo hoti, asure yāva samuddapiṭṭhā anubandhanti. Yadā asurānaṃ jayo hoti, deve yāva vedikapādā anubandhanti. Tasmiṃ pana saṅgāme devānaṃ jayo ahosi, devā asure yāva samuddapiṭṭhā anubandhiṃsu. Sakko asure palāpetvā pañcasu ṭhānesu ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Evaṃ ārakkhaṃ datvā vedikapāde vajirahatthā indapaṭimāyo ṭhapesi. Asurā kālena kālaṃ uṭṭhahitvā tā paṭimāyo disvā, ‘‘sakko appamatto tiṭṭhatī’’ti tatova nivattanti. Tato paṭinivattitvāti vijitaṭṭhānato nivattitvā. Paricārikāyoti mālāgandhādikammakārikāyo.
393 多闻天王:据说他是帝释天神的亲信,深得信任,所以跟帝释天神一起去了。令前导:就是让他走在前面。进入后:他们进去以后,把门半掩着,一边四处观看一边站着。目犍连贤友,请看这最胜殿的悦目之处;目犍连贤友,请看这最胜殿的种种悦目之处,请看金柱、银柱、宝珠柱、珊瑚柱、红宝石柱、猫眼石柱、珍珠柱、七宝所成诸柱,还有那些用金等材质做成的瓶状装饰和兽形雕刻等——帝释天神就这样从柱列等处开始,向目犍连展示宫殿的种种美妙,说出这番话。如彼过去所造福业:意思是,正如过去造过福业的人,其受用之处理应如此庄严,而它也确实如此庄严。这个夜叉极度沉醉:他在自己的宫殿里,因有歌舞伎乐围绕的富乐而极度放逸、极度陶醉。巴利
393.Vessavaṇo ca mahārājāti so kira sakkassa vallabho, balavavissāsiko, tasmā sakkena saddhiṃ agamāsi. Purakkhatvāti purato katvā. Pavisiṃsūti pavisitvā pana upaḍḍhapihitāni dvārāni katvā olokayamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Idampi, mārisa moggallāna, passa vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakanti, mārisa moggallāna, idampi vejayantassa pāsādassa rāmaṇeyyakaṃ passa, suvaṇṇatthambhe passa, rajatatthambhe maṇitthambhe pavāḷatthambhe lohitaṅgatthambhe masāragallatthambhe muttatthambhe sattaratanatthambhe, tesaṃyeva suvaṇṇādimaye ghaṭake vāḷarūpakāni ca passāti evaṃ thambhapantiyo ādiṃ katvā rāmaṇeyyakaṃ dassento evamāha. Yathā taṃ pubbekatapuññassāti yathā pubbe katapuññassa upabhogaṭṭhānena sobhitabbaṃ, evamevaṃ sobhatīti attho. Atibāḷhaṃkho ayaṃ yakkho pamatto viharatīti attano pāsāde nāṭakaparivārena sampattiyā vasena ativiya matto.
他施展神通,化作神通显现。他进入水遍定,决意让宫殿所在的地方变成水,然后用大脚趾弹击宫殿的檐角。那座宫殿就像一只放在水面上的钵,被人用手指弹击钵口边缘一样,前后晃动,摇摆不停,无法安定。同样地,它震动、剧烈震动、猛烈摇晃,柱子、梁板、檐角、椽条等发出嘎嘎的响声,好像马上就要塌下来。因此经文说:“使震动、大震动、大摇晃。”他们心中生起稀有和未曾有之感,就是“啊,真稀有!啊,真未曾有!”这样生起了稀有和未曾有之心,同时也生起了欢喜,产生了强烈的喜悦。悚惧就是惊恐畏惧。生起毛发竖立,就是生起了身毛竖立,意思是全身布满了竖起来的毛发,就像金墙上镶嵌的象牙钉一样。毛发竖立这种现象,既能因喜悦而生起,也能因忧恼而生起,但这里是因为喜悦而生起的。长老为了用喜悦的冲击力让帝释天神生起悚惧,才作了那项神通。因此意思是:当知他以喜悦的冲击力生起了悚惧和毛发竖立。巴利
Iddhābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkhāsīti iddhimakāsi. Āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjitvā pāsādapatiṭṭhitokāsaṃ udakaṃ hotūti iddhiṃ adhiṭṭhāya pāsādakaṇṇike pādaṅguṭṭhakena pahari. So pāsādo yathā nāma udakapiṭṭhe ṭhapitapattaṃ mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ aṅguliyā pahaṭaṃ aparāparaṃ kampati calati na santiṭṭhati. Evamevaṃ saṃkampi sampakampi sampavedhi, thambhapiṭṭhasaṅghāṭakaṇṇikagopānasiādīni karakarāti saddaṃ muñcantāni patituṃ viya āraddhāni. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘saṅkampesi sampakampesi sampavedhesī’’ti. Acchariyabbhutacittajātāti aho acchariyaṃ, aho abbhutanti evaṃ sañjātaacchariyaabbhutā ceva sañjātatuṭṭhino ca ahesuṃ uppannabalavasomanassā. Saṃvigganti ubbiggaṃ. Lomahaṭṭhajātanti jātalomahaṃsaṃ, kañcanabhittiyaṃ ṭhapitamaṇināgadantehi viya uddhaggehi lomehi ākiṇṇasarīranti attho. Lomahaṃso ca nāmesa somanassenapi hoti domanassenapi, idha pana somanassena jāto. Thero hi sakkassa somanassavegena saṃvejetuṃ taṃ pāṭihāriyamakāsi. Tasmā somanassavegena saṃviggalomahaṭṭhaṃ viditvāti attho.
394 “贤友,我在这里”这句话,是因为长老已经让帝释天神生起带着喜悦的悚惧,把他的昏昧破除掉了,所以帝释天神观察清楚之后才这样说的。“贤友,那位世尊、导师,就是你的导师吗?”——贤友,当有人问你“你去了哪里”,你回答“我去了导师那里”,如今你在这天界里就像单脚站着一样站不稳,却还这样说,于是他们问道:“贤友,那位世尊、导师,就是你的导师吗?”
“他是我的同梵行者”——在这里,长老虽然是出家者、具足誓愿的上首弟子,帝释天神是在家人,但从圣道梵行的角度来说,他们就是同梵行者,所以长老这样说。“想必你那位世尊导师确实有大神通吧!”——你的同梵行者尚且有这样大的神通,那么你那位世尊导师,想必神通更是广大吧!他们看到导师的神变之后,生起了这样的赞叹,就这样说了。巴利
394.Idhāhaṃ, mārisāti idānissa yasmā therena somanassasaṃvegaṃ janayitvā tamaṃ vinoditaṃ, tasmā sallakkhetvā evamāha. Eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthāti, mārisa, tvaṃ kuhiṃ gatosīti vutte mayhaṃ satthu santikanti vadesi, imasmiṃ devaloke ekapādakena viya tiṭṭhasi, yaṃ tvaṃ evaṃ vadesi, eso nu te, mārisa, so bhagavā satthāti pucchiṃsu. Sabrahmacārī me esoti ettha kiñcāpi thero anagāriyo abhinīhārasampanno aggasāvako, sakko agāriyo, maggabrahmacariyavasena panete sabrahmacārino honti, tasmā evamāha. Ahonūna te so bhagavā satthāti sabrahmacārī tāva te evaṃmahiddhiko, so pana te bhagavā satthā aho nūna mahiddhikoti satthu iddhipāṭihāriyadassane jātābhilāpā hutvā evamāhaṃsu.
395 “了知者中的某一位”(ñātaññatarassa):意思是众所熟知者当中的一位,因为帝释天神正是众所熟知的知名者之一。其余各处都很清楚明白,而世尊只是顺着因缘脉络把这场开示讲完。巴利
395.Ñātaññatarassāti paññātaññatarassa, sakko hi paññātānaṃ aññataro. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭameva, desanaṃ pana bhagavā yathānusandhināva niṭṭhāpesīti.
第8章 《大渴爱灭尽经》的注释巴利
8. Mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttavaṇṇanā
396 “如是我闻”这句是《大渴爱灭尽经》的开头。其中“恶见”一词,在《蛇喻经》里只是指执取的见解,而在这里特指常见。那位比丘是多闻的,这位比丘却是寡闻的。他是一位诵本生经的人,听世尊讲完本生故事后,把故事归结说:“诸比丘,我在那时曾是韦桑德拉、大药、维土拉贤者、施那卡贤者、玛哈迦那咖王。”听完之后他心里这样想:“这些色、受、想、行,各自就地灭去,而识却从此世流转到彼世,又从彼世流转到此世,不断轮回。”于是生起了常见。因此他说:“就是这同一个识在流转、轮回,并非别的什么。”巴利
396.Evaṃme sutanti mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasuttaṃ. Tattha diṭṭhigatanti alagaddūpamasutte laddhimattaṃ diṭṭhigatanti vuttaṃ, idha sassatadiṭṭhi. So ca bhikkhu bahussuto, ayaṃ appassuto, jātakabhāṇako bhagavantaṃ jātakaṃ kathetvā, ‘‘ahaṃ, bhikkhave, tena samayena vessantaro ahosiṃ, mahosadho, vidhurapaṇḍito, senakapaṇḍito, mahājanako rājā ahosi’’nti samodhānentaṃ suṇāti. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘ime rūpavedanāsaññāsaṅkhārā tattha tattheva nirujjhanti, viññāṇaṃ pana idhalokato paralokaṃ, paralokato imaṃ lokaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratī’’ti sassatadassanaṃ uppannaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’nti.
正自觉者则说过:“识是依缘而生的,有缘时才生起,没有缘,识就不可能生起。”所以,这位比丘是在讲佛陀没有讲过的东西,是在打击胜者的法轮,是在阻碍无畏智,是在欺骗想听法的人。他偏离了圣道,走上了给大众带来不利和痛苦的路。就像国王的领土上出现大盗,会给大众带来不利和痛苦;同样应当知道,他在胜者的教法里成了贼,也是为了给大众带来不利和痛苦而出现的。“众多比丘”,指的是住在地方上、常行乞食的比丘们。“他们前往”,意思是:这个人已经得到了一群追随者,甚至可能让教法隐没。为了在他还没拉到一帮人之前,就让他远离恶见,这些比丘就在他们听闻佛法的地方,片刻不停留,就这样走上前去。巴利
Sammāsambuddhena pana, ‘‘viññāṇaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ, sati paccaye uppajjati, vinā paccayaṃ natthi viññāṇassa sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ayaṃ bhikkhu buddhena akathitaṃ katheti, jinacakke pahāraṃ deti, vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhati, sotukāmaṃ janaṃ visaṃvādeti, ariyapathe tiriyaṃ nipatitvā mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya paṭipanno. Yathā nāma rañño rajje mahācoro uppajjamāno mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya uppajjati, evaṃ jinasāsane coro hutvā mahājanassa ahitāya dukkhāya uppannoti veditabbo. Sambahulā bhikkhūti janapadavāsino piṇḍapātikabhikkhū. Tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ayaṃ parisaṃ labhitvā sāsanampi antaradhāpeyya, yāva pakkhaṃ na labhati, tāvadeva naṃ diṭṭhigatā vivecemāti sutasutaṭṭhānatoyeva aṭṭhatvā anisīditvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.
398 “你说的那个识,到底指什么?”——你所说的“识”,究竟是指哪个识?“尊者,就是那个能说、能感受,在这里那里领受善业和恶业果报的。”——尊者,就是那个能说、能感受,在种种地方领受善业和不善业果报的。“尊者,这就是识,就是我所指的识。”
“那它究竟是谁的?”——是哪个刹帝利、婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗,还是在家人、出家人、天人、人的?巴利
398.Katamaṃ taṃ sāti viññāṇanti sāti yaṃ tvaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāya vadesi, katamaṃ taṃ viññāṇanti? Yvāyaṃ, bhante, vado vedeyyo tatra tatra kalyāṇapāpakānaṃ kammānaṃ vipākaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti, bhante, yo ayaṃ vadati vedayati, yo cāyaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ kusalākusalakammānaṃ vipākaṃ paccanubhoti. Idaṃ, bhante, viññāṇaṃ, yamahaṃ sandhāya vademīti . Kassa nu kho nāmāti kassa khattiyassa vā brāhmaṇassa vā vessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ vā aññatarassa.
399 那时,世尊吩咐比丘们。为什么世尊要吩咐比丘们呢?据说,沙帝当时心里这样想:导师称我为“愚人”,但仅仅被称作愚人,并不会因此就缺少证得道果的连结。因为世尊也曾用“愚人”这个说法来教诫旺甘德之子优波塞那:“愚人,你太轻易就转向放逸了。”那位长老后来努力精勤,证得了六种神通。我也要发起这样的精进,成就道果。于是,世尊为了向他显示“这个人在教法中是没有根基的、因缘已断”而吩咐比丘们。关于“发热”等语,其含义与上文所说相同。再者,“那时,世尊”这一句也是单独的连接。据说,沙帝当时心里这样想:世尊说我缺乏证得道果的连结,如果没有连结,还能做什么呢?如来并不只对有连结的人说法,而是无论对谁都会说法。我要从佛陀那里获得善逝的教诫,然后去做能带来天界福报的善业。于是,世尊为了制止他获得善逝的教诫,说道:“愚人,我不给你教诫或教导。”由此开始了这段开示。其含义应依上文所说来理解。现在,为了澄清大众的见解,说道:“在此,我要反问比丘们。”这一切也都应依上文所说来理解。巴利
399.Atha kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti kasmā āmantesi? Sātissa kira evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘satthā maṃ ‘moghapuriso’ti vadati, na ca moghapurisoti vuttamatteneva maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo na hoti. Upasenampi hi vaṅgantaputtaṃ, ‘atilahuṃ kho tvaṃ moghapurisa bāhullāya āvatto’ti (mahāva. 75) bhagavā moghapurisavādena ovadi. Thero aparabhāge ghaṭento vāyamanto cha abhiññā sacchākāsi. Ahampi tathārūpaṃ vīriyaṃ paggaṇhitvā maggaphalāni nibbattessāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā chinnapaccayo ayaṃ sāsane aviruḷhadhammoti dassento bhikkhū āmantesi. Usmīkatotiādi heṭṭhā vuttādhippāyameva. Atha kho bhagavāti ayampi pāṭiyekko anusandhi. Sātissa kira etadahosi – ‘‘bhagavā mayhaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthīti vadati, kiṃ sakkā upanissaye asati kātuṃ? Na hi tathāgatā saupanissayasseva dhammaṃ desenti, yassa kassaci desentiyeva. Ahaṃ buddhassa santikā sugatovādaṃ labhitvā saggasampattūpagaṃ kusalaṃ karissāmī’’ti. Athassa bhagavā, ‘‘nāhaṃ, moghapurisa, tuyhaṃ ovādaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ vā demī’’ti sugatovādaṃ paṭippassambhento imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tassattho heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Idāni parisāya laddhiṃ sodhento, ‘‘idhāhaṃ bhikkhū paṭipucchissāmī’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbampi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
400 现在,为了说明识是有条件、有因缘的,世尊说了“诸比丘,无论什么……”等话。其中,“缘意与法”是指:连同转向一起,缘取有分心和三界诸法。“缘木柴”等话,是为了用譬喻来说明。这譬喻要说明什么呢?说明识并不会从一个门转移到另一个门。就像依木柴燃烧的火,只有在燃料等条件具足时才燃烧,条件不具足时就因缺缘而在原地熄灭,不会转移到碎石等上面,被称为“碎石火”之类。同样,依眼根和色尘生起的眼识,只有在眼根、色尘、光明、作意这些条件具足时才生起,条件不具足时就因缺缘而在原地灭去,不会转移到耳根等处,被称为“耳识”之类。这个道理适用于每一门。世尊就是这样呵责萨提比丘的:在识的生起过程中,我连一点点从一个门转移到另一个门都不承认,而这个愚人萨提却说有生命的转移。巴利
400. Idāni viññāṇassa sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ yaṃ yadeva, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha manañca paṭicca dhamme cāti sahāvajjanena bhavaṅgamanañca tebhūmakadhamme ca paṭicca. Kaṭṭhañca paṭiccātiādi opammanidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tena kiṃ dīpeti? Dvārasaṅkantiyā abhāvaṃ. Yathā hi kaṭṭhaṃ paṭicca jalamāno aggi upādānapaccaye satiyeva jalati, tasmiṃ asati paccayavekallena tattheva vūpasammati, na sakalikādīni saṅkamitvā sakalikaggītiādisaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, evameva cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppannaṃ viññāṇaṃ tasmiṃ dvāre cakkhurūpaālokamanasikārasaṅkhāte paccayamhi satiyeva uppajjati, tasmiṃ asati paccayavekallena tattheva nirujjhati, na sotādīni saṅkamitvā sotaviññāṇantiādisaṅkhyaṃ gacchati . Esa nayo sabbavāresu. Iti bhagavā nāhaṃ viññāṇappavatte dvārasaṅkantimattampi vadāmi, ayaṃ pana sāti moghapuriso bhavasaṅkantiṃ vadatīti sātiṃ niggahesi.
401 401. 这样显示了识是有因有缘之后,现在为了显示五蕴也同样是有因有缘,接着开示“这是已生者”等语。其中,“这是已生者”:这五蕴是已生、已有、已生起的,你们也应将它看作已生者。“它依食而生起”:而这五蕴是依食而生、依缘而生,缘存在时才生起——他这样问:你们是否也这样看待?“由于彼食的灭”:即那缘的灭尽。“这是已生者,不是吗?”:这究竟是已生者,还是并非已生者?“它依食而生起,不是吗?”:那已生的五蕴究竟是依缘而生起,还是并非如此?“由于彼食的灭”:即那缘的灭尽。“是灭法,不是吗?”:那法究竟是灭法,还是并非如此?“以正慧照见”:这已生、已有、已生起的五蕴,以观慧依如实本质相正确照见。以慧善见:依所说方式,以观慧善见。这样,对凡对那问题作观察者,他接受他们各自的主张,从而显示五蕴是有因有缘。巴利
401. Evaṃ viññāṇassa sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni pana pañcannampi khandhānaṃ sappaccayabhāvaṃ dassento, bhūtamidantiādimāha. Tattha bhūtamidanti idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ nibbattaṃ, tumhepi taṃ bhūtamidanti, bhikkhave, passathāti. Tadāhārasambhavanti taṃ panetaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ āhārasambhavaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ, sati paccaye uppajjati evaṃ passathāti pucchati. Tadāhāranirodhāti tassa paccayassa nirodhā. Bhūtamidaṃ nossūti bhūtaṃ nu kho idaṃ, na nu kho bhūtanti. Tadāhārasambhavaṃ nossūti taṃ bhūtaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ paccayasambhavaṃ nu kho, na nu khoti. Tadāhāranirodhāti tassa paccayassa nirodhā. Nirodhadhammaṃ nossūti taṃ dhammaṃ nirodhadhammaṃ nu kho, na nu khoti. Sammappaññāya passatoti idaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ jātaṃ bhūtaṃ nibbattanti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato vipassanāpaññāya sammā passantassa. Paññāya sudiṭṭhanti vuttanayeneva vipassanāpaññāya suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ. Evaṃ ye ye taṃ pucchaṃ sallakkhesuṃ, tesaṃ tesaṃ paṭiññaṃ gaṇhanto pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ sappaccayabhāvaṃ dasseti.
现在,对于他们以那种智慧已经清楚照见的、有因有缘、有灭的五蕴,为了追问对它们离贪的状态,说了“你们对这个……”等话。其中,“见”是指观的正见。以见到自相而清净,以见到缘相而明净。“会黏著吗”:你们会以渴爱和见黏著而安住吗?“会玩弄吗”:你们会以渴爱和见玩弄而安住吗?“会当作财物吗”:会像渴求财物那样生起贪求吗?“会执为我所有吗”:会以渴爱和见生起“这是我的”吗?“是为了度脱,不是为了执取”:我所教导的筏喻之法,是为了度脱四种瀑流,不是为了出于喜爱而执取。“你们能领会这个吗?”与此相反的一面,应当知道是清净善好的部分。巴利
Idāni yāya paññāya tehi taṃ sappaccayaṃ sanirodhaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ sudiṭṭhaṃ, tattha nittaṇhabhāvaṃ pucchanto imaṃ ce tumhetiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhinti vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiṃ . Sabhāvadassanena parisuddhaṃ. Paccayadassanena pariyodātaṃ. Allīyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi allīyitvā vihareyyātha. Kelāyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi kīḷamānā vihareyyātha . Dhanāyethāti dhanaṃ viya icchantā gedhaṃ āpajjeyyātha. Mamāyethāti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi mamattaṃ uppādeyyātha. Nittharaṇatthāya no gahaṇatthāyāti yo so mayā caturoghanittharaṇatthāya kullūpamo dhammo desito, no nikantivasena gahaṇatthāya. Api nu taṃ tumhe ājāneyyāthāti. Vipariyāyena sukkapakkho veditabbo.
402 现在,为了说明这些蕴的缘,他说:“诸比丘,有四食……”等等,这些内容前面已经解释过了。不过,就像有人被问到“你认识这个人吗?”时,回答“不只是认识这个人,我还认识他的母亲,连他母亲的母亲也认识”,这样一代一代地追溯而了知,才算真正了解得透彻。同样,世尊不只是了知诸蕴本身,还了知诸蕴的缘,以及那些缘的缘——总之,他了知整个缘的链条。为了展示佛陀的这种智慧力量,现在要说明缘的层层相续,所以他说:“诸比丘,有四食……”等等。这些内容前面已经解释过了。于是,“诸比丘,以无明为缘而有行……乃至……整个苦蕴的集起”,在这里,如果要详细展开缘起的论述,那在《清净道论》中已经详细讲过了。巴利
402. Idāni tesaṃ khandhānaṃ paccayaṃ dassento, cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādimāha, tampi vuttatthameva. Yathā pana eko imaṃ jānāsīti vutto, ‘‘na kevalaṃ imaṃ, mātarampissa jānāmi, mātu mātarampī’’ti evaṃ paveṇivasena jānanto suṭṭhu jānāti nāma. Evamevaṃ bhagavā na kevalaṃ khandhamattameva jānāti, khandhānaṃ paccayampi tesampi paccayānaṃ paccayanti evaṃ sabbapaccayaparamparaṃ jānāti. So taṃ, buddhabalaṃ dīpento idāni paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ, ime ca, bhikkhave, cattāro āhārātiādimāha. Taṃ vuttatthameva. Iti kho, bhikkhave, avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotīti ettha pana paṭiccasamuppādakathā vitthāretabbā bhaveyya, sā visuddhimagge vitthāritāva.
404 当无明这类缘存在时,行这类果就存在,这就是“此有故彼有”。当无明这类缘生起时,行这类果就生起,这就是“由此生起故彼生起”。因此他说:“也就是以无明为缘而有行……乃至……集起。”这样显示了流转之后,现在为了显示还灭,他说:“然而,仅仅由于无明的无余离贪、灭尽”等。其中,“然而,仅仅由于无明”的意思是:仅仅因为无明。“无余离贪、灭尽”:通过被称为离贪的道而完全灭尽,不再生起的灭尽。“行灭”:就是行不再生起而灭。为了显示当行这样灭尽时,由于行灭而识灭,由于识等灭而名色等也就灭了,他先说了“由行灭而识灭”等,然后说“如是,这整个苦蕴灭尽”。其中,“整个”:全部、纯粹,或者远离有情的意思。“苦蕴”:苦的聚集。“灭尽”:不再生起。巴利
404.Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjati, tenevāha – ‘‘yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento, avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhātiādimāha. Tattha avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya eva tu. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā anuppādanirodhā. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti, evaṃ niruddhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇanirodho hoti, viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāniyeva hontīti dassetuṃ saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhotiādiṃ vatvā evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhohotīti vuttaṃ. Tattha kevalassāti sakalassa, suddhassa vā, sattavirahitassāti attho. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkharāsissa. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti.
406 在此不存在……等说法,应当依照所说相反的方式来了知。巴利
406.Imasmiṃ asatītiādi vuttapaṭipakkhanayena veditabbaṃ.
407 世尊这样讲完流转与还灭之后,接着要问的是:当人以与观智相应的圣道,了知这十二支缘起的流转时,那种“追驰”会被断除,不再存在。为了问这一点,便说“诸比丘,你们……”等语。其中,“如此知”就是以与观智相应的圣道如此了知。“如此见”是它的同义词。“前际”指过去那一部分,也就是过去的蕴、界、处。“你们会追驰吗?”意思是:你们会以渴爱和见的方式追驰吗?其余内容在《一切漏经》中已经详细说明。巴利
407. Evaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni imaṃ dvādasaṅgapaccayavaṭṭaṃ saha vipassanāya maggena jānantassa yā paṭidhāvanā pahīyati, tassā abhāvaṃ pucchanto api nu tumhe, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ jānantāti evaṃ sahavipassanāya maggena jānantā. Evaṃ passantāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pubbantanti purimakoṭṭhāsaṃ, atītakhandhadhātuāyatanānīti attho. Paṭidhāveyyāthāti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena paṭidhāveyyātha. Sesaṃ sabbāsavasutte vitthāritameva.
现在,为了问他们在这件事上是否已经不动摇,世尊说:“比丘们,你们这样知道、这样看见,还会说‘导师是我们的重担’之类的话吗?”这里,“重担”是指沉重的负担,让人不得不违心地顺从。“沙门”指佛陀沙门。“会指出别的大师吗?”意思是:如果生起“这位大师没办法帮我们成事”这样的想法,你们会不会带着这种认知去指出别的外道大师?“众多沙门婆罗门”:带着这样的认知,去指向众多外道沙门和婆罗门。“禁戒、祭祀与吉祥”:指禁戒的受持、邪见的玄想热衷、见闻觉知的吉祥。“会以那些为本质而归向吗?”:若生起“这些是本质”的想法,再去归向它们,即舍此取彼之义。“这样舍弃了又再执取”之义。“自己已知”:以自智而知。“自己已见”:以自慧眼而见。“自己已识”:自己已辨明、已令明显。“我已为你们引至”:意思是,比丘们,我已以这现见等自性的法将你们引至、导至涅槃。“现见”等的含义在《清净道论》中已广说。“缘此而说”:此言是缘你们自己已知等状态而说。巴利
Idāni nesaṃ tattha niccalabhāvaṃ pucchanto, api nu tumhe, bhikkhave, evaṃ jānantā evaṃ passantā evaṃ vadeyyātha, satthā no garūtiādimāha. Tattha garūti bhāriko akāmā anuvattitabbo . Samaṇoti buddhasamaṇo. Aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyāthāti ayaṃ satthā amhākaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetuṃ na sakkotīti api nu evaṃsaññino hutvā aññaṃ bāhirakaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyyātha. Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti evaṃsaññino hutvā puthūnaṃ titthiyasamaṇānaṃ ceva brāhmaṇānañca. Vatakotūhalamaṅgalānīti vatasamādānāni ca diṭṭhikutūhalāni ca diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalāni ca. Tāni sārato paccāgaccheyyāthāti etāni sāranti evaṃsaññino hutvā paṭiāgaccheyyātha. Evaṃ nissaṭṭhāni ca puna gaṇheyyāthāti attho. Sāmaṃ ñātanti sayaṃ ñāṇena ñātaṃ. Sāmaṃ diṭṭhanti sayaṃ paññācakkhunā diṭṭhaṃ. Sāmaṃ viditanti sayaṃ vibhāvitaṃ pākaṭaṃ kataṃ. Upanītā kho me tumheti mayā, bhikkhave, tumhe iminā sandiṭṭhikādisabhāvena dhammena nibbānaṃ upanītā, pāpitāti attho. Sandiṭṭhikotiādīnamattho visuddhimagge vitthārito. Idametaṃ paṭicca vuttanti etaṃ vacanamidaṃ tumhehi sāmaṃ ñātādibhāvaṃ paṭicca vuttaṃ.
408 诸比丘,三事和合这一段,为什么开始讲呢?前面不是已经用流转和还灭的方式把开示推到顶了吗?是的,已经推到顶了。不过这是另一层连结:因为“这个世间有情对结生是迷乱的,我要破除他的迷乱之处,让它变得清楚”,所以开始了这段开示。再者,流转的根本是无明,还灭的根本是佛陀出世;这样即使已显示了流转的根本——无明,以及还灭的根本——佛陀出世之后,又为了“再一次用流转和还灭把开示推到顶”而开始了这段开示。其中,“和合”是指聚集、团块之义。“胎中投生的有情”是指投生于胎中的有情。“入”就是“生起”。因为在某些地方,“胎”是指母亲的子宫。正如所说——巴利
408.Tiṇṇaṃ kho pana, bhikkhaveti kasmā ārabhi? Nanu heṭṭhā vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena desanā matthakaṃ pāpitāti? Āma pāpitā. Ayaṃ pana pāṭiekko anusandhi , ‘‘ayañhi lokasannivāso paṭisandhisammūḷho, tassa sammohaṭṭhānaṃ viddhaṃsetvā pākaṭaṃ karissāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Apica vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjā, vivaṭṭamūlaṃ buddhuppādo, iti vaṭṭamūlaṃ avijjaṃ vivaṭṭamūlañca buddhuppādaṃ dassetvāpi, ‘‘puna ekavāraṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena desanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpessāmī’’ti imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha sannipātāti samodhānena piṇḍabhāvena. Gabbhassāti gabbhe nibbattanakasattassa. Avakkanti hotīti nibbatti hoti. Katthaci hi gabbhoti mātukucchi vutto. Yathāha –
“ 世人住胎初夜时,便如起程远行客;
既已举步向前去,一去不复再回头。”巴利
‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo; Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363);
在某些情况下,“胎”指的是投生到母胎里的有情。就像经里说的:“阿难,有些女人怀胎九个月或十个月,然后就把孩子生下来。”(中部3.205)这里说的就是有情,是针对这个才说“入胎发生”。巴利
Katthaci gabbhe nibbattanasatto. Yathāha – ‘‘yathā kho, panānanda, aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṃ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.205). Idha satto adhippeto, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘gabbhassa avakkanti hotī’’ti.
这里说的“此处”,是指这个有情世间。“母亲正值经期”这句话,是就受孕的时机而说的。据说,女人身上有胎儿投生的那个位置,会先形成一个很大的血块,血块破裂流出之后,那个地方就变干净了;当那个地方干净时,父母一旦交合,此后整整七天之内,它就只是块田地而已。在这段时间里,就算只是握手、抓手臂之类的肢体接触,胎儿也一样会投生。“乾闼婆”是指将要投生到那里的有情。“已现前”并不是说有个众生站在旁边看着父母交合,而是说,被业力所牵引,必定有一个众生会在那个位置投生,这才是这里的意思。“带着疑虑”是指:“我会不会平安?我的孩子会不会平安?”像这样对生命怀着极大的担忧。“比丘们,那是血”是说,那时候母亲的血流到那个位置,因为爱子之情而变成白色的,所以这样说。“弯犁”是指村里小孩玩的小犁。“打板”是指用长棍击打短棍的那种游戏。“翻筋斗”是指翻滚游戏,也就是在空中抓住棍子,或者头顶着地上下翻转的那种玩法。“风轮”是指用棕榈叶之类做成的、靠风吹而旋转的轮子。“叶管”是指叶子做的管子,小孩们用它来量沙子之类的东西玩。“车”是指小车。“弓”也只是小弓而已。巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ sattaloke. Mātā ca utunī hotīti idaṃ utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Mātugāmassa kira yasmiṃ okāse dārako nibbattati, tattha mahatī lohitapīḷakā saṇṭhahitvā bhijjitvā paggharati, vatthu suddhaṃ hoti, suddhe vatthumhi mātāpitūsu ekavāraṃ sannipatitesu yāva satta divasāni khettameva hoti. Tasmiṃ samaye hatthaggāhaveṇiggāhādinā aṅgaparāmasanenapi dārako nibbattatiyeva. Gandhabboti tatrūpagasatto. Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti na mātāpitūnaṃ sannipātaṃ olokayamāno samīpe ṭhito paccupaṭṭhito nāma hoti. Kammayantayantito pana eko satto tasmiṃ okāse nibbattanako hotīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Saṃsayenāti ‘‘arogo nu kho bhavissāmi ahaṃ vā, putto vā me’’ti evaṃ mahantena jīvitasaṃsayena. Lohitañhetaṃ, bhikkhaveti tadā kira mātulohitaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattaṃ puttasinehena paṇḍaraṃ hoti. Tasmā evamāha. Vaṅkakanti gāmadārakānaṃ kīḷanakaṃ khuddakanaṅgalaṃ. Ghaṭikā vuccati dīghadaṇḍena rassadaṇḍakaṃ paharaṇakīḷā. Mokkhacikanti samparivattakakīḷā, ākāse vā daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariyabhāvena parivattanakīḷananti vuttaṃ hoti. Ciṅgulakaṃ vuccati tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamanacakkaṃ . Pattāḷhakaṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikā, tāya vālikādīni minantā kīḷanti. Rathakanti khuddakarathaṃ. Dhanukampi khuddakadhanumeva.
409 “生贪”(sārajjati)就是生起贪。“生嗔”(byāpajjati)就是生起嗔。“身至念未现前”(anupaṭṭhitakāyasatī)是说身至念没有建立起来;所谓身至念,就是对身体的念,这里的意思是未曾把它安立起来。“心狭小”(parittacetaso)指有不善心。“他所不知不达的恶”——那些恶法在果等至中灭尽,而他既不知道也不证得那个果等至,这就是这句话的意思。“随顺与违逆”(anurodhavirodha)就是贪和嗔。“欢喜”(abhinandati)是依渴爱而欢喜,正是依渴爱说出“啊,真快乐”等话,从而随喜赞叹。“执取而住立”(ajjhosāya tiṭṭhati)是以渴爱的执取把对象吞下、牢牢抓住。对乐受或不苦不乐受欢喜,这还说得通;对苦受怎么会欢喜呢?当他执著“我苦、我的苦”时,这也叫欢喜。“生起喜”(uppajjati nandī)就是生起渴爱。“彼之取”(tadupādāna)就是那渴爱,从执取的意义上称为取。以那取为缘而有……(中略)……集起,这是世尊再次以一次、两节、三要略的方式显示了缘起轮转。巴利
409.Sārajjatīti rāgaṃ uppādeti. Byāpajjatīti byāpādaṃ uppādeti. Anupaṭṭhitakāyasatīti kāye sati kāyasati, taṃ anupaṭṭhapetvāti attho. Parittacetasoti akusalacitto. Yatthassa te pāpakāti yassaṃ phalasamāpattiyaṃ ete nirujjhanti, taṃ na jānāti nādhigacchatīti attho. Anurodhavirodhanti rāgañceva dosañca. Abhinandatīti taṇhāvasena abhinandati, taṇhāvaseneva aho sukhantiādīni vadanto abhivadati. Ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatīti taṇhāajjhosānagahaṇena gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gaṇhāti. Sukhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā abhinandatu, dukkhaṃ kathaṃ abhinandatīti? ‘‘Ahaṃ dukkhito mama dukkha’’nti gaṇhanto abhinandati nāma. Uppajjati nandīti taṇhā uppajjati. Tadupādānanti sāva taṇhā gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānaṃ nāma. Tassa upādānapaccayā bhavo…pe… samudayo hotīti, idañhi bhagavatā puna ekavāraṃ dvisandhi tisaṅkhepaṃ paccayākāravaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
410-4 现在,为了显示还灭,世尊在这里说:“诸比丘,如来出现于世间……”等等。其中,“心无量”是指他的心是无量、出世间的,也就是具有道心的人,意思是拥有道心。“诸比丘,你们应当受持我这简要开示的渴爱尽解脱。”诸比丘,我这样简要开示的渴爱尽解脱教法,你们应当恒常受持,不要放逸。这里所说的教法,因为它是获得解脱的原因,所以称为解脱。“被大渴爱网、渴爱结所缠缚”:渴爱本身就是网,因为交织在一起,所以叫大渴爱网;因为缠结在一起,所以叫渴爱结。也就是说,你们要记住,这位名叫萨提的渔夫之子比丘,就是被这张大渴爱网和渴爱结缠住了。意思是说,他已经陷进去、被完全包住了,你们要这样记住。其余各处都很浅显易懂。巴利
410-4. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassetuṃ idha, bhikkhave, tathāgato loke uppajjatītiādimāha. Tattha appamāṇacetasoti appamāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ ceto assāti appamāṇacetaso, maggacittasamaṅgīti attho. Imaṃ kho me tumhe, bhikkhave, saṃkhittena taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttiṃ dhārethāti, bhikkhave, imaṃ saṃkhittena desitaṃ mayhaṃ, taṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttidesanaṃ tumhe niccakālaṃ dhāreyyātha mā pamajjeyyātha. Desanā hi ettha vimuttipaṭilābhahetuto vimuttīti vuttā. Mahātaṇhājālataṇhāsaṅghāṭapaṭimukkanti taṇhāva saṃsibbitaṭṭhena mahātaṇhājālaṃ, saṅghaṭitaṭṭhena saṅghāṭanti vuccati; iti imasmiṃ mahātaṇhājāle taṇhāsaṅghāṭe ca imaṃ sātiṃ bhikkhuṃ kevaṭṭaputtaṃ paṭimukkaṃ dhāretha. Anupaviṭṭho antogadhoti naṃ dhārethāti attho. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.
《大马邑经》的注释巴利
9. Mahāassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
415 “如是我闻”这句,就是《大马邑经》。其中说到“在鸯伽人当中”:“鸯伽”本来是指当地的王族子弟,他们居住的地方,按照习惯说法也叫“鸯伽”,所以就是那个叫鸯伽的地方。“马邑”是鸯伽国的一个城镇,因为城名而得到这个称呼,是鸯伽国的一个聚落;世尊就把这座城镇作为托钵乞食的村庄,住在那里。世尊这样说,就是指“比丘们,人们认出你们,说‘沙门,沙门’”这一番话。巴利
415.Evaṃme sutanti mahāassapurasuttaṃ. Tattha aṅgesūti aṅgā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘aṅgā’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ aṅgesu janapade. Assapuraṃ nāma aṅgānaṃ nigamoti assapuranti nagaranāmena laddhavohāro aṅgānaṃ janapadassa eko nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā viharatīti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti etaṃ ‘‘samaṇā samaṇāti vo, bhikkhave, jano sañjānātī’’tiādivacanamavoca.
为什么世尊要这样说呢?据说在那个镇上,人们都有信心、心怀净信,是佛的弟子、法的弟子、僧的弟子。即使对当天刚出家的沙弥,他们也像对待戒腊百年的长老一样恭敬赞叹。上午时分,他们看见比丘僧团进村托钵,即使正拿着锄头等农具要去田里,或者拿着斧头等工具要进树林,也会放下那些工具,把比丘僧团要坐的地方——讲堂、帐篷或者树下——打扫干净,铺好座位,备好干净的饮用水,请比丘僧团坐下,供养粥和嚼食等。等比丘僧团吃完饭、完成用餐之事,送走他们之后,才拿起那些工具,去田里或林中干自己的活。即使在干活的地方,他们也没有别的话题,只谈论僧团的功德。他们说:处于四道位的四种人、处于四果位的四种人,这八种人称为圣僧。他们具备这样的戒、这样的行为、这样的修行,有惭耻心,和善可亲,具足广大功德。他们只这样称赞比丘僧团的功德。干完活回来,吃过晚饭,坐在家门口时,或者进了卧室坐下时,也还是只谈论僧团的功德。世尊看到这些人如此恭敬供养,就劝导比丘僧团要值得受用信众的托钵供养,然后说了这番话。巴利
Kasmā pana evaṃ avocāti. Tasmiṃ kira nigame manussā saddhā pasannā buddhamāmakā dhammamāmakā saṅghamāmakā, tadahupabbajitasāmaṇerampi vassasatikattherasadisaṃ katvā pasaṃsanti; pubbaṇhasamayaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ piṇḍāya pavisantaṃ disvā bījanaṅgalādīni gahetvā khettaṃ gacchantāpi, pharasuādīni gahetvā araññaṃ pavisantāpi tāni upakaraṇāni nikkhipitvā bhikkhusaṅghassa nisīdanaṭṭhānaṃ āsanasālaṃ vā maṇḍapaṃ vā rukkhamūlaṃ vā sammajjitvā āsanāni paññapetvā arajapānīyaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā yāgukhajjakādīni datvā katabhattakiccaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ uyyojetvā tato tāni upakaraṇāni ādāya khettaṃ vā araññaṃ vā gantvā attano kammāni karonti, kammantaṭṭhānepi nesaṃ aññā kathā nāma natthi. Cattāro maggaṭṭhā cattāro phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭha puggalā ariyasaṅgho nāma; te ‘‘evarūpena sīlena, evarūpena ācārena, evarūpāya paṭipattiyā samannāgatā lajjino pesalā uḷāraguṇā’’ti bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathenti. Kammantaṭṭhānato āgantvā bhuttasāyamāsā gharadvāre nisinnāpi, sayanigharaṃ pavisitvā nisinnāpi bhikkhusaṅghasseva vaṇṇaṃ kathenti. Bhagavā tesaṃ manussānaṃ nipaccakāraṃ disvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyane niyojetvā etadavoca.
哪些法能使人成为沙门、成为婆罗门呢?意思是:受持并圆满这些法之后,就能成为止息诸恶的沙门、舍离诸恶的婆罗门。在《增支部》中说:“诸比丘,有三种沙门的沙门性、沙门所应行。哪三种?受持增上戒学、受持增上心学、受持增上慧学。”这里说的是沙门应当修的法,这些法也就是能使人成为沙门的法。但在这段注释里,则是以惭、愧等为核心来展开开示的。“这样,这便属于我们”中的“no”只是语助词,意思是“这样,这便属于我们”。有大果、有大功德:这两者在意义上是一样的。“不空过”:不虚无。“有果报”:这也是同一个意思。因为若没有果报,那就叫作“空过”。“有汁味”:有增长,这是“有果报”的同义词。“诸比丘,你们应当这样学”:诸比丘,你们应当这样学。如此,世尊以这一段话赞叹了惭、愧等法的功德。为什么?为了截断言说之道。假如有某位刚出家不久的愚痴比丘这样说:“世尊说‘你们应当受持惭、愧等法而住’,受持并住于这些法有什么功德呢?”为了截断他的言说之道。而这就是其功德:受持并圆满这些法,就能成为止息诸恶的沙门、舍离诸恶的婆罗门,能生起四种资具的获得,能成就施与资具者的广大果报,能使出家不空过、有果报、有汁味。他如此赞叹。这是此处的略说。若依广说,则功德之说应依《念处经》注中所说的方法来理解。巴利
Ye dhammā samaṇakaraṇā ca brāhmaṇakaraṇā cāti ye dhammā samādāya paripūritā samitapāpasamaṇañca bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇañca karontīti attho. ‘‘Tīṇimāni, bhikkhave, samaṇassa samaṇiyāni samaṇakaraṇīyāni . Katamāni tīṇi? Adhisīlasikkhāsamādānaṃ, adhicittasikkhāsamādānaṃ , adhipaññāsikkhāsamādāna’’nti (a. ni. 3.82) ettha pana samaṇena kattabbadhammā vuttā. Tepi ca samaṇakaraṇā hontiyeva. Idha pana hirottappādivasena desanā vitthāritā. Evaṃ no ayaṃ amhākanti ettha noti nipātamattaṃ. Evaṃ ayaṃ amhākanti attho. Mahapphalā mahānisaṃsāti ubhayampi atthato ekameva. Avañjhāti amoghā. Saphalāti ayaṃ tasseva attho. Yassā hi phalaṃ natthi, sā vañjhā nāma hoti. Saudrayāti savaḍḍhi, idaṃ saphalatāya vevacanaṃ. Evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabbanti, bhikkhave, evaṃ tumhehi sikkhitabbaṃ. Iti bhagavā iminā ettakena ṭhānena hirottappādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathesi. Kasmā? Vacanapathapacchindanatthaṃ. Sace hi koci acirapabbajito bālabhikkhu evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘bhagavā hirottappādidhamme samādāya vattathāti vadati, ko nu kho tesaṃ samādāya vattane ānisaṃso’’ti? Tassa vacanapathapacchindanatthaṃ. Ayañca ānisaṃso, ime hi dhammā samādāya paripūritā samitapāpasamaṇaṃ nāma bāhitapāpabrāhmaṇaṃ nāma karonti, catupaccayalābhaṃ uppādenti, paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalataṃ sampādenti, pabbajjaṃ avañjhaṃ saphalaṃ saudrayaṃ karontīti vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana vaṇṇakathā satipaṭṭhāne (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.373) vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
416 “以惭与愧”:就是《法集论》里详细解释的“对应当惭的感到惭,对应当愧的感到愧”那样的惭和愧。而且在这里,惭从内在生起,愧从外在生起。惭以自己为主导,愧以世间为主导。惭的本质是羞耻,愧的本质是畏惧。关于这些的详细解说,在《清净道论》里已经全面讲过了。此外,这两种法因为能守护世间,所以被称为“世间守护法”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,有两种白法守护世间。哪两种?惭与愧。比丘们,如果这两种白法不守护世间,世间就不会有‘母亲’、‘姨母’、‘舅母’、‘师母’、‘尊长之妻’这样的称呼,世间会陷入混乱,就像山羊、绵羊、鸡、猪、狗、豺狼一样。”这两种法在《本生经》里被称为“天法”。正如所说:巴利
416.Hirottappenāti ‘‘yaṃ hirīyati hirīyitabbena, ottappati ottappitabbenā’’ti (dha. sa. 1331) evaṃ vitthāritāya hiriyā ceva ottappena ca. Apicettha ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā hirī, bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ ottappaṃ. Attādhipateyyā hirī, lokādhipateyyaṃ ottappaṃ. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ, vitthārakathā panettha sabbākārena visuddhimagge vuttā. Apica ime dve dhammā lokaṃ pālanato lokapāladhammā nāmāti kathitā. Yathāha – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālenti. Katame dve? Hirī ca ottappañca . Ime kho, bhikkhave, dve sukkā dhammā lokaṃ pālenti. Ime ca kho, bhikkhave, dve sukkā dhammā lokaṃ na pāleyyuṃ, nayidha paññāyetha, ‘mātā’ti vā, ‘mātucchā’ti vā, ‘mātulānī’ti vā, ‘ācariyabhariyā’ti vā, ‘garūnaṃ dārā’ti vā, sambhedaṃ loko agamissa, yathā ajeḷakā kukkuṭasūkarā soṇasiṅgālā’’ti (a. ni. 2.9). Imeyeva jātake ‘‘devadhammā’’ti kathitā. Yathāha –
“ 具足惭与愧,安住于清净善法;
世间那些已寂静的善士,就被称为具有天法的人。”巴利
‘‘Hiriottappasampannā , sukkadhammasamāhitā; Santo sappurisā loke, devadhammāti vuccare’’ti. (jā. 1.1.6);
在玛哈春达长老那里,这些法被显示为削减烦恼的修行。正如经中所说:别人会无惭,我们在这里要有惭——应当这样修削减;别人会无愧,我们在这里要有愧——应当这样修削减。在大迦叶长老那里,这些法被显示为教诫受具。确实有这样说过:因此,迦叶,你应当这样学:我对长老、新学、中座的比丘,都要保持强烈的惭与愧。迦叶,你应当这样学。而在这里,这些法被显示为名为沙门法。巴利
Mahācundattherassa pana kilesasallekhanapaṭipadāti katvā dassitā. Yathāha – ‘‘pare ahirikā bhavissanti, mayamettha hirimanā bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo. Pare anottāpī bhavissanti, mayamettha ottāpī bhavissāmāti sallekho karaṇīyo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.83). Imeva mahākassapattherassa ovādūpasampadāti katvā dassitā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tasmā tiha te, kassapa, evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ, tibbaṃ me hirottappaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati theresu navesu majjhimesūti. Evañhi te, kassapa, sikkhitabba’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.154). Idha panete samaṇadhammā nāmāti dassitā.
因为,到此为止,“沙门目标”可以说已经达到顶点了,所以为了进一步说明其他能成就沙门的法,世尊又说了“诸比丘,然而,你们可能……”等话。这里说到“沙门目标”时,在《相应部》中是这样说的:“诸比丘,什么是沙门性?就是这圣八支道,也就是:正见……乃至……正定。诸比丘,这称为沙门性。诸比丘,什么是沙门目标?诸比丘,贪的灭尽、瞋的灭尽、痴的灭尽,诸比丘,这称为沙门目标。”在那里,道被称为“沙门性”,果和涅槃被称为“沙门目标”。但在当前这个地方,应当理解为把道和果合在一起,说为“沙门目标”。“我宣说”就是我讲述;“我告知”就是使他知道。巴利
Yasmā pana ettāvatā sāmaññattho matthakaṃ patto nāma hoti, tasmā aparepi samaṇakaraṇadhamme dassetuṃ siyā kho pana, bhikkhave, tumhākantiādimāha. Tattha sāmaññatthoti saṃyuttake tāva, ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Seyyathidaṃ, sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi, idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññaṃ. Katamo ca, bhikkhave, sāmaññattho? Yo, bhikkhave, rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sāmaññattho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.36) maggo ‘‘sāmañña’’nti, phalanibbānāni ‘‘sāmaññattho’’ti vuttāni. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne maggampi phalampi ekato katvā sāmaññattho kathitoti veditabbo. Ārocayāmīti kathemi. Paṭivedayāmīti jānāpemi.
417 417.“我们的身行是清净的”——在这个句子里,身行有清净和不清净两种。如果一位比丘杀生、偷盗、在欲事上行邪淫,他的身行就叫不清净,不过这只是从业道方面来说被禁止的。如果一个人用手、土块、棍棒或刀去打击、伤害别人,他的身行也叫不清净,这也是依学处而被禁止的。在这部经里,这两种情况都没有谈到,说的是一种最高程度的削减。如果一位比丘,为了赶走在水瓶边喝水的乌鸦、或在钵里吃东西的乌鸦,而挥手、扔棍棒或土块,他的身行就是不清净。相反的情况就叫清净。显露是指高举、明显。敞开是指无所覆盖、无所遮蔽。通过这两者,正显示其清净性。无有缺陷是指恒常一如、中间没有间断和缺陷。防护是指由关闭烦恼之门而防护,并非为了覆藏过失。巴利
417.Parisuddho no kāyasamācāroti ettha kāyasamācāro parisuddho aparisuddhoti duvidho. Yo hi bhikkhu pāṇaṃ hanati adinnaṃ ādiyati, kāmesu micchā carati, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho nāma, ayaṃ pana kammapathavaseneva vārito. Yo pana pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā paraṃ potheti viheṭheti, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho nāma, ayampi sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu pānīyaghaṭe vā pānīyaṃ pivantānaṃ, patte vā bhattaṃ bhuñjantānaṃ kākānaṃ nivāraṇavasena hatthaṃ vā daṇḍaṃ vā leḍḍuṃ vā uggirati, tassa kāyasamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma. Uttānoti uggato pākaṭo. Vivaṭoti anāvaṭo asañchanno. Ubhayenāpi parisuddhataṃyeva dīpeti. Na ca chiddavāti sadā ekasadiso antarantare chiddarahito. Saṃvutoti kilesānaṃ dvāra pidahanena pidahito, na vajjapaṭicchādanatthāya.
418 在语行方面,如果比丘说妄语、说离间的话、说粗恶的话、说杂秽无意义的话,他的语行就叫不清净。不过这是从业道方面来说被遮止的。如果他用“居士”“奴仆”“雇工”这类话去辱骂别人,他的语行也叫不清净。这是被学处所禁止的。在这部经里,这两种情况都没有谈到,只说了“最极严苛”。如果比丘面对年轻比丘或沙弥,被问“尊者,您见到我们的戒师了吗?”时,以开玩笑的心态这样说道:“贤友,好多比丘和比丘尼在一个地方游走,你的戒师大概是提起可卖的菜包走掉了。”像这样说话,他的语行就是不清净。与此相反的情况,就叫清净。巴利
418.Vacīsamācārepi yo bhikkhu musā vadati, pisuṇaṃ katheti, pharusaṃ bhāsati, samphaṃ palapati, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana kammapathavasena vārito. Yo pana gahapatikāti vā dāsāti vā pessāti vā ādīhi khuṃsento vadati, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu daharena vā sāmaṇerena vā, ‘‘kacci, bhante, amhākaṃ upajjhāyaṃ passathā’’ti vutte, sambahulā, āvuso, bhikkhubhikkhuniyo ekasmiṃ padese vicadiṃsu, upajjhāyo te vikkāyikasākabhaṇḍikaṃ ukkhipitvā gato bhavissatī’’tiādinā nayena hasādhippāyopi evarūpaṃ kathaṃ katheti, tassa vacīsamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
419 在意行方面,如果一位比丘心怀贪欲、心存嗔害、持有邪见,那么他的意行就是不清净的。不过这种情况仅由业道所禁止。如果一位比丘接受别人寄存的金银,他的意行也是不清净的。这种情况同样仅由学处所禁止。在这部经里,这两种情况都没有讨论,只说了“最上的自我削减”。如果一位比丘生起欲的念头、嗔害的念头、伤害的念头,他的意行就是不清净的。与此相反,就是清净的。巴利
419.Manosamācāre yo bhikkhu abhijjhālu byāpannacitto micchādiṭṭhiko hoti, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana kammapathavaseneva vārito. Yo pana upanikkhittaṃ jātarūparajataṃ sādiyati, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho nāma. Ayampi sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo pana bhikkhu kāmavitakkaṃ vā byāpādavitakkaṃ vā vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ vā vitakketi, tassa manosamācāro aparisuddho. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
420 关于活命:如果比丘为了活命而做医生的工作、替人传话送信、割开脓疮、涂敷药膏、熬煮药油,也就是以二十一种不正当的方式谋生。或者,先开口向人讨要再吃,他的活命就叫不清净。不过这种情况是学处本身所禁止的。在这部经里,这两种情况都没有讨论,讲的是“最极严苛”。比如比丘得到酥油、生酥、油、蜜、糖浆之类,心想“明天或者后天还会有”,就以囤积的心态来受用;或者看见苦楝嫩芽之类,对沙弥说“你们吃点嫩芽吧”,沙弥心想“长老想吃”,就作净后送给他;或者对年少比丘或沙弥说“贤友,喝点水吧”,他们心想“长老想喝水”,就洗净水杯送上来。这样受用的人,他的活命就叫不清净。反过来,就叫清净。巴利
420. Ājīvasmiṃ yo bhikkhu ājīvahetu vejjakammaṃ pahiṇagamanaṃ gaṇḍaphālanaṃ karoti, arumakkhanaṃ deti, telaṃ pacatīti ekavīsatianesanāvasena jīvikaṃ kappeti. Yo vā pana viññāpetvā bhuñjati, tassa ājīvo aparisuddho nāma. Ayaṃ pana sikkhāpadabaddheneva paṭikkhitto. Imasmiṃ sutte ubhayampetaṃ akathetvā paramasallekho nāma kathito. Yo hi bhikkhu sappinavanītatelamadhuphāṇitādīni labhitvā, ‘‘sve vā punadivase vā bhavissatī’’ti sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjati, yo vā pana nimbaṅkurādīni disvā sāmaṇere vadati – ‘‘aṃṅkure khādathā’’ti, sāmaṇerā thero khāditukāmoti kappiyaṃ katvā denti, dahare pana sāmaṇere vā pānīyaṃ pivatha, āvusoti vadati, te thero pānīyaṃ pivitukāmoti pānīyasaṅkhaṃ dhovitvā denti, tampi paribhuñjantassa ājīvo aparisuddho nāma hoti. Viparīto parisuddho nāma.
422 知量:在寻求、接受、受用这三方面都懂得适量,懂得恰到好处,懂得把握分寸。巴利
422.Mattaññūti pariyesanapaṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaññū, yuttaññū, pamāṇaññū.
423 “警寤专修”:把一昼夜分成六个时段,只留一个时段睡觉,其余五个时段都用来保持清醒、精勤修行。“狮子卧”:这里共有四种卧姿——享受欲乐者的卧姿、饿鬼的卧姿、狮子的卧姿、如来的卧姿。其中,佛陀说:“诸比丘,享受欲乐的众生大多数是左胁而卧。”这就是享受欲乐者的卧姿,因为在这些人当中,根本没有右胁而卧的。巴利
423.Jāgariyamanuyuttāti rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā ekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse niddāya okāsaṃ datvā pañca koṭṭhāse jāgariyamhi yuttā payuttā. Sīhaseyyanti ettha kāmabhogiseyyā, petaseyyā, sīhaseyyā, tathāgataseyyāti catasso seyyā. Tattha ‘‘yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, kāmabhogī sattā vāmena passena sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ kāmabhogiseyyā, tesu hi yebhuyyena dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi.
比丘们,饿鬼大多数都是仰面躺着的。这就是饿鬼的卧姿。因为饿鬼血肉极少,身体不过是一堆骨头松散地连在一起,没办法侧身躺,只能仰面躺着。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, petā uttānā sentī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ petaseyyā, petā hi appamaṃsalohitattā aṭṭhisaṅghātajaṭitā ekena passena sayituṃ na sakkonti, uttānāva senti.
比丘们,兽王狮子大多数时候不会把尾巴夹在两条后腿之间,而是朝右侧躺卧。这就是狮子卧。因为兽王狮子威势很强,它会把两只前脚放在同一个位置,两只后脚也放在同一个位置,然后把尾巴放在两条后腿之间,留意前脚、后脚和尾尖各自所在的位置,再把头放在两只前脚上方躺下。即使睡了一整天,醒来时也不会惊慌害怕地醒来。它会抬起头,察看前脚摆放的位置。如果发现某个部位偏离了原位,它就不高兴,心想:“这可不符合你的出身,也不符合你的勇猛。”于是就继续躺在那里,不出去觅食。如果发现没有偏离、还稳稳地在原位,它就欢喜满足,心想:“这才符合你的出身和勇猛。”然后起身,做一个狮子伸展,抖擞鬃毛,发出三遍狮子吼,才出去觅食。至于第四禅的卧姿,则称为如来卧。在这些卧姿当中,这里讲的是狮子卧。因为这是威势很强的威仪,所以被称为最殊胜的卧姿。脚叠脚,就是把左脚叠放在右脚上。稍作重叠,就是稍微超出、略微错开地放,而不是完全对齐。为什么呢?因为如果脚踝碰着脚踝,或者膝盖碰着膝盖,就会不断产生感受,心就无法专一,卧姿也就不舒服。但如果不相碰,而是这样错开摆放,就不会产生感受,心就能专一,卧姿也就舒服,所以这样说。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena , bhikkhave, sīho migarājā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi anupakkhipitvā dakkhiṇena passena setī’’ti (a. ni. 4.246) ayaṃ sīhaseyyā. Tejussadattā hi sīho migarājā dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhapetvā naṅguṭṭhaṃ antarasatthimhi pakkhipitvā purimapādapacchimapādanaṅguṭṭhānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā dvinnaṃ purimapādānaṃ matthake sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā sayati . Divasampi sayitvā pabujjhamāno na utrāsanto pabujjhati. Sīsaṃ pana ukkhipitvā purimapādānaṃ ṭhitokāsaṃ sallakkheti. Sace kiñci ṭhānaṃ vijahitvā ṭhitaṃ hoti, ‘‘nayidaṃ tuyhaṃ jātiyā, na sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpa’’nti anattamano hutvā tattheva sayati, na gocarāya pakkamati. Avijahitvā ṭhite pana ‘‘tuyhaṃ jātiyā sūrabhāvassa ca anurūpamida’’nti haṭṭhatuṭṭho uṭṭhāya sīhavijambhitaṃ vijambhitvā kesarabhāraṃ vidhunitvā tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ naditvā gocarāya pakkamati. Catutthajjhānaseyyā pana tathāgataseyyāti vuccati. Tāsu idha sīhaseyyā āgatā. Ayañhi tejussadairiyāpathattā uttamaseyyā nāma. Pāde pādanti dakkhiṇapāde vāmapādaṃ. Accādhāyāti atiādhāya īsakaṃ atikkamma ṭhapetvā, gopphakena hi gopphake, jāṇunā vā jāṇumhi saṅghaṭṭiyamāne abhiṇhaṃ vedanā uppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ na hoti, seyyā aphāsukā hoti. Yathā pana na saṅghaṭṭeti, evaṃ atikkamma ṭhapite vedanā nuppajjati, cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, seyyā phāsukā hoti, tasmā evamāha.
425 关于“对世间的贪欲”等说法,在《小象迹喻经》里已经详细解释了。巴利
425.Abhijjhaṃ loketiādi cūḷahatthipade vitthāritaṃ.
426 426. 这里说的“比丘们,譬如……”是一个譬喻。其中,“借债”是指拿钱财时附带利息。“还清”是指让债务彻底了结。就像他们连一分一厘的残余都不再剩下,要这样去做,意思是全部偿还清楚。“以此为因缘”是指以“无债”为因缘。因为一个人反复思量“我没有债务”时,就会获得强有力的欢悦,体验到强有力的喜悦。因此说:“应获得欢悦,应证得喜悦。”巴利
426. Yā panāyaṃ seyyathāpi, bhikkhaveti upamā vuttā. Tattha iṇaṃ ādāyāti vaḍḍhiyā dhanaṃ gahetvā. Byantī kareyyāti vigatantāni kareyya. Yathā tesaṃ kākaṇikamattopi pariyanto nāma nāvasissati, evaṃ kareyya, sabbaso paṭiniyyāteyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti āṇaṇyanidānaṃ. So hi aṇaṇomhīti āvajjanto balavapāmojjaṃ labhati, balavasomanassamadhigacchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti.
因为与自身不相应的感受生起,就像用锯子切割四威仪一样折磨人,所以叫“病”。他有这种病,就叫“有病”。他被由这病所生的苦所折磨。重病就是病得很重。不喜就是被重病所困,对什么都不感兴趣。仅有余力就是只有一点点力气,意思是身体里几乎没有力气了。以此为因缘就是以无病为因缘,因为当他审思“我没有病”时,那两样东西就会生起。所以说“应得欢悦,应证得喜悦”。财物无任何损耗就是连一钱之财都没有损失。以此为因缘就是以解脱束缚为因缘,其余所有段落都应依此理来连接理解。不自主就是不能自主,不能随自己的心意做任何事。他主就是受他人主宰,完全随他人的心意而行。不能随意去就是心里想去某个方向、生起想去的欲求,却不能去。奴役就是身为奴隶的状态。自由就是成为自己作主的人。以此为因缘就是以获得自由为因缘。沙漠旷野的长路就是旷野之路,意思是无水且漫长的道路。以此为因缘就是以抵达安全地带为因缘。巴利
Visabhāgavedanuppattiyā kakaceneva catuiriyāpathaṃ chindanto ābādhatīti ābādho, svāssa atthīti ābādhiko. Taṃsamuṭṭhānena dukkhena dukkhito. Adhimattagilānoti bāḷhagilāno. Nacchādeyyāti adhimattabyādhiparetatāya na rucceyya. Balamattāti balameva, balañcassa kāye na bhaveyyāti attho. Tatonidānanti ārogyanidānaṃ, tassa hi arogomhīti āvajjayato tadubhayaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘labhetha pāmojjaṃ, adhigaccheyya somanassa’’nti. Nacassa kiñci bhogānaṃ vayoti kākaṇikamattampi bhogānaṃ vayo na bhaveyya. Tatonidānanti bandhanāmokkhanidānaṃ, sesaṃ vuttanayeneva sabbapadesu yojetabbaṃ. Anattādhīnoti na attani adhīno, attano ruciyā kiñci kātuṃ na labhati. Parādhīnoti paresu adhīno, parasseva ruciyā pavattati. Na yena kāmaṃ gamoti yena disābhāgenassa kāmo hoti. Icchā uppajjati gamanāya, tena gantuṃ na labhati. Dāsabyāti dāsabhāvā. Bhujissoti attano santako . Tatonidānanti bhujissanidānaṃ. Kantāraddhānamagganti kantāraṃ addhānamaggaṃ, nirudakaṃ dīghamagganti attho. Tatonidānanti khemantabhūminidānaṃ.
在这句“这五盖未被断除”当中,世尊把未断除的欲贪盖比作债务,把其余几盖比作疾病等。这里的相似之处是:比如有人借了别人的钱,然后挥霍掉。当债主们对他说“还钱”,对他恶语相向,把他绑起来,甚至打他的时候,他一点也反抗不了,全都得忍着。他能忍下来,就是因为那笔债。同样,如果一个人对某个对象生起欲贪、被染着所牵,以渴爱执取那件事物,那么当对方辱骂他、捆绑他、殴打他时,他也全都忍着。他能忍下来,就是因为那份欲贪,就像那些被家主杀害的妇女一样。所以,应当把欲贪看作债务。巴利
Ime pañca nīvaraṇe appahīneti ettha bhagavā appahīnaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ iṇasadisaṃ, sesāni rogādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – yo hi paresaṃ iṇaṃ gahetvā vināseti. So tehi iṇaṃ dehīti vuccamānopi pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi pahariyamānopi kiñci paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, sabbaṃ titikkhati, titikkhakāraṇañhissa taṃ iṇaṃ hoti. Evamevaṃ yo yamhi kāmacchandena rajjati, taṇhāgaṇena taṃ vatthuṃ gaṇhāti, so tena pharusaṃ vuccamānopi bajjhamānopi pahariyamānopi sabbaṃ titikkhati. Titikkhakāraṇañhissa so kāmacchando hoti gharasāmikehi vadhīyamānānaṃ itthīnaṃ viyāti. Evaṃ iṇaṃ viya kāmacchando daṭṭhabbo.
再打个比方,一个得了胆病的人,就算给他蜂蜜、糖浆之类的东西,他因为胆病的缘故,尝不出那些东西的味道,只会一个劲儿地吐出来,嘴里喊着“苦啊,苦啊”。同样,一个心怀嗔恨的人,即使关心他利益的亲教师和戒师只是稍微劝诫他一下,他也听不进去,反而会说“你们简直是在折磨我”之类的话,然后就还俗跑掉了。那个病人因为胆病,尝不出蜂蜜糖浆的滋味;这个被嗔怒之病控制的人,也因为嗔怒的缘故,尝不出禅那之乐等教法中的滋味。所以,应该把嗔害看成和疾病一样。巴利
Yathā pana pittarogāturo madhusakkarādīsupi dinnesu pittarogāturatāya tesaṃ rasaṃ na vindati, tittakaṃ tittakanti uggiratiyeva. Evamevaṃ byāpannacitto hitakāmehi ācariyupajjhāyehi appamattakampi ovadīyamāno ovādaṃ na gaṇhāti, ‘‘ati viya me tumhe upaddavethā’’tiādīni vatvā vibbhamati. Pittarogāturatāya so puriso madhusakkarādirasaṃ viya, kodhāturatāya jhānasukhādibhedaṃ sāsanarasaṃ na vindatīti. Evaṃ rogo viya byāpādo daṭṭhabbo.
再打个比方,好比有人在节庆那天被关在牢里,他既看不到庆典的开头,也看不到中间和结尾。第二天被放出来,就算听到别人说“哎呀,昨天的庆典真让人开心,哎呀,那舞蹈,哎呀,那歌声”等等,他也接不上话。为什么呢?因为他根本没亲身经历过那场庆典。同样,一个被昏沉和睡眠压住的比丘,即使正在讲说种种精彩法义的闻法会上,他对这场法会的开头、中间和结尾也一无所知。等闻法结束,就算听到别人赞叹“哎呀,那场闻法真好,哎呀,那个道理,哎呀,那个譬喻”,他也完全接不上话。为什么呢?因为他被昏沉睡眠控制,根本没有真正经历这场说法。所以,应该把昏沉睡眠看作牢狱一样。巴利
Yathā pana nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāre baddho puriso nakkhattassa neva ādiṃ, na majjhaṃ, na pariyosānaṃ passati. So dutiyadivase mutto, ‘‘aho hiyyo nakkhattaṃ manāpaṃ, aho naccaṃ, aho gīta’’ntiādīni sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Nakkhattassa ananubhūtattā. Evamevaṃ thinamiddhābhibhūto bhikkhu vicittanayepi dhammassavane pavattamāne neva tassa ādiṃ, na majjhaṃ, na pariyosānaṃ jānāti. So uṭṭhite dhammassavane, ‘‘aho dhammassavanaṃ, aho kāraṇaṃ, aho upamā’’ti dhammassavanassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānānaṃ sutvāpi paṭivacanaṃ na deti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Thinamiddhavasena dhammakathāya ananubhūtattāti. Evaṃ bandhanāgāraṃ viya thinamiddhaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
再打个比方:一个奴隶正在欢庆节日,有人对他说:“有件急事要办,你赶紧去那边;你要是不去,我就砍掉你的手脚,或者割掉你的耳朵鼻子!”他听了就只好马上跑去,根本没法体验节日的开头、中间和结尾。为什么?因为他受别人控制,自己做不了主。同样,一个对戒律所知甚少的人,即使为了独处而进入森林,只要对某种东西——哪怕是对允许吃的肉——生起了“这是不允许吃的肉”的念头,他就得放下独处,到持律者那里去清净戒律。他没法享受独处的快乐。为什么?因为他被掉举和悔恨压住了。所以,应当把掉举和悔恨看作像奴隶身份一样。巴利
Yathā pana nakkhattaṃ kīḷantopi dāso, ‘‘idaṃ nāma accāyikaṃ karaṇīyaṃ atthi, sīghaṃ, tattha gaccha, no ce gacchasi, hatthapādaṃ vā te chindāmi kaṇṇanāsaṃ vā’’ti vutto sīghaṃ gacchatiyeva, nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati. Kasmā? Parādhīnatāya. Evamevaṃ vinaye appakataññunā vivekatthāya araññaṃ paviṭṭhenāpi kismiñcideva antamaso kappiyamaṃsepi akappiyamaṃsasaññāya uppannāya vivekaṃ pahāya sīlavisodhanatthaṃ vinayadharassa santike gantabbaṃ hoti. Vivekasukhaṃ anubhavituṃ na labhati. Kasmā? Uddhaccakukkuccābhibhūtatāyāti, evaṃ dāsabyaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccaṃ daṭṭabbaṃ.
就像一个人走在荒野远路上,看到人们被强盗抢劫、被打死的地方,这时哪怕听到木棍声或鸟叫声,他都会疑神疑鬼:“强盗来了吧?”于是走走停停,又往回退,走回头路比往前走的路还多。他费尽力气,也许能到达安全的地方,也许到不了。同样,一个人对八事生起了疑,就会沿着“真有佛吗?没有佛吗?”这样的方式犹豫不决,无法以信心决断、信受。既然无法决断,就不能证得道或果。就像在荒野远路上,反复想着“有强盗、没有强盗”,来回徘徊,不能深入,心里生起惊惧,障碍他到达安全之地;同样,疑也沿着“真有佛吗?没有佛吗?”这样的方式,反复徘徊,不能深入,让心里生起惊惧,障碍到达圣者的境地。因此,应当把疑看作荒野远路一样。巴利
Yathā pana kantāraddhānamaggapaṭipanno puriso corehi manussānaṃ viluttokāsaṃ pahatokāsañca disvā daṇḍakasaddenapi sakuṇasaddenapi corā āgatāti ussaṅkitaparisaṅkito hoti, gacchatipi, tiṭṭhatipi, nivattatipi, gataṭṭhānato āgataṭṭhānameva bahutaraṃ hoti. So kicchena kasirena khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti vā, na vā pāpuṇāti. Evamevaṃ yassa aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu vicikicchā uppannā hoti. So ‘‘buddho nu kho, na nu kho buddho’’tiādinā nayena vicikicchanto adhimuccitvā saddhāya gaṇhituṃ na sakkoti. Asakkonto maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā na pāpuṇātīti yathā kantāraddhānamagge ‘‘corā atthi natthī’’ti punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitatta cittassa uppādento khemantapattiyā antarāyaṃ karoti, evaṃ vicikicchāpi ‘‘buddho nu kho na buddho’’tiādinā nayena punappunaṃ āsappanaparisappanaṃ apariyogāhanaṃ chambhitattaṃ cittassa uppādayamānā ariyabhūmippattiyā antarāyaṃ karotīti kantāraddhānamaggo viya daṭṭhabbā.
现在,世尊在这里把已经断除的欲贪盖比作“无债”,把其余几个盖分别比作“无病”等等,用比喻来显示。这里的相似之处是这样的:好比有人借了钱去做事业,事业成功了,他想到“这笔债务是障碍的根源”,于是连本带利把债还清,把借据销毁。从那时起,再也没有人派使者来催债,也不会送来催债的信件;他再见到债主时,如果愿意就起身,不愿意就不起身。为什么?因为他和那些人已经毫无牵连、不再粘着。同样地,比丘想到“这个欲贪正是障碍的根源”,就按照《念处经》里所说的方法修习六法,断除了欲贪盖。这样断除了欲贪之后,就像还清债务的人见到债主一样。同样地,他对外在的事物没有贪着,没有系缚;即使看到天界的美色,烦恼也不会现起。所以世尊说,断除欲贪就像“无债”。巴利
Idāni seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, āṇaṇyanti ettha bhagavā pahīnakāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ āṇaṇyasadisaṃ, sesāni ārogyādisadisāni katvā dasseti. Tatrāyaṃ sadisatā – yathā hi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojetvā samiddhakammanto, ‘‘idaṃ iṇaṃ nāma palibodhamūla’’nti cintetvā savaḍḍhikaṃ iṇaṃ niyyātetvā paṇṇaṃ phālāpeyya. Athassa tato paṭṭhāya neva koci dūtaṃ peseti, na paṇṇaṃ, so iṇasāmike disvāpi sace icchati, āsanā uṭṭhahati, no ce, na uṭṭhahati. Kasmā? Tehi saddhiṃ nillepatāya alaggatāya. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ kāmacchando nāma palibodhamūla’’nti satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva cha dhamme bhāvetvā kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. Tassevaṃ pahīnakāmacchandassa yathā iṇamuttassa purisassa iṇasāmike disvā neva bhayaṃ na chambhitattaṃ hoti. Evameva paravatthumhi neva saṅgo na bandho hoti. Dibbānipi rūpāni passato kileso na samudācarati. Tasmā bhagavā āṇaṇyamiva kāmacchandappahānamāha.
就像那个患胆病的人,通过药物治疗把病治好之后,从此就能尝到蜂蜜、糖等甜味。同样地,比丘思维:“这个叫瞋恚的东西,是会带来危害的。”于是修习六种法,断除了瞋恚盖。他这样断除了瞋恚之后,就像摆脱胆病的人,欢欢喜喜地享用蜂蜜、糖等甜食。同样地,当别人教他学处、行为规范等时,他也恭敬接受,欢喜地学习。因此,世尊说断除瞋恚就像“无病”一样。巴利
Yathā pana so pittarogāturo puriso bhesajjakiriyāya taṃ rogaṃ vūpasametvā tato paṭṭhāya madhusakkarādīnaṃ rasaṃ vindati. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ byāpādo nāma anatthakārako’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā byāpādanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnabyāpādo yathā pittarogavimutto puriso madhusakkarādīni madhurāni sampiyāyamāno paṭisevati. Evamevaṃ ācārapaṇṇattiādīni sikkhāpiyamāno sirasā sampaṭicchitvā sampiyāyamāno sikkhati. Tasmā bhagavā ārogyamiva byāpādappahānamāha.
就像那个人在星宿节庆日被关进牢房,到了另一个星宿节庆日时,他心想:“我以前因为放逸的过失而被捆绑,没能享受那个节庆,现在我要不放逸。”这样,他的敌人就找不到可乘之机。他如此不放逸地享受节庆之后,发出感叹:“啊,这节庆!啊,这节庆!”同样地,比丘认识到“这昏沉睡眠确实危害极大”,便修习六法,舍断昏沉睡眠盖。他这样舍断了昏沉睡眠之后,就像从牢狱中获释的人一样,能完整地享受七天节庆的开头、中间和结尾。同样地,比丘完整地享受法之节庆的开头、中间和结尾,与无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。因此,世尊说舍断昏沉睡眠就像从牢狱中获释。巴利
Yathā so nakkhattadivase bandhanāgāraṃ pavesito puriso aparasmiṃ nakkhattadivase, ‘‘pubbepi ahaṃ pamādadosena baddho taṃ nakkhattaṃ nānubhavāmi, idāni appamatto bhavissāmī’’ti yathāssa paccatthikā okāsaṃ na labhanti. Evaṃ appamatto hutvā nakkhattaṃ anubhavitvā – ‘‘aho nakkhattaṃ aho nakkhatta’’nti udānaṃ udānesi. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘idaṃ thinamiddhaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnathinamiddho yathā bandhanā mutto puriso sattāhampi nakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavati. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu dhammanakkhattassa ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ anubhavanto saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā bandhanā mokkhamiva thinamiddhappahānamāha.
就像有个奴隶,依靠某个朋友,向主人付了钱赎身,让自己成了自由人,从那时起,他想做什么就能做什么。同样,比丘认识到“这掉举和追悔确实会造成极大的危害”,于是修习六种法,断除掉举和追悔。他这样断除掉举和追悔之后,就像那个自由人一样,想做什么就做什么,没有人能强行把他拉回来。同样,比丘可以随心所欲地修行出离之道,掉举和追悔无法强行把他从这条路上拉回来。因此,世尊把断除掉举和追悔比作获得自由的人。巴利
Yathā pana dāso kañcideva mittaṃ upanissāya sāmikānaṃ dhanaṃ datvā attānaṃ bhujissaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yaṃ icchati, taṃ kareyya. Evameva bhikkhu, ‘‘idaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ nāma mahāanatthakara’’nti cha dhamme bhāvetvā uddhaccakukkuccaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnuddhaccakukkucco yathā bhujisso puriso yaṃ icchati, taṃ karoti. Na taṃ koci balakkārena tato nivatteti. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu yathāsukhaṃ nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, na naṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ balakkārena tato nivatteti. Tasmā bhagavā bhujissaṃ viya uddhaccakukkuccappahānamāha.
就像有个力气很大的人,手里拿着结实的棍棒,身上带着武器,还有随从跟着,走进一片荒无人烟的险地。盗贼们远远看见他,就吓得逃跑了。他平平安安地走出那片险地,到达安全的地方,满心欢喜快乐。同样,比丘心里明白“这个疑就是害人的东西”,于是修习六种法,断除了疑。他这样断除了疑之后,就像那个力气大、带着武器、有随从的男子一样,什么都不怕,根本不把盗贼放在眼里,平平安安地走出来,到达安全的地方。同样,比丘走过了恶行这片险地,到达了最安全的地方——不死的涅槃。所以,世尊把断除疑比作安全的地方。巴利
Yathā balavā puriso hatthasāraṃ gahetvā sajjāvudho saparivāro kantāraṃ paṭipajjeyya. Taṃ corā dūratova disvā palāyeyyuṃ. So sotthinā taṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā khemantaṃ patto haṭṭhatuṭṭho assa. Evamevaṃ bhikkhu, ‘‘ayaṃ vicikicchā nāma anatthakārikā’’ti cha dhamme bhāvetvā vicikicchaṃ pajahati. So evaṃ pahīnavicikiccho yathā balavā sajjāvudho saparivāro puriso nibbhayo core tiṇaṃ viya agaṇetvā sotthinā nikkhamitvā khemantabhūmiṃ pāpuṇāti. Evamevaṃ duccaritakantāraṃ nittharitvā paramakhemantabhūmiṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tasmā bhagavā khemantabhūmiṃ viya vicikicchāpahānamāha.
427 就是这身体:指这个由业所生的身体。灌注:意思是把它润湿、滋润,让喜乐遍满一切处。周遍灌注:意思是从四周灌注。充满:意思是像用风把皮囊充满那样充满。遍满:意思是周遍接触。此比丘的全身:指这位比丘身体的所有部分。在业所生身的相续中,凡是连着皮肤、肌肉、血液的极微细之处,没有一处不被初禅的喜乐所触及。善巧者:指技术娴熟、有能力制作、调配、揉合沐浴粉的人。铜盆:指任何金属制成的器皿。陶器则不坚固,揉合时容易碎裂,所以不用它来比喻。一再洒水:意思是反复洒水。揉合:意思是用左手拿铜盆,右手取适量的水,一遍遍洒水,揉捏成团。为水所润:意思是被水的湿润所渗透。为水所遍含:意思是被水的湿润所包围。内外俱:意思是内部和外部所有部分,也就是整团都被水的湿润所触及。而不滴水:意思是水不会一滴一滴漏出来,可以用手,也可以用两根或三根手指拿起来,甚至可以把它做成团。巴利
427.Imameva kāyanti imaṃ karajakāyaṃ. Abhisandetīti temeti sneheti, sabbattha pavattapītisukhaṃ karoti. Parisandetīti samantato sandeti. Paripūretīti vāyunā bhastaṃ viya pūreti. Parippharatīti samantato phusati . Sabbāvato kāyassāti assa bhikkhuno sabbakoṭṭhāsavato kāyassa. Kiñci upādinnakasantatipavattiṭṭhāne chavimaṃsalohitānugataṃ aṇumattampi ṭhānaṃ paṭhamajjhānasukhena aphuṭṭhaṃ nāma na hoti. Dakkhoti cheko paṭibalo nhānīyacuṇṇāni kātuñceva yojetuñca sannetuñca. Kaṃsathāleti yena kenaci lohena katabhājane. Mattikabhājanaṃ pana thiraṃ na hoti, sannentassa bhijjati, tasmā taṃ na dasseti. Paripphosakaṃ paripphosakanti siñcitvā siñcitvā. Sanneyyāti vāmahatthena kaṃsathālaṃ gahetvā dakkhiṇena hatthena pamāṇayuttaṃ udakaṃ siñcitvā siñcitvā parimaddanto piṇḍaṃ kareyya. Snehānugatāti udakasinehena anugatā. Snehaparetāti udakasinehena parigatā. Santarabāhirāti saddhiṃ antopadesena ceva bahipadesena ca, sabbatthakameva udakasinehena phuṭāti attho. Na ca pagghariṇīti na bindu bindu udakaṃ paggharati, sakkā hoti hatthenapi dvīhipi tīhipi aṅgulīhi gahetuṃ ovaṭṭikampi kātunti attho.
428 在第二禅那乐的譬喻中,“从内部涌出的水”是指从内部涌出的水,不是从下面涌上来冒出的水,而是只在内部涌出的水,这就是它的意思。“入口”是指水流进来的通道。“天”是指云。“时时”是指一次又一次,也就是每半个月或每十天。“降雨”是指下雨。“不降”是指不让它进入,也就是不下雨的意思。清凉的水流涌出,是指清凉的水涌出后充满那个水池。因为如果是从下面涌上来冒出的水,一次次涌上来又破裂,就会把池水搅浑;从四个方向流进来的水,会带着枯叶、草、木棍等杂物把水搅浑;雨水则因为雨柱落下时溅起的泡沫把水搅浑。只有那种静静安住、像神通变化所生起一样的水,才能遍满这个地方,不存在“这个地方没有遍满”的情况,所以没有一处不被水触及。在这里,水池好比业所生的身体,水好比第二禅那的喜乐。其余的内容按照前面的方式理解。巴利
428. Dutiyajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ ubbhitodakoti ubbhinnaudako, na heṭṭhā ubbhijjitvā uggacchanaudako, antoyeva pana ubbhijjanaudakoti attho. Āyamukhanti āgamanamaggo. Devoti megho. Kālenakālanti kāle kāle, anvaddhamāsaṃ vā anudasāhaṃ vāti attho. Dhāranti vuṭṭhiṃ. Nānuppaveccheyyāti na paveseyya, na vasseyyāti attho. Sītā vāridhārā ubbhijjitvāti sītaṃ vāri taṃ udakarahadaṃ pūrayamānaṃ ubbhijjitvā. Heṭṭhā uggacchanaudakañhi uggantvā uggantvā bhijjantaṃ udakaṃ khobheti. Catūhi disāhi pavisanaudakaṃ purāṇapaṇṇatiṇakaṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi udakaṃ khobheti. Vuṭṭhiudakaṃ dhārānipātapupphuḷakehi udakaṃ khobheti. Sannisinnameva pana hutvā iddhinimmitamiva uppajjamānaṃ udakaṃ imaṃ padesaṃ pharati, imaṃ padesaṃ na pharatīti natthi. Tena aphuṭokāso nāma na hotīti. Tattha rahado viya karajakāyo, udakaṃ viya dutiyajjhānasukhaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
429 在第三禅那乐的譬喻中,这里因为有青莲花,所以叫青莲池。剩下两组词也按同样的道理理解。这里,在白、红、蓝各类当中,凡是青莲花就只是青莲花;花瓣不满一百片的叫白莲花,满一百片的叫红莲花。或者,不按花瓣数量来定,也有把白莲花算作红莲花、把红莲花算作白莲花的,这是这里的判定标准。“未浮出水面”,是指没有从水里冒出来。“在水下生长”,是指完全没入水面以下而生长,意思是在下面长大。其余部分按前面的方式理解。巴利
429. Tatiyajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī. Sesapadadvayesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca setarattanīlesu yaṃkiñci uppalaṃ uppalameva, ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ, satapattaṃ padumaṃ. Pattaniyamaṃ vā vināpi setaṃ padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkanti ayamettha vinicchayo. Udakānuggatānīti udakato na uggatāni. Antonimuggaposīnīti udakatalassa anto nimuggāniyeva hutvā posīni, vaḍḍhīnīti attho. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
430 在第四禅那乐的譬喻中,“以清净、洁白之心”这句话里,从没有杂染的角度说是“清净”,从光明洁净的角度应当理解为“洁白”。“以白衣”这一句是用来说明遍满的作用。因为脏衣服不会产生遍满的作用,只有当下洗净的清净衣服,遍满的作用才强。在这个譬喻里,衣服好比业生之身,遍满的作用好比第四禅那之乐。因此,就像一个人洗浴干净后,穿上清净的白衣从头覆盖而坐,身体散发的暖势遍及整件衣服,衣服没有一处不被触及。同样,比丘的业生之身也没有一处不被第四禅那之乐遍及,这里的意思应当这样理解。或者,第四禅那心本身好比衣服,由它生起的色法好比遍满的作用。就像有时身体虽然没有直接碰到白衣,但由衣服所生的暖势仍然遍及全身各处;同样,由第四禅那所生的微细色法遍及比丘业生之身的一切处,这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
430. Catutthajjhānasukhaupamāyaṃ parisuddhena cetasā pariyodātenāti ettha nirupakkilesaṭṭhena parisuddhaṃ. Pabhassaraṭṭhena pariyodātaṃ veditabbaṃ. Odātena vatthenāti idaṃ utupharaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthena hi utupharaṇaṃ na hoti, taṅkhaṇadhotaparisuddhena utupharaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti. Imissā hi upamāya vatthaṃ viya karajakāyo. Utupharaṇaṃ viya catutthajjhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā yathā sunhātassa purisassa parisuddhaṃ vatthaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā nisinnassa sarīrato utu sabbameva vatthaṃ pharati, na koci vatthassa aphuṭokāso hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasukhena bhikkhuno karajakāyassa na koci okāso aphuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Catutthajjhānacittameva vā vatthaṃ viya, taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ utupharaṇaṃ viya. Yathā hi katthaci odātavatthe kāyaṃ apphusantepi taṃsamuṭṭhānena utunā sabbatthakameva kāyo phuṭṭho hoti. Evaṃ catutthajjhānasamuṭṭhitena sukhumarūpena sabbatthakameva bhikkhuno karajakāyo phuṭo hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
431 431. 在宿命智的譬喻中,由于“那天所做的事变得明显”,所以这里只取他那天所去的三个村落。其中,应当把去了三个村落的那个人理解为获得宿命智的人,应当把三个村落理解为三有。就像那个人在三个村落里,那天所做的事都显现出来一样,比丘把心导向宿命智之后坐着,在三有中所做的事都显现出来,应当这样看待。巴利
431. Pubbenivāsañāṇaupamāyaṃ taṃdivasaṃ katakiriyā pākaṭā hotīti taṃdivasaṃ gatagāmattayameva gahitaṃ. Tattha gāmattayaṃ gatapuriso viya pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī daṭṭhabbo. Tayo gāmā viya tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā. Tassa purisassa tīsu gāmesu taṃdivasaṃ katakiriyāya āvibhāvo viya pubbenivāsāya cittaṃ abhinīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno tīsu bhavesu katakiriyāya āvibhāvo daṭṭhabbo.
432 432. 在天眼通的譬喻中,“两家”指两座房子。“有门”指正面相对有门。“来回经行”指前后不断地走动。“到处游走”指从这里到那里四处走动;也可以理解为从这座房子出来进入那座房子,或者从那座房子出来进入这座房子。在这个譬喻里,两座有门的房子好比死亡与结生;有眼睛的人好比获得天眼智的人。有眼睛的人站在两座房子中间,清楚地看见人们进出两座房子,就像获得天眼的人放大光明进行观察时,清楚地看见众生死亡和投生的时刻。那么,这些景象是对智慧本身明显,还是对个人明显?是对智慧明显。不过,正因为对智慧明显,所以对个人也同样明显。巴利
432. Dibbacakkhuupamāyaṃ dve agārāti dve gharā. Sadvārāti sammukhadvārā. Anucaṅkamanteti aparāparaṃ sañcarante. Anuvicaranteti ito cito ca vicarante, ito pana gehā nikkhamitvā etaṃ gehaṃ, etasmā vā nikkhamitvā imaṃ gehaṃ pavisanavasenapi daṭṭhabbā. Tattha dve agārā sadvārā viya cutipaṭisandhiyo, cakkhumā puriso viya dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī, cakkhumato purisassa dvinnaṃ gehānaṃ antare ṭhatvā passato dve agāre pavisanakanikkhamanakapurisānaṃ pākaṭakālo viya dibbacakkhulābhino ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā olokentassa cavanakaupapajjanakasattānaṃ pākaṭakālo. Kiṃ pana te ñāṇassa pākaṭā, puggalassāti? Ñāṇassa. Tassa pākaṭattā pana puggalassa pākaṭāyevāti.
433 在“漏尽智的譬喻”这一段里,“于山顶”就是指在山顶上。“不浊”就是没有淤泥。“贝螺”是指贝类和螺类。“沙砾”是指沙子和碎石。“鱼群”是指鱼聚成的一群。在“或住或游”这一句里,沙砾始终只是安住不动,而另外两类则有时游动、有时停住。就像一群牛,有的站着、有的坐着、有的存在着,但人们还是说“这些牛在走动”,这是以其中正在走动的牛为代表,把其余的也说成在走动。同样,这里以始终安住的沙砾为代表,另外两类也可以说成是“住”;反过来,以另外两类的游动为代表,沙砾也可以说成是“游”。在这个譬喻里,有眼睛的人站在岸边观看,当贝螺等物清清楚楚显现时,应当把这情形视同比丘为了灭尽诸漏而提起心、坐下来时四圣谛清清楚楚显现的情形。巴利
433. Āsavakkhayañāṇaupamāyaṃ pabbatasaṅkhepeti pabbatamatthake. Anāviloti nikkaddamo. Sippiyo ca sambukā ca sippisambukaṃ. Sakkharā ca kathalā ca sakkharakathalaṃ. Macchānaṃ gumbā ghaṭāti macchagumbaṃ. Tiṭṭhantampi carantampīti ettha sakkharakathalaṃ tiṭṭhatiyeva, itarāni carantipi tiṭṭhantipi. Yathā pana antarantarā ṭhitāsupi nisinnāsupi vijjamānāsupi, ‘‘etā gāvo carantī’’ti carantiyo upādāya itarāpi carantīti vuccanti. Evaṃ tiṭṭhantameva sakkharakathalaṃ upādāya itarampi dvayaṃ tiṭṭhantanti vuttaṃ. Itarañca dvayaṃ carantaṃ upādāya sakkharakathalampi carantanti vuttaṃ. Tattha cakkhumato purisassa tīre ṭhatvā passato sippisambukādīnaṃ vibhūtakālo viya āsavānaṃ khayāya cittaṃ nīharitvā nisinnassa bhikkhuno catunnaṃ saccānaṃ vibhūtakālo daṭṭhabbo.
434 现在,为了从特征和功德两方面、以七种方式为漏尽者安立名称,世尊说了“诸比丘,这位比丘称为沙门”等话。其中,在“诸比丘,如此,比丘成为沙门”等句中,诸比丘,如此,比丘因为平息了恶,所以成为沙门;因为排除了恶,所以成为婆罗门;因为洗净了烦恼,所以成为洗净者,意思是涤除了烦恼;因为以四道智为体的智慧了知了不善法,所以成为极智者,意思是已了知,因此说了“这些已被他了知”等话;因为烦恼已流出,所以成为通经者,意思是已流出、已除去;因为远离烦恼,所以成为圣洁者,意思是已杀灭烦恼;因为那些烦恼已远远离去,所以成为应供,意思是已远离而住。其余各处文义都很明了。巴利
434. Idāni sattahākārehi saliṅgato saguṇato khīṇāsavassa nāmaṃ gaṇhanto, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇo itipītiādimāha. Tattha evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu samaṇohotītiādīsu, bhikkhave, evaṃ bhikkhu samitapāpattā samaṇo hoti. Bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo hoti. Nhātakilesattā nhātako hoti, dhotakilesattāti attho. Catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi akusaladhammānaṃ gatattā vedagū hoti, viditattāti attho. Teneva viditāssa hontītiādimāha. Kilesānaṃ sutattā sottiyo hoti, nissutattā apahatattāti attho. Kilesānaṃ ārakattā ariyo hoti, hatattāti attho. Tehi ārakattā arahaṃ hoti, dūrībhūtattāti attho. Sesaṃ sabattha pākaṭamevāti.
10. 小马邑经的注释巴利
10. Cūḷaassapurasuttavaṇṇanā
435 “如是我闻”这句,说的是《小马邑经》。它说法的因缘和前一篇一样。“沙门正行”,就是指适合沙门的、随顺沙门的修行。巴利
435.Evaṃme sutanti cūḷaassapurasuttaṃ. Tassa desanākāraṇaṃ purimasadisameva. Samaṇasāmīcippaṭipadāti samaṇānaṃ anucchavikā samaṇānaṃ anulomappaṭipadā.
436 关于“沙门垢”等说法:这些法生起时,会让沙门变得污秽,像被污垢沾染一样,所以叫“沙门垢”。因为这些法,沙门被污染、被严重污染,所以叫“沙门过恶”。这些法生起后,会让沙门变得粗劣、没有光泽、憔悴,所以叫“沙门渣滓”。“导向苦处的因”,是指导致投生到恶趣的原因。“能感得恶趣受”,是指成为在恶趣中感受果报的缘。“死生”这个名字:人们拿一块锐利的铁和另一块铁互相摩擦,把磨下来的铁屑和肉混在一起,喂给鹤鸟吃。那些鹤鸟无法排便而死。如果不死,就打它们杀死。然后剖开它们的肚子,用水洗净,取出铁屑,和肉混在一起再喂给它们吃。如此喂食七次后,取所得的铁屑制作武器。技艺娴熟的铁匠们得到它,花费许多手工作为成本来制作。因为是从死鸟中产生的,所以叫“死生”,它极为锐利。“饮水研磨”,是指用水喝过并在石头上好好磨过。“桑喀帝”,是指丝绸制的。“覆盖”,是指完全包裹。“遍缠”,是指从四周全部缠裹起来。巴利
436.Samaṇamalānantiādīsu ete dhammā uppajjamānā samaṇe maline karonti malaggahite, tasmā ‘‘samaṇamalā’’ti vuccanti. Etehi samaṇā dussanti, padussanti, tasmā samaṇadosāti vuccanti. Ete uppajjitvā samaṇe kasaṭe niroje karonti milāpenti, tasmā samaṇakasaṭāti vuccanti. Āpāyikānaṃ ṭhānānanti apāye nibbattāpakānaṃ kāraṇānaṃ. Duggativedaniyānanti duggatiyaṃ vipākavedanāya paccayānaṃ. Matajaṃ nāmāti manussā tikhiṇaṃ ayaṃ ayena sughaṃsitvā taṃ ayacuṇṇaṃ maṃsena saddhiṃ madditvā koñcasakuṇe khādāpenti. Te uccāraṃ kātuṃ asakkontā maranti. No ce maranti, paharitvā mārenti. Atha tesaṃ kucchiṃ phāletvā naṃ udakena dhovitvā cuṇṇaṃ gahetvā maṃsena saddhiṃ madditvā puna khādāpentīti evaṃ satta vāre khādāpetvā gahitena ayacuṇṇena āvudhaṃ karonti. Susikkhitā ca naṃ ayakārā bahuhatthakammamūlaṃ labhitvā karonti. Taṃ matasakuṇato jātattā ‘‘mataja’’nti vuccati, atitikhiṇaṃ hoti. Pītanisitanti udakapītañceva silāya ca sunighaṃsitaṃ. Saṅghāṭiyāti kosiyā. Sampārutanti pariyonaddhaṃ. Sampaliveṭhitanti samantato veṭhitaṃ.
437 “尘垢行者”,是指带着尘垢的人。“入水行者”,是指一天三次下水沐浴的人。“树下住者”,是指住在树下的人。“露地住者”,是指住在露天的人。“常立者”,是指一直站着的人。“轮食者”,是指按一个月或半个月一轮来进食的人。这些全都只是在外道学说里才这么说。因为在佛陀的教法里,穿着袈裟的比丘并不叫“僧伽帝者”;持守尘垢这类修行在佛教中根本不存在。属于佛语的,就叫佛语,不叫咒语。至于“树下住者”“露地住者”,只有这些名称在佛教中还能找到,但那也是外道学说里的说法。“就在出生当天”,意思是就在它出生的那一天,刚刚出生,就让它“成为僧伽帝者”,也就是给它穿上并披上僧伽帝衣,使它成为僧伽帝者。这个道理适用于所有相关情况。巴利
437.Rajojallikassāti rajojalladhārino. Udakorohakassāti divasassa tikkhattuṃ udakaṃ orohantassa. Rukkhamūlikassāti rukkhamūlavāsino. Abbhokāsikassāti abbhokāsavāsino. Ubbhaṭṭhakassāti uddhaṃ ṭhitakassa. Pariyāyabhattikassāti māsavārena vā aḍḍhamāsavārena vā bhuñjantassa. Sabbametaṃ bāhirasamayeneva kathitaṃ. Imasmiñhi sāsane cīvaradharo bhikkhu saṅghāṭikoti na vuccati. Rajojalladhāraṇādivatāni imasmiṃ sāsane natthiyeva. Buddhavacanassa buddhavacanameva nāmaṃ, na mantāti. Rukkhamūliko, abbhokāsikoti ettakaṃyeva pana labbhati. Tampi bāhirasamayeneva kathitaṃ. Jātamevananti taṃdivase jātamattaṃyeva naṃ. Saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyunti saṅghāṭikaṃ vatthaṃ nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca saṅghāṭikaṃ kareyyuṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.
438 看见自己在变得清净,就是看见自己正在净化。但这时还不能说他已经清净了。欢悦生起,就是生起一种满足的状态。有了喜悦,全身都被一种喜悦所震动,这就是喜生起。内心有喜的人,指的是与喜相应的那个人的名身。变得轻安,就是内心的躁动不安消失了。感受乐,就是感受到身体的乐和内心的乐。心得定,就是因为出离之乐而感到快乐的人,他的心变得安定,好像达到了安止定的状态。他以慈俱行之心——前面那些被烦恼所推动而展开的开示,就像山上降下的雨水顺着河道流入河流一样,顺着法义的关联,自然进入了梵住的修习。在这里应当说明的一切,都已经在《清净道论》中讲过了。就像“诸比丘,譬如池塘”这句,在《大狮子吼经》中是把道比喻为池塘,而在这里应当理解为是把教法比喻为池塘。由于诸漏灭尽而成为沙门,因为一切烦恼都已止息,所以他成为究竟意义上的沙门。其余各处的内容,意义都很清楚。巴利
438.Visuddhamattānaṃ samanupassatīti attānaṃ visujjhantaṃ passati. Visuddhoti pana na tāva vattabbo. Pāmojjaṃ jāyatīti tuṭṭhākāro jāyati. Pamuditassa pītīti tuṭṭhassa sakalasarīraṃ khobhayamānā pīti jāyati. Pītimanassa kāyoti pītisampayuttassa puggalassa nāmakāyo. Passambhatīti vigatadaratho hoti. Sukhaṃ vedetīti kāyikampi cetasikampi sukhaṃ vediyati. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti iminā nekkhammasukhena sukhitassa cittaṃ samādhiyati, appanāpattaṃ viya hoti. So mettāsahagatena cetasāti heṭṭhā kilesavasena āraddhā desanā pabbate vuṭṭhavuṭṭhi viya nadiṃ yathānusandhinā brahmavihārabhāvanaṃ otiṇṇā. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge vuttameva. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, pokkharaṇīti mahāsīhanādasutte maggo pokkharaṇiyā upamito, idha sāsanaṃ upamitanti veditabbaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotīti sabbakilesānaṃ samitattā paramatthasamaṇo hotīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.